7
United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea
CONTENTS
Page
PREAMBLE .................................................... 21
PART I. INTRODUCTION ....................................... 22
Article 1. Use of terms and scope ...................... 22
PART II. TERRITORIAL SEA AND CONTIGUOUS ZONE ........ 23
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................ 23
Article 2. Legal status of the territorial
sea, of the air space over the
territorial sea and of its bed
and subsoil................................ 23
SECTION 2. LIMITS OF THE TERRITORIAL SEA.................. 23
Article 3. Breadth of the territorial sea .................. 23
Article 4. Outer limit of the territorial sea ................ 23
Article 5. Normal baseline ............................ 23
Article 6. Reefs .................................... 23
Article 7. Straight baselines ........................... 24
Article 8. Internal waters ............................. 24
Article 9. Mouths of rivers............................ 24
Article 10. Bays ........ 24
Article 11. Ports..................................... 25
Article 12. Roadsteads................................ 25
Article 13. Low-tide elevations ......................... 25
Article 14. Combination of methods for
determining baselines ....................... 26
Article 15. Delimitation of the
territorial sea between
States with opposite or
adjacent coasts ............................. 26
Article 16. Charts and lists of geographical coordinates ...... 26
SECTION 3. INNOCENT PASSAGE IN THE TERRITORIAL SEA ..... 26
SUBSECTION A. RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL SHIPS ......... 26
Article 17. Right of innocent passage .................... 26
Article 18. Meaning of passage ......................... 26
Article 19. Meaning of innocent passage.................. 27
Article 20. Submarines and other underwater vehicles ....... 27
Article 21. Laws and regulations of the
coastal State relating to
innocent passage ........................... 27
Article 22. Sea lanes and traffic
separation schemes in the
territorial sea .............................. 28
Article 23. Foreign nuclear-powered
ships and ships carrying
nuclear or other inherently
8
dangerous or noxious
substances ................................ 29
Article 24. Duties of the coastal State .................... 29
Article 25. Rights of protection of the coastal State ......... 29
Article 26. Charges which may be levied upon foreign ships . . 29
SUBSECTION B. RULES APPLICABLE TO
MERCHANT SHIPS AND
GOVERNMENT SHIPS
OPERATED FOR
COMMERCIAL PURPOSES ................. 30
Article 27. Criminal jurisdiction on board a foreign ship ..... 30
Article 28. Civil jurisdiction in relation to foreign ships ...... 30
SUBSECTION C. RULES APPLICABLE TO
WARSHIPS AND OTHER
GOVERNMENT SHIPS
OPERATED FOR
NON-COMMERCIAL
PURPOSES ............................... 31
Article 29. Definition of warships ....................... 31
Article 30. Non-compliance by warships with the laws and
regulations of the coastal State ................ 31
Article 31. Responsibility of the flag
State for damage caused by
a warship or other
government ship operated
for non-commercial
purposes.................................. 31
Article 32. Immunities of warships and
other government ships
operated for
non-commercial purposes .................... 31
SECTION 4. CONTIGUOUS ZONE ............................... 31
Article 33. Contiguous zone ........................... 31
PART III. STRAITS USED FOR INTERNATIONAL
NAVIGATION ......................................... 32
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ............................ 32
Article 34. Legal status of waters
forming straits used for
international navigation ...................... 32
Article 35. Scope of this Part........................... 32
Article 36. High seas routes or routes
through exclusive economic
zones through straits used
for international navigation ................... 32
SECTION 2. TRANSIT PASSAGE................................ 33
Article 37. Scope of this section ........................ 33
Article 38. Right of transit passage ...................... 33
Article 39. Duties of ships and aircraft during transit passage . . 33
Article 40. Research and survey activities ................. 34
Article 41. Sea lanes and traffic
separation schemes in straits
9
used for international
navigation ................................ 34
Article 42. Laws and regulations of
States bordering straits
relating to transit passage..................... 35
Article 43. Navigational and safety aids
and other improvements and
the prevention, reduction
and control of pollution ...................... 35
Article 44. Duties of States bordering straits ............... 35
SECTION 3. INNOCENT PASSAGE .............................. 36
Article 45. Innocent passage ........................... 36
PART IV. ARCHIPELAGIC STATES ........................... 36
Article 46. Use of terms............................... 36
Article 47. Archipelagic baselines ....................... 36
Article 48. Measurement of the breadth
of the territorial sea, the
contiguous zone, the
exclusive economic zone
and the continental shelf ..................... 37
Article 49. Legal status of archipelagic
waters, of the air space over
archipelagic waters and of
their bed and subsoil ........................ 37
Article 50. Delimitation of internal waters ................ 37
Article 51. Existing agreements,
traditional fishing rights and
existing submarine cables .................... 38
Article 52. Right of innocent passage .................... 38
Article 53. Right of archipelagic sea lanes passage .......... 38
Article 54. Duties of ships and aircraft
during their passage,
research and survey
activities, duties of the
archipelagic State and laws
and regulations of the
archipelagic State relating
to archipelagic sea lanes
passage................................... 39
PART V. EXCLUSIVE ECONOMIC ZONE ..................... 40
Article 55. Specific legal regime of the
exclusive economic zone ..................... 40
Article 56. Rights, jurisdiction and
duties of the coastal State in
the exclusive economic
zone ..................................... 40
Article 57. Breadth of the exclusive economic zone ......... 40
10
Article 58. Rights and duties of other
States in the exclusive
economic zone ............................. 40
Article 59. Basis for the resolution of
conflicts regarding the
attribution of rights and
jurisdiction in the exclusive
economic zone ............................. 41
Article 60. Artificial islands,
installations and structures
in the exclusive economic
zone ..................................... 41
Article 61. Conservation of the living resources ............ 42
Article 62. Utilization of the living resources .............. 43
Article 63. Stocks occurring within the
exclusive economic zones
of two or more coastal
States or both within the
exclusive economic zone
and in an area beyond and
adjacent to it .............................. 44
Article 64. Highly migratory species ..................... 44
Article 65. Marine mammals ........................... 44
Article 66. Anadromous stocks ......................... 45
Article 67. Catadromous species ........................ 45
Article 68. Sedentary species........................... 46
Article 69. Right of land-locked States ................... 46
Article 70. Right of geographically
disadvantaged States ........................ 47
Article 71. Non-applicability of articles 69 and 70 .......... 48
Article 72. Restrictions on transfer of rights ............... 48
Article 73. Enforcement of laws and
regulations of the coastal
State ..................................... 48
Article 74. Delimitation of the
exclusive economic zone
between States with
opposite or adjacent coasts ................... 49
Article 75. C h a r t s a n d l i s t s o f
geographical coordinates ..................... 49
PART VI. CONTINENTAL SHELF ............................. 49
Article 76. Definition of the continental shelf .............. 49
Article 77. Rights of the coastal State over the continental shelf. 51
Article 78. Legal status of th e
superjacent waters and air
space and the rights and
freedoms of other States...................... 51
Article 79. Submarine cables and
pipelines on the continental
shelf ..................................... 51
11
Article 80. Artificial islands,
installations and structures
on the continental shelf ...................... 52
Article 81. Drilling on the continental shelf ............... 52
Article 82. Payments and contributions
with respect to the
exploitation of the
continental shelf beyond
200 nautical miles .......................... 52
Article 83. Delimitation of the
continental shelf between
States with opposite or
adjacent coasts ............................. 52
Article 84. Charts and lists of geographical coordinates ...... 53
Article 85. Tunnelling ................................ 53
PART VII.HIGH SEAS ........................................... 53
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ....................... 53
Article 86. Application of the provisions of this Part ........ 53
Article 87. Freedom of the high seas ..................... 53
Article 88. Reservation of the high seas
for peaceful
purposes.................................. 54
Article 89. Invalidity of claims of
sovereignty over the high
seas ..................................... 54
Article 90. Right of navigation ......................... 54
Article 91. Nationality of ships ......................... 54
Article 92. Status of ships ............................. 54
Article 93. Ships flying the flag of the
United Nations, its
specialized agencies and the
International Atomic
Energy Agency............................. 55
Article 94. Duties of the flag State....................... 55
Article 95. Immunity of warships on the high seas .......... 56
Article 96. Immunity of ships used only
on government
non-commercial service ...................... 56
Article 97. Penal jurisdiction in matters
of collision or any other
incident of navigation ....................... 56
Article 98. Duty to render assistance ..................... 56
Article 99. Prohibition of the transport of slaves............ 57
Article 100. Duty to cooperate in the repression of piracy ..... 57
Article 101. Definition of piracy ......................... 57
Article 102. Piracy by a warship,
government ship or
government aircraft whose
crew has mutinied .......................... 58
Article 103. Definition of a pirate ship or
aircraft ................................... 58
12
Article 104. Retention or loss of the
nationality of a pirate ship
or aircraft ................................. 58
Article 105. Seizure of a pirate ship or
aircraft ..................................... 58
Article 106. Liability for seizure without
adequate grounds ............................. 58
Article 107. Ships and aircraft which are
entitled to seize on account
of piracy.................................. 58
Article 108. Illicit traffic in narcotic
drugs or psychotropic
substances ................................ 59
Article 109. Unauthorized broadcasting
from the high seas .......................... 59
Article 110. Right of visit .............................. 59
Article 111. Right of hot pursuit ......................... 60
Article 112. Right to lay submarine cables
and pipelines .............................. 61
Article 113. Breaking or injury of a
submarine cable or pipeline
......................................... 61
Article 114. Breaking or injury by
owners of a submarine cable
or pipeline of another
submarine cable or pipeline
......................................... 61
Article 115. Indemnity for loss incurred
in avoiding injury to a
submarine cable or pipeline
......................................... 61
SECTION 2. CONSERVATION AND
MANAGEMENT OF THE LIVING
RESOURCES OF THE HIGH SEAS ............... 62
Article 116. Right to fish on the high seas .................. 62
Article 117. Duty of States to adopt with
respect to their nationals
measures for the
conservation of the living
resources of the high seas .................... 62
Article 118. Cooperation of States in the
conservation and
management of living
resources ................................. 62
Article 119. Conservation of the living
resources of the high seas .................... 62
Article 120. Marine mammals ........................... 63
PART VIII. REGIME OF ISLANDS .............................. 63
Article 121. Regime of islands ........................... 63
13
PART IX. ENCLOSED OR SEMI-ENCLOSED SEAS .............. 63
Article 122. Definition ................................. 63
Article 123. Cooperation of States
bordering enclosed or
semi-enclosed seas.......................... 64
PART X. RIGHT OF ACCESS OF LAND-LOCKED STATES TO
AND FROM THE SEA AND FREEDOM OF TRANSIT .... 64
Article 124. Use of terms ............................... 64
Article 125. Right of access to and from
the sea and freedom of
transit .................................... 65
Article 126. Exclusion of application of
the most-favoured-nation
clause .................................... 65
Article 127. Customs duties, taxes and
other charges .............................. 65
Article 128. Free zones and other
customs facilities ........................... 65
Article 129. C ooperation in the
construction and
improvement of means of
transport.................................. 65
Article 130. Measures to avoid or
eliminate delays or other
difficulties of a technical
nature in traffic in transit ..................... 66
Article 131. Equal treatment in maritime
ports ..................................... 66
Article 132. Grant of greater transit
facilities .................................. 66
PART XI. THE AREA........................................ 66
SECTION l. GENERAL PROVISIONS ..................... 66
Article 133. Use of terms ............................... 66
Article 134. Scope of this Part ........................... 66
Article 135. Legal status of the
superjacent waters and air
space .................................... 67
SECTION 2. PRINCIPLES GOVERNING THE AREA ......... 67
Article 136. Common heritage of mankind ................. 67
Article 137. Legal status of the Area and its resources ........ 67
Article 138. General conduct of States in relation to the Area . . . 67
Article 139. Responsibility to ensure
compliance and liability for
damage................................... 67
Article 140. Benefit of mankind ......................... 68
Article 141. Use of the Area exclusively for peaceful purposes . 68
Article 142. Rights and legitimate interests of coastal States . . . 68
Article 143. Marine scientific research .................... 69
14
Article 144. Transfer of technology ....................... 69
Article 145. Protection of the marine environment ........... 70
Article 146. Protection of human life ..................... 70
Article 147. A c c o m m o d a t i o n o f
activities in the Area and in
the marine environment ...................... 70
Article 148. Participation of developing
States in activities in the
Area ..................................... 71
Article 149. Archaeological and historical objects ........... 71
SECTION 3. DEVELOPMENT OF RESOURCES OF THE AREA . . 71
Article 150. Policies relating to activities in the Area ......... 71
Article 151. Production policies ......................... 72
Article 152. Exercise of powers and
functions by the Authority .................... 75
Article 153. System of exploration and exploitation .......... 75
Article 154. Periodic review ............................ 76
Article 155. The Review Conference ...................... 76
SECTION 4. THE AUTHORITY ............................. 78
SUBSECTION A. GENERAL PROVISIONS ................... 78
Article 156. Establishment of the Authority ................ 78
Article 157. Nature and fundamental
principles of the Authority.................... 78
Article 158. Organs of the Authority ...................... 78
SUBSECTION B. THE ASSEMBLY .......................... 79
Article 159. Composition, procedure and voting ............. 79
Article 160. Powers and functions ........................ 79
SUBSECTION C. THE COUNCIL ............................ 81
Article 161. Composition, procedure and voting ............. 81
Article 162. Powers and functions ........................ 83
Article 163. Organs of the Council ....................... 86
Article 164. The Economic Planning Commission ........... 87
Article 165. The Legal and Technical Commission ........... 88
SUBSECTION D. THE SECRETARIAT ....................... 89
Article 166. The Secretariat ............................. 89
Article 167. The staff of the Authority ..................... 90
Article 168. International character of the Secretariat ......... 90
Article 169. C o n s u l t a t i o n a n d
cooperation with
international and
non-governmental
organizations .............................. 91
SUBSECTION E. THE ENTERPRISE......................... 91
Article 170. The Enterprise ............................. 91
SUBSECTION F. F I N A N C I A L
ARRANGEMENTS
OF THE AUTHORITY ...................... 91
Article 171. Funds of the Authority ....................... 91
Article 172. Annual budget of the Authority ................ 92
Article 173. Expenses of the Authority .................... 92
Article 174. Borrowing power of the Authority .............. 92
Article 175. Annual audit .............................. 92
15
SUBSECTION G. LEGAL STATUS,
PRIVILEGES
AND IMMUNITIES ........................ 93
Article 176. Legal status ............................... 93
Article 177. Privileges and immunities .................... 93
Article 178. Immunity from legal process .................. 93
Article 179. Immunity from search and any form of seizure .... 93
Article 180. E x e m p t i o n f r o m
restrictions, regulations,
controls and moratoria ....................... 93
Article 181. Archives and official
communications of the
Authority ................................. 93
Article 182. Privileges and immunities
of certain persons
connected with the
Authority ................................. 94
Article 183. Exemption from taxes and customs duties ........ 94
SUBSECTION H. SUSPENSION OF THE
EXERCISE OF RIGHTS
AND PRIVILEGES OF
MEMBERS ............................... 94
Article 184. Suspension of the exercise of voting rights ....... 94
Article 185. Suspension of exercise of rights and privileges
of membership ............................. 95
SECTION 5. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES AND
ADVISORY OPINIONS ......................... 95
Article 186. Seabed Disputes Chamber
of the International Tribunal
for the Law of the Sea ....................... 95
Article 187. Jurisdiction of the Seabed
Disputes Chamber .......................... 95
Article 188. Submission of disputes to a
special chamber of the
International Tribunal for
the Law of the Sea or an
ad hoc chamber of the
Seabed Disputes Chamber
or to binding commercial
arbitration ................................ 96
Article 189. Limitation on jurisdiction
with regard to decisions of
the Authority .............................. 97
Article 190. P a r t i c i p a t i o n a n d
appearance of sponsoring
States Parties in
proceedings ............................... 97
Article 191. Advisory opinions .......................... 97
PART XII. PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION OF THE MARINE
ENVIRONMENT ....................................... 98
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ....................... 98
16
Article 192. General obligation .......................... 98
Article 193. Sovereign right of States to
exploit their natural
resources ................................. 98
Article 194. Measures to prevent, reduce
and control pollution of the
marine environment ......................... 98
Article 195. Duty not to transfer damage
or hazards or transform one
type of pollution into
another ................................... 99
Article 196. Use of technologies or
introduction of alien or new
species ................................... 99
SECTION 2. GLOBAL AND REGIONAL COOPERATION ....... 99
Article 197. Cooperation on a global or regional basis ........ 99
Article 198. Notification of imminent or actual damage ...... 100
Article 199. Contingency plans against pollution ........... 100
Article 200. S t u d i e s , r e s e a r c h
programmes and exchange
of information and data ..................... 100
Article 201. Scientific criteria for regulations .............. 100
SECTION 3. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE .................... 100
Article 202. Scientific and technical
assistance to developing
States ................................... 100
Article 203. Preferential treatment for developing States ..... 101
SECTION 4. M O N I T O R I N G A N D
ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESS-
MENT ...................................... 101
Article 204. Monitoring of the risks or effects of pollution .... 101
Article 205. Publication of reports ....................... 101
Article 206. Assessment of potential effects of activities ..... 101
SECTION 5. INTERNATIONAL RULES AND
NATIONAL LEGISLATION TO
PREVENT, REDUCE AND
CONTROL POLLUTION OF THE
MARINE ENVIRONMENT ..................... 102
Article 207. Pollution from land-based sources ............. 102
Article 208. Pollution from seabed
activities subject to national
jurisdiction............................... 102
Article 209. Pollution from activities in the Area ........... 103
Article 210. Pollution by dumping ...................... 103
Article 211. Pollution from vessels ...................... 103
Article 212. Pollution from or through the atmosphere ....... 105
SECTION 6. ENFORCEMENT ............................. 105
Article 213. Enforcement with respect to
pollution from land-based
sources .................................. 105
Article 214. Enforcement with respect to
pollution from seabed
activities ................................. 106
17
Article 215. Enforcement with respect to
pollution from activities in
the Area ................................. 106
Article 216. Enforcement with respect to
pollution by dumping...................... 106
Article 217. Enforcement by flag States .................. 106
Article 218. Enforcement by port States .................. 107
Article 219. Measu res r e lati ng to
seaworthiness of vessels to
avoid pollution............................ 108
Article 220. Enforcement by coastal States ................ 108
Article 221. Measures to avoid pollution
arising from maritime
casualties ................................ 109
Article 222. Enforcement with respect to
pollution from or through
the atmosphere ............................ 110
SECTION 7. SAFEGUARDS ............................... 110
Article 223. Measures to facilitate proceedings ............. 110
Article 224. Exercise of powers of enforcement ............ 110
Article 225. Duty to avoid adverse
consequences in the
exercise of the powers of
enforcement. ............................. 110
Article 226. Investigation of foreign vessels ............... 111
Article 227. Non-discrimination with
respect to foreign vessels ................... 111
Article 228. Suspension and restrictions
on institution of
proceedings .............................. 111
Article 229. Institution of civil proceedings ............... 112
Article 230. Monetary penalties and the
observance of recognized
rights of the accused ....................... 112
Article 231. Notification to the flag State
and other States concerned .................. 112
Article 232. Liability of States arising
from enforcement measures
........................................ 113
Article 233. Safeguards with respect to
straits used for international
navigation ............................... 113
SECTION 8. ICE-COVERED AREAS........................ 113
Article 234. Ice-covered areas .......................... 113
SECTION 9. RESPONSIBILITY AND LIABILITY ............. 113
Article 235. Responsibility and liability .................. 113
SECTION 10. SOVEREIGN IMMUNITY...................... 114
Article 236. Sovereign immunity ........................ 114
SECTION 11. OBLIGATIONS UNDER OTHER
CONVENTIONS ON THE
PROTECTION AND
PRESERVATION OF THE MARINE
ENVIRONMENT ............................. 114
18
Article 237. Obligations under other
conventions on the
protection and preservation
of the marine environment. .................. 114
PART XIII. MARINE SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH ................... 115
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................... 115
Article 238. Right to conduct marine scientific research ...... 115
Article 239. Promotion of marine scientific research ........ 115
Article 240. General principles for the
conduct of marine scientific
research ................................. 115
Article 241. Non-recognition of marine
scientific research activities
as the legal basis for claims
........................................ 115
SECTION 2. INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION ............. 116
Article 242. Promotion of international cooperation ......... 116
Article 243. Creation of favourable conditions ............. 116
Article 244. P u b l i c a t i o n a n d
dissemination of
information and knowledge
........................................ 116
SECTION 3. CONDUCT AND PROMOTION OF
MARINE SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH .............. 116
Article 245. Marine scientific research in the territorial sea . . . 116
Article 246. Marine scientific research in
the exclusive economic
zone and on the continental
shelf .................................... 117
Article 247. Marine scientific research
projects undertaken by or
under the auspices of
international organiza-tions
........................................ 118
Article 248. Duty to provide information
to the coastal State ......................... 118
Article 249. Duty to comply with certain conditions ......... 118
Article 250. C o m m u n i c a t i o n s
concerning marine scientific
research projects .......................... 119
Article 251. General criteria and guidelines ............... 119
Article 252. Implied consent ........................... 119
Article 253. Suspension or cessation of
marine scientific research
activities ................................. 120
Article 254. Rights of neighbouring
land-locked and
geographically
disadvantaged States ....................... 120
19
Article 255. Measures to facilitate
marine scientific research
and assist research vessels ................... 121
Article 256. Marine scientific research in the Area .......... 121
Article 257. Marine scientific research in
the water column beyond
the exclusive economic
zone .................................... 121
SECTION 4. SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH
INSTALLATIONS OR EQUIPMENT
IN THE MARINE ENVIRONMENT
............................................ 121
Article 258. Deployment and use ........................ 121
Article 259. Legal status .............................. 122
Article 260. Safety zones .............................. 122
Article 261. Non-interference with shipping routes .......... 122
Article 262. Identification markings and warning signals ..... 122
SECTION 5. RESPONSIBILITY AND LIABILITY ............. 122
Article 263. Responsibility and liability .................. 122
SECTION 6. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES AND
INTERIM MEASURES ........................ 123
Article 264. Settlement of disputes ...................... 123
Article 265. Interim measures .......................... 123
PART XIV. DEVELOPMENT AND TRANSFER OF
MARINE TECHNOLOGY ........................... 123
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................... 123
Article 266. P r o m o t i o n o f t h e
development and transfer of
marine technology ......................... 123
Article 267. Protection of legitimate interests .............. 123
Article 268. Basic objectives ........................... 124
Article 269. Measures to achieve the
basic objectives ........................... 124
SECTION 2. INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION
............................................ 124
Article 270. Ways and means of international cooperation .... 124
Article 271. Guidelines, criteria and standards ............. 125
Article 272. Coordination of international programmes ...... 125
Article 273. C ooperation with
international organizations
and the Authority .......................... 125
Article 274. Objectives of the Authority .................. 125
SECTION 3. NATIONAL AND REGIONAL
MARINE SCIENTI-FIC AND
TECHNOLOGICAL CENTRES .................. 126
Article 275. Establishment of national centres. ............. 126
Article 276. Establishment of regional centres ............. 126
Article 277. Functions of regional centres ................. 126
SECTION 4. COOPERATION AMONG
INTERNATIONAL
ORGANIZATIONS............................ 127
20
Article 278. Cooperation among international organizations . . 127
PART XV. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES ....................... 127
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS ...................... 127
Article 279. Obligation to settle disputes by peaceful means . . 127
Article 280. Settlement of disputes by
any peaceful means chosen
by the parties ............................. 127
Article 281. P ro ced u r e wh er e n o
settlement has been reached
by the parties ............................. 127
Article 282. Obligations under general,
regional or bilateral
agreements ............................... 128
Article 283. Obligation to exchange views ................ 128
Article 284. Conciliation .............................. 128
Article 285. Application of this section
to disputes submitted
pursuant to Part XI......................... 128
SECTION 2. COMPULSORY PROCEDURES
ENTAILING BINDING DECISIONS
............................................ 129
Article 286. Application of procedures under this section ..... 129
Article 287. Choice of procedure ........................ 129
Article 288. Jurisdiction .............................. 130
Article 289. Experts .................................. 130
Article 290. Provisional measures ....................... 130
Article 291. Access .................................. 131
Article 292. Prompt release of vessels and crews ........... 131
Article 293. Applicable law ............................ 131
Article 294. Preliminary proceedings .................... 132
Article 295. Exhaustion of local remedies ................. 132
Article 296. Finality and binding force of decisions ......... 132
SECTION 3. LIMITATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS
TO APPLICA-BILITY OF
SECTION 2 .................................. 132
Article 297. Limitations on applicability of section 2 ........ 132
Article 298. Optional exceptions to applicability of section 2 . . 134
Article 299. Right of the parties to agree upon a procedure . . . 135
PART XVI. GENERAL PROVISIONS ........................... 135
Article 300. Good faith and abuse of rights ................ 135
Article 301. Peaceful uses of the seas .................... 136
Article 302. Disclosure of information ................... 136
Article 303. A r c h a e o l o g i c a l a n d
historical objects found at
sea ..................................... 136
Article 304. Responsibility and liability for damage ......... 136
21
PART XVII. FINAL PROVISIONS .............................. 137
Article 305. Signature ................................ 137
Article 306. Ratification and formal confirmation ........... 137
Article 307. Accession................................ 137
Article 308. Entry into force ........................... 138
Article 309. Reservations and exceptions ................. 138
Article 310. Declarations and statements .................. 138
Article 311. R e l a t i o n t o o t h e r
conventions and
international agreements .................... 138
Article 312. Amendment .............................. 139
Article 313. Amendment by simplified procedure ........... 139
Article 314. Am e n d me n t s t o t h e
provisions of this
Convention relating
exclusively to activities in
the Area ................................. 140
Article 315. Signature, ratification of,
accession to and authentic
texts of amendments ....................... 140
Article 316. Entry into force of amendments ............... 140
Article 317. Denunciation ............................. 141
Article 318. Status of Annexes ......................... 141
Article 319. Depositary ............................... 141
Article 320. Authentic texts ............................ 142
ANNEX I. HIGHLY MIGRATORY SPECIES .................... 143
ANNEX II. COMMISSION ON THE LIMITS OF THE
CONTINEN-TAL SHELF ........................... 143
ANNEX III. BASIC CONDITIONS OF PROSPECTING,
EXPLORA-TION AND EXPLOITATION .............. 145
Article 1. Title to minerals ........................... 145
Article 2. Prospecting .............................. 145
Article 3. Exploration and exploitation ................. 146
Article 4. Qualifications of applicants .................. 146
Article 5. Transfer of technology ...................... 147
Article 6. Approval of plans of work ................... 149
Article 7. Selection among applicants
for production
authorizations ............................ 150
Article 8. Reservation of areas........................ 151
Article 9. Activities in reserved areas .................. 152
Article 10. Preference and priority among applicants ....... 152
Article 11. Joint arrangements ......................... 152
Article 12. Activities carried out by the Enterprise ......... 153
Article 13. Financial terms of contracts.................. 153
Article 14. Transfer of data ........................... 160
Article 15. Training programmes....................... 160
Article 16. Exclusive right to explore and exploit .......... 160
22
Article 17. Rules, regulations and
procedures of the
Authority ................................ 160
Article 18. Penalties ................................. 163
Article 19. Revision of contract........................ 163
Article 20. Transfer of rights and obligations ............. 164
Article 21. Applicable law ............................ 164
Article 22. Responsibility ............................ 164
ANNEX IV. STATUTE OF THE ENTERPRISE .................... 164
Article 1. Purposes................................. 164
Article 2. Relationship to the Authority................. 165
Article 3. Limitation of liability ....................... 165
Article 4. Structure ................................ 165
Article 5. Governing Board .......................... 165
Article 6. Powers and functions of the Governing Board . . . 166
Article 7. Director-General and staff of the Enterprise ..... 167
Article 8. Location................................. 167
Article 9. Reports and financial statements .............. 167
Article 10. Allocation of net income .................... 168
Article 11. Finances................................. 168
Article 12. Operations ............................... 170
Article 13. Legal status, privileges and immunities ......... 171
ANNEX V. CONCILIATION .................................. 172
SECTION 1. CONCILIATION PROCEDURE
PURSUANT TO SECTION 1 OF
PART XV ................................... 172
Article 1. Institution of proceedings ................... 172
Article 2. List of conciliators ......................... 173
Article 3. Constitution of conciliation commission ........ 173
Article 4. Procedure................................ 174
Article 5. Amicable settlement ........................ 174
Article 6. Functions of the commission ................. 174
Article 7. Report .................................. 174
Article 8. Termination .............................. 174
Article 9. Fees and expenses ......................... 175
Article 10. Right of parties to modify procedure ........... 175
SECTION 2. COMPULSORY SUBMISSION TO
CONCILIATION PROCEDURE
PURSUANT TO SECTION 3 OF
PART XV ................................... 175
Article 11. Institution of proceedings ................... 175
Article 12. Failure to reply or to submit to conciliation ...... 175
Article 13. Competence .............................. 175
Article 14. Application of section 1..................... 175
ANNEX VI. STATUTE OF THE INTERNATIONAL
TRIBUNAL FOR THE LAW OF THE SEA ............. 176
Article 1. General provisions ......................... 176
23
SECTION 1. ORGANIZATION OF THE TRIBUNAL ........... 176
Article 2. Composition ............................. 176
Article 3. Membership .............................. 176
Article 4. Nominations and elections................... 176
Article 5. Term of office ............................ 177
Article 6. Vacancies ................................ 177
Article 7. Incompatible activities ...................... 178
Article 8. Conditions relating to
participation of members in
a particular case ........................... 178
Article 9. Consequence of ceasing to
fulfil required conditions .................... 178
Article 10. Privileges and immunities ................... 178
Article 11. Solemn declaration by members .............. 178
Article 12. President, Vice-President and Registrar ........ 179
Article 13. Quorum ................................. 179
Article 14. Seabed Disputes Chamber ................... 179
Article 15. Special chambers .......................... 179
Article 16. Rules of the Tribunal ....................... 180
Article 17. Nationality of members ..................... 180
Article 18. Remuneration of members................... 180
Article 19. Expenses of the Tribunal .................... 181
SECTION 2. COMPETENCE .............................. 181
Article 20. Access to the Tribunal ...................... 181
Article 21. Jurisdiction .............................. 181
Article 22 Reference of disputes
subject to other agreements .................. 181
Article 23. Applicable law ............................ 181
SECTION 3. PROCEDURE ................................ 182
Article 24. Institution of proceedings ................... 182
Article 25. Provisional measures ....................... 182
Article 26. Hearing ................................. 182
Article 27. Conduct of case ........................... 182
Article 28. Default .................................. 182
Article 29. Majority for decision ....................... 183
Article 30. Judgment ................................ 183
Article 31. Request to intervene ....................... 183
Article 32 Right to intervene in cases
of interpretation or
application ............................... 183
Article 33. Finality and binding force of decisions ......... 183
Article 34. Costs ................................... 184
SECTION 4. SEABED DISPUTES CHAMBER ................ 184
Article 35. Composition ............................. 184
Article 36. Ad hoc chambers .......................... 184
Article 37. Access .................................. 185
Article 38. Applicable law ............................ 185
Article 39. Enforcement of decisions of the Chamber ....... 185
Article 40. Applicability of other sections of this Annex ..... 185
SECTION 5. AMENDMENTS .............................. 185
Article 41. Amendments ............................. 185
24
ANNEX VII. ARBITRATION ................................... 186
Article 1. Institution of proceedings ................... 186
Article 2. List of arbitrators .......................... 186
Article 3. Constitution of arbitral tribunal ............... 186
Article 4. Functions of arbitral tribunal ................. 187
Article 5. Procedure................................ 187
Article 6. Duties of parties to a dispute ................. 188
Article 7. Expenses ................................ 188
Article 8. Required majority for decisions............... 188
Article 9. Default of appearance ...................... 188
Article 10. Award .................................. 188
Article 11. Finality of award .......................... 188
Article 12. Interpretation or implementation of award ...... 189
Article 13. Application to entities other than States Parties . . . 189
ANNEX VIII. SPECIAL ARBITRATION .......................... 189
Article 1. Institution of proceedings ................... 189
Article 2. Lists of experts............................ 189
Article 3. Constitution of special arbitral tribunal ......... 190
Article 4. General provisions ......................... 191
Article 5. Fact finding .............................. 191
ANNEX IX. PARTICIPATION BY INTERNATIONAL
ORGANIZA-TIONS................................ 191
Article 1. Use of terms.............................. 191
Article 2. Signature ................................ 192
Article 3. Formal confirmation and accession ............ 192
Article 4. Extent of participation and
rights and obligations....................... 192
Article 5. Declarations, notifications and communications . . 193
Article 6. Responsibility and liability .................. 193
Article 7. Settlement of disputes ...................... 193
Article 8. Applicability of Part XVII ................... 194
25
PREAMBLE
The States Parties to this Convention,
Prompted by the desire to settle, in a spirit of mutual understanding and
cooperation, all issues relating to the law of the sea and aware of the historic
significance of this Convention as an important contribution to the
maintenance of peace, justice and progress for all peoples of the world,
Noting that developments since the United Nations Conferences on the
Law of the Sea held at Geneva in 1958 and 1960 have accentuated the need
for a new and generally acceptable Convention on the law of the sea,
Conscious that the problems of ocean space are closely interrelated and
need to be considered as a whole,
Recognizing the desirability of establishing through this Convention,
with due regard for the sovereignty of all States, a legal order for the seas and
oceans which will facilitate international communication, and will promote
the peaceful uses of the seas and oceans, the equitable and efficient utilization
of their resources, the conservation of their living resources, and the study,
protection and preservation of the marine environment,
Bearing in mind that the achievement of these goals will contribute to
the realization of a just and equitable international economic order which
takes into account the interests and needs of mankind as a whole and, in
particular, the special interests and needs of developing countries, whether
coastal or land-locked,
Desiring by this Convention to develop the principles embodied in
resolution 2749 (XXV) of 17 December 1970 in which the General Assembly
of the United Nations solemnly declared inter alia that the area of the seabed
and ocean floor and the subsoil thereof, beyond the limits of national
jurisdiction, as well as its resources, are the common heritage of mankind, the
exploration and exploitation of which shall be carried out for the benefit of
mankind as a whole, irrespective of the geographical location of States,
Believing that the codification and progressive development of the law
of the sea achieved in this Convention will contribute to the strengthening of
peace, security, cooperation and friendly relations among all nations in
conformity with the principles of justice and equal rights and will promote the
economic and social advancement of all peoples of the world, in accordance
with the Purposes and Principles of the United Nations as set forth in the
Charter,
Affirming that matters not regulated by this Convention continue to be
governed by the rules and principles of general international law,
Have agreed as follows:
26
PART I
INTRODUCTION
Article 1
Use of terms and scope
1. For the purposes of this Convention:
(1) "Area" means the seabed and ocean floor and subsoil thereof,
beyond the limits of national jurisdiction;
(2) "Authority" means the International Seabed Authority;
(3) "activities in the Area" means all activities of exploration for,
and exploitation of, the resources of the Area;
(4) "pollution of the marine environment" means the introduction
by man, directly or indirectly, of substances or energy into the marine
environment, including estuaries, which results or is likely to result in such
deleterious effects as harm to living resources and marine life, hazards to
human health, hindrance to marine activities, including fishing and other
legitimate uses of the sea, impairment of quality for use of sea water and
reduction of amenities;
(5) (a) "dumping" means:
(i) any deliberate disposal of wastes or other matter from
vessels, aircraft, platforms or other man-made
structures at sea;
(ii) any deliberate disposal of vessels, aircraft, platforms
or other man-made structures at sea;
(b) "dumping" does not include:
(i) the disposal of wastes or other matter incidental to, or
derived from the normal operations of vessels,
aircraft, platforms or other man-made structures at
sea and their equipment, other than wastes or other
matter transported by or to vessels, aircraft, platforms
or other man-made structures at sea, operating for the
purpose of disposal of such matter or derived from
the treatment of such wastes or other matter on such
vessels, aircraft, platforms or structures;
(ii) placement of matter for a purpose other than the mere
disposal thereof, provided that such placement is not
contrary to the aims of this Convention.
2. (1) "States Parties" means States which have consented to be bound
by this Convention and for which this Convention is in force.
(2) This Convention applies mutatis mutandis to the entities
referred to in article 305, paragraph l(b), (c), (d), (e) and (f), which become
Parties to this Convention in accordance with the conditions relevant to each,
and to that extent "States Parties" refers to those entities.
27
PART II
TERRITORIAL SEA AND CONTIGUOUS ZONE
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 2
Legal status of the territorial sea, of the air space
over the territorial sea and of its bed and subsoil
1. The sovereignty of a coastal State extends, beyond its land territory
and internal waters and, in the case of an archipelagic State, its archipelagic
waters, to an adjacent belt of sea, described as the territorial sea.
2. This sovereignty extends to the air space over the territorial sea as
well as to its bed and subsoil.
3. The sovereignty over the territorial sea is exercised subject to this
Convention and to other rules of international law.
SECTION 2. LIMITS OF THE TERRITORIAL SEA
Article 3
Breadth of the territorial sea
Every State has the right to establish the breadth of its territorial sea up
to a limit not exceeding 12 nautical miles, measured from baselines
determined in accordance with this Convention.
Article 4
Outer limit of the territorial sea
The outer limit of the territorial sea is the line every point of which is at
a distance from the nearest point of the baseline equal to the breadth of the
territorial sea.
Article 5
Normal baseline
Except where otherwise provided in this Convention, the normal baseline
for measuring the breadth of the territorial sea is the low-water line along the
coast as marked on large-scale charts officially recognized by the coastal
State.
Article 6
Reefs
In the case of islands situated on atolls or of islands having fringing
reefs, the baseline for measuring the breadth of the territorial sea is the
seaward low-water line of the reef, as shown by the appropriate symbol on
charts officially recognized by the coastal State.
28
Article 7
Straight baselines
1. In localities where the coastline is deeply indented and cut into, or
if there is a fringe of islands along the coast in its immediate vicinity, the
method of straight baselines joining appropriate points may be employed in
drawing the baseline from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured.
2. Where because of the presence of a delta and other natural
conditions the coastline is highly unstable, the appropriate points may be
selected along the furthest seaward extent of the low-water line and,
notwithstanding subsequent regression of the low-water line, the straight
baselines shall remain effective until changed by the coastal State in
accordance with this Convention.
3. The drawing of straight baselines must not depart to any appreciable
extent from the general direction of the coast, and the sea areas lying within
the lines must be sufficiently closely linked to the land domain to be subject
to the regime of internal waters.
4. Straight baselines shall not be drawn to and from low-tide elevations,
unless lighthouses or similar installations which are permanently above sea
level have been built on them or except in instances where the drawing of
baselines to and from such elevations has received general international
recognition.
5. Where the method of straight baselines is applicable under
paragraph 1, account may be taken, in determining particular baselines, of
economic interests peculiar to the region concerned, the reality and the
importance of which are clearly evidenced by long usage.
6. The system of straight baselines may not be applied by a State in
such a manner as to cut off the territorial sea of another State from the high
seas or an exclusive economic zone.
Article 8
Internal waters
1. Except as provided in Part IV, waters on the landward side of the
baseline of the territorial sea form part of the internal waters of the State.
2. Where the establishment of a straight baseline in accordance with the
method set forth in article 7 has the effect of enclosing as internal waters
areas which had not previously been considered as such, a right of innocent
passage as provided in this Convention shall exist in those waters.
Article 9
Mouths of rivers
If a river flows directly into the sea, the baseline shall be a straight line
across the mouth of the river between points on the low-water line of its
banks.
Article 10
Bays
1. This article relates only to bays the coasts of which belong to a
single State.
29
2. For the purposes of this Convention, a bay is a well-marked
indentation whose penetration is in such proportion to the width of its mouth
as to contain land-locked waters and constitute more than a mere curvature
of the coast. An indentation shall not, however, be regarded as a bay unless
its area is as large as, or larger than, that of the semi-circle whose diameter is
a line drawn across the mouth of that indentation.
3. For the purpose of measurement, the area of an indentation is that
lying between the low-water mark around the shore of the indentation and a
line joining the low-water mark of its natural entrance points. Where,
because of the presence of islands, an indentation has more than one mouth,
the semi-circle shall be drawn on a line as long as the sum total of the lengths
of the lines across the different mouths. Islands within an indentation shall
be included as if they were part of the water area of the indentation.
4. If the distance between the low-water marks of the natural entrance
points of a bay does not exceed 24 nautical miles, a closing line may be
drawn between these two low-water marks, and the waters enclosed thereby
shall be considered as internal waters.
5. Where the distance between the low-water marks of the natural
entrance points of a bay exceeds 24 nautical miles, a straight baseline of
24 nautical miles shall be drawn within the bay in such a manner as to enclose
the maximum area of water that is possible with a line of that length.
6. The foregoing provisions do not apply to so-called "historic" bays,
or in any case where the system of straight baselines provided for in article 7
is applied.
Article 11
Ports
For the purpose of delimiting the territorial sea, the outermost permanent
harbour works which form an integral part of the harbour system are regarded
as forming part of the coast. Off-shore installations and artificial islands shall
not be considered as permanent harbour works.
Article 12
Roadsteads
Roadsteads which are normally used for the loading, unloading and
anchoring of ships, and which would otherwise be situated wholly or partly
outside the outer limit of the territorial sea, are included in the territorial sea.
Article 13
Low-tide elevations
1. A low-tide elevation is a naturally formed area of land which is
surrounded by and above water at low tide but submerged at high tide. Where
a low-tide elevation is situated wholly or partly at a distance not exceeding
the breadth of the territorial sea from the mainland or an island, the low-water
line on that elevation may be used as the baseline for measuring the breadth
of the territorial sea.
2. Where a low-tide elevation is wholly situated at a distance exceeding
the breadth of the territorial sea from the mainland or an island, it has no
territorial sea of its own.
30
Article 14
Combination of methods for determining baselines
The coastal State may determine baselines in turn by any of the methods
provided for in the foregoing articles to suit different conditions.
Article 15
Delimitation of the territorial sea between States
with opposite or adjacent coasts
Where the coasts of two States are opposite or adjacent to each other,
neither of the two States is entitled, failing agreement between them to the
contrary, to extend its territorial sea beyond the median line every point of
which is equidistant from the nearest points on the baselines from which the
breadth of the territorial seas of each of the two States is measured. The
above provision does not apply, however, where it is necessary by reason of
historic title or other special circumstances to delimit the territorial seas of the
two States in a way which is at variance therewith.
Article 16
Charts and lists of geographical coordinates
1. The baselines for measuring the breadth of the territorial sea
determined in accordance with articles 7, 9 and 10, or the limits derived
therefrom, and the lines of delimitation drawn in accordance with articles 12
and 15 shall be shown on charts of a scale or scales adequate for ascertaining
their position. Alternatively, a list of geographical coordinates of points,
specifying the geodetic datum, may be substituted.
2. The coastal State shall give due publicity to such charts or lists of
geographical coordinates and shall deposit a copy of each such chart or list
with the Secretary-General of the United Nations.
SECTION 3. INNOCENT PASSAGE IN THE TERRITORIAL SEA
SUBSECTION A. RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL SHIPS
Article 17
Right of innocent passage
Subject to this Convention, ships of all States, whether coastal or
land-locked, enjoy the right of innocent passage through the territorial sea.
Article 18
Meaning of passage
1. Passage means navigation through the territorial sea for the purpose
of:
(a) traversing that sea without entering internal waters or calling at
a roadstead or port facility outside internal waters; or
(b) proceeding to or from internal waters or a call at such roadstead
or port facility.
2. Passage shall be continuous and expeditious. However, passage
includes stopping and anchoring, but only in so far as the same are incidental
31
to ordinary navigation or are rendered necessary by force majeure or distress
or for the purpose of rendering assistance to persons, ships or aircraft in
danger or distress.
Article 19
Meaning of innocent passage
1. Passage is innocent so long as it is not prejudicial to the peace, good
order or security of the coastal State. Such passage shall take place in
conformity with this Convention and with other rules of international law.
2. Passage of a foreign ship shall be considered to be prejudicial to the
peace, good order or security of the coastal State if in the territorial sea it
engages in any of the following activities:
(a) any threat or use of force against the sovereignty, territorial
integrity or political independence of the coastal State, or in any
other manner in violation of the principles of international law
embodied in the Charter of the United Nations;
(b) any exercise or practice with weapons of any kind;
(c) any act aimed at collecting information to the prejudice of the
defence or security of the coastal State;
(d) any act of propaganda aimed at affecting the defence or security
of the coastal State;
(e) the launching, landing or taking on board of any aircraft;
(f) the launching, landing or taking on board of any military
device;
(g) the loading or unloading of any commodity, currency or person
contrary to the customs, fiscal, immigration or sanitary laws and
regulations of the coastal State;
(h) any act of wilful and serious pollution contrary to this
Convention;
(i) any fishing activities;
(j) the carrying out of research or survey activities;
(k) any act aimed at interfering with any systems of communication
or any other facilities or installations of the coastal State;
(l) any other activity not having a direct bearing on passage.
Article 20
Submarines and other underwater vehicles
In the territorial sea, submarines and other underwater vehicles are
required to navigate on the surface and to show their flag.
Article 21
Laws and regulations of the coastal State relating to innocent passage
1. The coastal State may adopt laws and regulations, in conformity with
the provisions of this Convention and other rules of international law, relating
to innocent passage through the territorial sea, in respect of all or any of the
following:
(a) the safety of navigation and the regulation of maritime traffic;
(b) the protection of navigational aids and facilities and other
facilities or installations;
(c) the protection of cables and pipelines;
32
(d) the conservation of the living resources of the sea;
(e) the prevention of infringement of the fisheries laws and
regulations of the coastal State;
(f) the preservation of the environment of the coastal State and the
prevention, reduction and control of pollution thereof;
(g) marine scientific research and hydrographic surveys;
(h) the prevention of infringement of the customs, fiscal,
immigration or sanitary laws and regulations of the coastal
State.
2. Such laws and regulations shall not apply to the design, construction,
manning or equipment of foreign ships unless they are giving effect to
generally accepted international rules or standards.
3. The coastal State shall give due publicity to all such laws and
regulations.
4. Foreign ships exercising the right of innocent passage through the
territorial sea shall comply with all such laws and regulations and all
generally accepted international regulations relating to the prevention of
collisions at sea.
Article 22
Sea lanes and traffic separation schemes in the territorial sea
1. The coastal State may, where necessary having regard to the safety
of navigation, require foreign ships exercising the right of innocent passage
through its territorial sea to use such sea lanes and traffic separation schemes
as it may designate or prescribe for the regulation of the passage of ships.
2. In particular, tankers, nuclear-powered ships and ships carrying
nuclear or other inherently dangerous or noxious substances or materials may
be required to confine their passage to such sea lanes.
3. In the designation of sea lanes and the prescription of traffic
separation schemes under this article, the coastal State shall take into account:
(a) the recommendations of the competent international
organization;
(b) any channels customarily used for international navigation;
(c) the special characteristics of particular ships and channels; and
(d) the density of traffic.
4. The coastal State shall clearly indicate such sea lanes and traffic
separation schemes on charts to which due publicity shall be given.
Article 23
Foreign nuclear-powered ships and ships carrying nuclear
or other inherently dangerous or noxious substances
Foreign nuclear-powered ships and ships carrying nuclear or other
inherently dangerous or noxious substances shall, when exercising the right
of innocent passage through the territorial sea, carry documents and observe
special precautionary measures established for such ships by international
agreements.
33
Article 24
Duties of the coastal State
1. The coastal State shall not hamper the innocent passage of foreign
ships through the territorial sea except in accordance with this Convention.
In particular, in the application of this Convention or of any laws or
regulations adopted in conformity with this Convention, the coastal State
shall not:
(a) impose requirements on foreign ships which have the practical
effect of denying or impairing the right of innocent passage; or
(b) discriminate in form or in fact against the ships of any State or
against ships carrying cargoes to, from or on behalf of any
State.
2. The coastal State shall give appropriate publicity to any danger to
navigation, of which it has knowledge, within its territorial sea.
Article 25
Rights of protection of the coastal State
1. The coastal State may take the necessary steps in its territorial sea to
prevent passage which is not innocent.
2. In the case of ships proceeding to internal waters or a call at a port
facility outside internal waters, the coastal State also has the right to take the
necessary steps to prevent any breach of the conditions to which admission
of those ships to internal waters or such a call is subject.
3. The coastal State may, without discrimination in form or in fact
among foreign ships, suspend temporarily in specified areas of its territorial
sea the innocent passage of foreign ships if such suspension is essential for
the protection of its security, including weapons exercises. Such suspension
shall take effect only after having been duly published.
Article 26
Charges which may be levied upon foreign ships
1. No charge may be levied upon foreign ships by reason only of their
passage through the territorial sea.
2. Charges may be levied upon a foreign ship passing through the
territorial sea as payment only for specific services rendered to the ship.
These charges shall be levied without discrimination.
SUBSECTION B. RULES APPLICABLE TO
MERCHANT SHIPS AND GOVERNMENT SHIPS
OPERATED FOR COMMERCIAL PURPOSES
Article 27
Criminal jurisdiction on board a foreign ship
1. The criminal jurisdiction of the coastal State should not be exercised
on board a foreign ship passing through the territorial sea to arrest any person
or to conduct any investigation in connection with any crime committed on
board the ship during its passage, save only in the following cases:
(a) if the consequences of the crime extend to the coastal State;
34
(b) if the crime is of a kind to disturb the peace of the country or
the good order of the territorial sea;
(c) if the assistance of the local authorities has been requested by
the master of the ship or by a diplomatic agent or consular
officer of the flag State; or
(d) if such measures are necessary for the suppression of illicit
traffic in narcotic drugs or psychotropic substances.
2. The above provisions do not affect the right of the coastal State to
take any steps authorized by its laws for the purpose of an arrest or
investigation on board a foreign ship passing through the territorial sea after
leaving internal waters.
3. In the cases provided for in paragraphs 1 and 2, the coastal State
shall, if the master so requests, notify a diplomatic agent or consular officer
of the flag State before taking any steps, and shall facilitate contact between
such agent or officer and the ship's crew. In cases of emergency this
notification may be communicated while the measures are being taken.
4. In considering whether or in what manner an arrest should be made,
the local authorities shall have due regard to the interests of navigation.
5. Except as provided in Part XII or with respect to violations of laws
and regulations adopted in accordance with Part V, the coastal State may not
take any steps on board a foreign ship passing through the territorial sea to
arrest any person or to conduct any investigation in connection with any crime
committed before the ship entered the territorial sea, if the ship, proceeding
from a foreign port, is only passing through the territorial sea without entering
internal waters.
Article 28
Civil jurisdiction in relation to foreign ships
1. The coastal State should not stop or divert a foreign ship passing
through the territorial sea for the purpose of exercising civil jurisdiction in
relation to a person on board the ship.
2. The coastal State may not levy execution against or arrest the ship
for the purpose of any civil proceedings, save only in respect of obligations
or liabilities assumed or incurred by the ship itself in the course or for the
purpose of its voyage through the waters of the coastal State.
3. Paragraph 2 is without prejudice to the right of the coastal State, in
accordance with its laws, to levy execution against or to arrest, for the
purpose of any civil proceedings, a foreign ship lying in the territorial sea, or
passing through the territorial sea after leaving internal waters.
SUBSECTION C. RULES APPLICABLE TO
WARSHIPS AND OTHER GOVERNMENT SHIPS
OPERATED FOR NON-COMMERCIAL PURPOSES
Article 29
Definition of warships
For the purposes of this Convention, "warship" means a ship belonging
to the armed forces of a State bearing the external marks distinguishing such
ships of its nationality, under the command of an officer duly commissioned
by the government of the State and whose name appears in the appropriate
35
service list or its equivalent, and manned by a crew which is under regular
armed forces discipline.
Article 30
Non-compliance by warships with the laws and regulations
of the coastal State
If any warship does not comply with the laws and regulations of the
coastal State concerning passage through the territorial sea and disregards any
request for compliance therewith which is made to it, the coastal State may
require it to leave the territorial sea immediately.
Article 31
Responsibility of the flag State for damage caused by a warship
or other government ship operated for non-commercial purposes
The flag State shall bear international responsibility for any loss or
damage to the coastal State resulting from the non-compliance by a warship
or other government ship operated for non-commercial purposes with the
laws and regulations of the coastal State concerning passage through the
territorial sea or with the provisions of this Convention or other rules of
international law.
Article 32
Immunities of warships and other government ships
operated for non-commercial purposes
With such exceptions as are contained in subsection A and in articles 30
and 31, nothing in this Convention affects the immunities of warships and
other government ships operated for non-commercial purposes.
SECTION 4. CONTIGUOUS ZONE
Article 33
Contiguous zone
1. In a zone contiguous to its territorial sea, described as the contiguous
zone, the coastal State may exercise the control necessary to:
(a) prevent infringement of its customs, fiscal, immigration or
sanitary laws and regulations within its territory or territorial
sea;
(b) punish infringement of the above laws and regulations
committed within its territory or territorial sea.
2. The contiguous zone may not extend beyond 24 nautical miles from
the baselines from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured.
36
PART III
STRAITS USED FOR INTERNATIONAL
NAVIGATION
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 34
Legal status of waters forming straits used for international navigation
1. The regime of passage through straits used for international
navigation established in this Part shall not in other respects affect the legal
status of the waters forming such straits or the exercise by the States
bordering the straits of their sovereignty or jurisdiction over such waters and
their air space, bed and subsoil.
2. The sovereignty or jurisdiction of the States bordering the straits is
exercised subject to this Part and to other rules of international law.
Article 35
Scope of this Part
Nothing in this Part affects:
(a) any areas of internal waters within a strait, except where the
establishment of a straight baseline in accordance with the method
set forth in article 7 has the effect of enclosing as internal waters
areas which had not previously been considered as such;
(b) the legal status of the waters beyond the territorial seas of States
bordering straits as exclusive economic zones or high seas; or
(c) the legal regime in straits in which passage is regulated in whole or
in part by long-standing international conventions in force
specifically relating to such straits.
Article 36
High seas routes or routes through exclusive economic zones
through straits used for international navigation
This Part does not apply to a strait used for international navigation if
there exists through the strait a route through the high seas or through an
exclusive economic zone of similar convenience with respect to navigational
and hydrographical characteristics; in such routes, the other relevant Parts of
this Convention, including the provisions regarding the freedoms of
navigation and overflight, apply.
SECTION 2. TRANSIT PASSAGE
Article 37
Scope of this section
This section applies to straits which are used for international navigation
between one part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone and another
part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone.
37
Article 38
Right of transit passage
1. In straits referred to in article 37, all ships and aircraft enjoy the right
of transit passage, which shall not be impeded; except that, if the strait is
formed by an island of a State bordering the strait and its mainland, transit
passage shall not apply if there exists seaward of the island a route through
the high seas or through an exclusive economic zone of similar convenience
with respect to navigational and hydrographical characteristics.
2. Transit passage means the exercise in accordance with this Part of
the freedom of navigation and overflight solely for the purpose of continuous
and expeditious transit of the strait between one part of the high seas or an
exclusive economic zone and another part of the high seas or an exclusive
economic zone. However, the requirement of continuous and expeditious
transit does not preclude passage through the strait for the purpose of
entering, leaving or returning from a State bordering the strait, subject to the
conditions of entry to that State.
3. Any activity which is not an exercise of the right of transit passage
through a strait remains subject to the other applicable provisions of this
Convention.
Article 39
Duties of ships and aircraft during transit passage
1. Ships and aircraft, while exercising the right of transit passage, shall:
(a) proceed without delay through or over the strait;
(b) refrain from any threat or use of force against the sovereignty,
territorial integrity or political independence of States bordering
the strait, or in any other manner in violation of the principles
of international law embodied in the Charter of the United
Nations;
(c) refrain from any activities other than those incident to their
normal modes of continuous and expeditious transit unless
rendered necessary by force majeure or by distress;
(d) comply with other relevant provisions of this Part.
2. Ships in transit passage shall:
(a) comply with generally accepted international regulations,
procedures and practices for safety at sea, including the
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea;
(b) comply with generally accepted international regulations,
procedures and practices for the prevention, reduction and
control of pollution from ships.
3. Aircraft in transit passage shall:
(a) observe the Rules of the Air established by the International
Civil Aviation Organization as they apply to civil aircraft; state
aircraft will normally comply with such safety measures and
will at all times operate with due regard for the safety of
navigation;
(b) at all times monitor the radio frequency assigned by the
competent internationally designated air traffic control authority
or the appropriate international distress radio frequency.
38
Article 40
Research and survey activities
During transit passage, foreign ships, including marine scientific research
and hydrographic survey ships, may not carry out any research or survey
activities without the prior authorization of the States bordering straits.
Article 41
Sea lanes and traffic separation schemes in straits
used for international navigation
1. In conformity with this Part, States bordering straits may designate
sea lanes and prescribe traffic separation schemes for navigation in straits
where necessary to promote the safe passage of ships.
2. Such States may, when circumstances require, and after giving due
publicity thereto, substitute other sea lanes or traffic separation schemes for
any sea lanes or traffic separation schemes previously designated or
prescribed by them.
3. Such sea lanes and traffic separation schemes shall conform to
generally accepted international regulations.
4. Before designating or substituting sea lanes or prescribing or
substituting traffic separation schemes, States bordering straits shall refer
proposals to the competent international organization with a view to their
adoption. The organization may adopt only such sea lanes and traffic
separation schemes as may be agreed with the States bordering the straits,
after which the States may designate, prescribe or substitute them.
5. In respect of a strait where sea lanes or traffic separation schemes
through the waters of two or more States bordering the strait are being
proposed, the States concerned shall cooperate in formulating proposals in
consultation with the competent international organization.
6. States bordering straits shall clearly indicate all sea lanes and traffic
separation schemes designated or prescribed by them on charts to which due
publicity shall be given.
7. Ships in transit passage shall respect applicable sea lanes and traffic
separation schemes established in accordance with this article.
Article 42
Laws and regulations of States bordering straits
relating to transit passage
1. Subject to the provisions of this section, States bordering straits may
adopt laws and regulations relating to transit passage through straits, in
respect of all or any of the following:
(a) the safety of navigation and the regulation of maritime traffic,
as provided in article 41;
(b) the prevention, reduction and control of pollution, by giving
effect to applicable international regulations regarding the
discharge of oil, oily wastes and other noxious substances in the
strait;
(c) with respect to fishing vessels, the prevention of fishing,
including the stowage of fishing gear;
39
(d) the loading or unloading of any commodity, currency or person
in contravention of the customs, fiscal, immigration or sanitary
laws and regulations of States bordering straits.
2. Such laws and regulations shall not discriminate in form or in fact
among foreign ships or in their application have the practical effect of
denying, hampering or impairing the right of transit passage as defined in this
section.
3. States bordering straits shall give due publicity to all such laws and
regulations.
4. Foreign ships exercising the right of transit passage shall comply
with such laws and regulations.
5. The flag State of a ship or the State of registry of an aircraft entitled
to sovereign immunity which acts in a manner contrary to such laws and
regulations or other provisions of this Part shall bear international
responsibility for any loss or damage which results to States bordering straits.
Article 43
Navigational and safety aids and other improvements
and the prevention, reduction and control of pollution
User States and States bordering a strait should by agreement cooperate:
(a) in the establishment and maintenance in a strait of necessary
navigational and safety aids or other improvements in aid of
international navigation; and
(b) for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution from ships.
Article 44
Duties of States bordering straits
States bordering straits shall not hamper transit passage and shall give
appropriate publicity to any danger to navigation or overflight within or over
the strait of which they have knowledge. There shall be no suspension of
transit passage.
SECTION 3. INNOCENT PASSAGE
Article 45
Innocent passage
1. The regime of innocent passage, in accordance with Part II,
section 3, shall apply in straits used for international navigation:
(a) excluded from the application of the regime of transit passage
under article 38, paragraph 1; or
(b) between a part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone
and the territorial sea of a foreign State.
2. There shall be no suspension of innocent passage through such
straits.
40
PART IV
ARCHIPELAGIC STATES
Article 46
Use of terms
For the purposes of this Convention:
(a) "archipelagic State" means a State constituted wholly by one or
more archipelagos and may include other islands;
(b) "archipelago" means a group of islands, including parts of islands,
interconnecting waters and other natural features which are so
closely interrelated that such islands, waters and other natural
features form an intrinsic geographical, economic and political
entity, or which historically have been regarded as such.
Article 47
Archipelagic baselines
1. An archipelagic State may draw straight archipelagic baselines
joining the outermost points of the outermost islands and drying reefs of the
archipelago provided that within such baselines are included the main islands
and an area in which the ratio of the area of the water to the area of the land,
including atolls, is between 1 to 1 and 9 to 1.
2. The length of such baselines shall not exceed 100 nautical miles,
except that up to 3 per cent of the total number of baselines enclosing any
archipelago may exceed that length, up to a maximum length of 125 nautical
miles.
3. The drawing of such baselines shall not depart to any appreciable
extent from the general configuration of the archipelago.
4. Such baselines shall not be drawn to and from low-tide elevations,
unless lighthouses or similar installations which are permanently above sea
level have been built on them or where a low-tide elevation is situated wholly
or partly at a distance not exceeding the breadth of the territorial sea from the
nearest island.
5. The system of such baselines shall not be applied by an archipelagic
State in such a manner as to cut off from the high seas or the exclusive
economic zone the territorial sea of another State.
6. If a part of the archipelagic waters of an archipelagic State lies
between two parts of an immediately adjacent neighbouring State, existing
rights and all other legitimate interests which the latter State has traditionally
exercised in such waters and all rights stipulated by agreement between those
States shall continue and be respected.
7. For the purpose of computing the ratio of water to land under
paragraph l, land areas may include waters lying within the fringing reefs of
islands and atolls, including that part of a steep-sided oceanic plateau which
is enclosed or nearly enclosed by a chain of limestone islands and drying
reefs lying on the perimeter of the plateau.
8. The baselines drawn in accordance with this article shall be shown
on charts of a scale or scales adequate for ascertaining their position.
Alternatively, lists of geographical coordinates of points, specifying the
geodetic datum, may be substituted.
41
9. The archipelagic State shall give due publicity to such charts or lists
of geographical coordinates and shall deposit a copy of each such chart or list
with the Secretary-General of the United Nations.
Article 48
Measurement of the breadth of the territorial sea, the contiguous zone,
the exclusive economic zone and the continental shelf
The breadth of the territorial sea, the contiguous zone, the exclusive
economic zone and the continental shelf shall be measured from archipelagic
baselines drawn in accordance with article 47.
Article 49
Legal status of archipelagic waters, of the air space
over archipelagic waters and of their bed and subsoil
1. The sovereignty of an archipelagic State extends to the waters
enclosed by the archipelagic baselines drawn in accordance with article 47,
described as archipelagic waters, regardless of their depth or distance from
the coast.
2. This sovereignty extends to the air space over the archipelagic
waters, as well as to their bed and subsoil, and the resources contained
therein.
3. This sovereignty is exercised subject to this Part.
4. The regime of archipelagic sea lanes passage established in this Part
shall not in other respects affect the status of the archipelagic waters,
including the sea lanes, or the exercise by the archipelagic State of its
sovereignty over such waters and their air space, bed and subsoil, and the
resources contained therein.
Article 50
Delimitation of internal waters
Within its archipelagic waters, the archipelagic State may draw closing
lines for the delimitation of internal waters, in accordance with articles 9,
10 and 11.
Article 51
Existing agreements, traditional fishing rights
and existing submarine cables
1. Without prejudice to article 49, an archipelagic State shall respect
existing agreements with other States and shall recognize traditional fishing
rights and other legitimate activities of the immediately adjacent neighbouring
States in certain areas falling within archipelagic waters. The terms and
conditions for the exercise of such rights and activities, including the nature,
the extent and the areas to which they apply, shall, at the request of any of the
States concerned, be regulated by bilateral agreements between them. Such
rights shall not be transferred to or shared with third States or their nationals.
2. An archipelagic State shall respect existing submarine cables laid by
other States and passing through its waters without making a landfall. An
archipelagic State shall permit the maintenance and replacement of such
42
cables upon receiving due notice of their location and the intention to repair
or replace them.
Article 52
Right of innocent passage
1. Subject to article 53 and without prejudice to article 50, ships of all
States enjoy the right of innocent passage through archipelagic waters, in
accordance with Part II, section 3.
2. The archipelagic State may, without discrimination in form or in fact
among foreign ships, suspend temporarily in specified areas of its
archipelagic waters the innocent passage of foreign ships if such suspension
is essential for the protection of its security. Such suspension shall take effect
only after having been duly published.
Article 53
Right of archipelagic sea lanes passage
1. An archipelagic State may designate sea lanes and air routes
thereabove, suitable for the continuous and expeditious passage of foreign
ships and aircraft through or over its archipelagic waters and the adjacent
territorial sea.
2. All ships and aircraft enjoy the right of archipelagic sea lanes
passage in such sea lanes and air routes.
3. Archipelagic sea lanes passage means the exercise in accordance
with this Convention of the rights of navigation and overflight in the normal
mode solely for the purpose of continuous, expeditious and unobstructed
transit between one part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone and
another part of the high seas or an exclusive economic zone.
4. Such sea lanes and air routes shall traverse the archipelagic waters
and the adjacent territorial sea and shall include all normal passage routes
used as routes for international navigation or overflight through or over
archipelagic waters and, within such routes, so far as ships are concerned, all
normal navigational channels, provided that duplication of routes of similar
convenience between the same entry and exit points shall not be necessary.
5. Such sea lanes and air routes shall be defined by a series of
continuous axis lines from the entry points of passage routes to the exit
points. Ships and aircraft in archipelagic sea lanes passage shall not deviate
more than 25 nautical miles to either side of such axis lines during passage,
provided that such ships and aircraft shall not navigate closer to the coasts
than 10 per cent of the distance between the nearest points on islands
bordering the sea lane.
6. An archipelagic State which designates sea lanes under this article
may also prescribe traffic separation schemes for the safe passage of ships
through narrow channels in such sea lanes.
7. An archipelagic State may, when circumstances require, after giving
due publicity thereto, substitute other sea lanes or traffic separation schemes
for any sea lanes or traffic separation schemes previously designated or
prescribed by it.
8. Such sea lanes and traffic separation schemes shall conform to
generally accepted international regulations.
9. In designating or substituting sea lanes or prescribing or substituting
traffic separation schemes, an archipelagic State shall refer proposals to the
43
competent international organization with a view to their adoption. The
organization may adopt only such sea lanes and traffic separation schemes as
may be agreed with the archipelagic State, after which the archipelagic State
may designate, prescribe or substitute them.
10. The archipelagic State shall clearly indicate the axis of the sea lanes
and the traffic separation schemes designated or prescribed by it on charts to
which due publicity shall be given.
11. Ships in archipelagic sea lanes passage shall respect applicable sea
lanes and traffic separation schemes established in accordance with this
article.
12. If an archipelagic State does not designate sea lanes or air routes, the
right of archipelagic sea lanes passage may be exercised through the routes
normally used for international navigation.
Article 54
Duties of ships and aircraft during their passage,
research and survey activities, duties of the archipelagic State
and laws and regulations of the archipelagic State
relating to archipelagic sea lanes passage
Articles 39, 40, 42 and 44 apply mutatis mutandis to archipelagic sea
lanes passage.
PART V
EXCLUSIVE ECONOMIC ZONE
Article 55
Specific legal regime of the exclusive economic zone
The exclusive economic zone is an area beyond and adjacent to the
territorial sea, subject to the specific legal regime established in this Part,
under which the rights and jurisdiction of the coastal State and the rights and
freedoms of other States are governed by the relevant provisions of this
Convention.
Article 56
Rights, jurisdiction and duties of the coastal State in the exclusive
economic zone
1. In the exclusive economic zone, the coastal State has:
(a) sovereign rights for the purpose of exploring and exploiting,
conserving and managing the natural resources, whether living
or non-living, of the waters superjacent to the seabed and of the
seabed and its subsoil, and with regard to other activities for the
economic exploitation and exploration of the zone, such as the
production of energy from the water, currents and winds;
(b) jurisdiction as provided for in the relevant provisions of this
Convention with regard to:
(i) the establishment and use of artificial islands, installations
and structures;
44
(ii) marine scientific research;
(iii) the protection and preservation of the marine
environment;
(c) other rights and duties provided for in this Convention.
2. In exercising its rights and performing its duties under this
Convention in the exclusive economic zone, the coastal State shall have due
regard to the rights and duties of other States and shall act in a manner
compatible with the provisions of this Convention.
3. The rights set out in this article with respect to the seabed and
subsoil shall be exercised in accordance with Part VI.
Article 57
Breadth of the exclusive economic zone
The exclusive economic zone shall not extend beyond 200 nautical miles
from the baselines from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured.
Article 58
Rights and duties of other States in the exclusive economic zone
1. In the exclusive economic zone, all States, whether coastal or
land-locked, enjoy, subject to the relevant provisions of this Convention, the
freedoms referred to in article 87 of navigation and overflight and of the
laying of submarine cables and pipelines, and other internationally lawful
uses of the sea related to these freedoms, such as those associated with the
operation of ships, aircraft and submarine cables and pipelines, and
compatible with the other provisions of this Convention.
2. Articles 88 to 115 and other pertinent rules of international law
apply to the exclusive economic zone in so far as they are not incompatible
with this Part.
3. In exercising their rights and performing their duties under this
Convention in the exclusive economic zone, States shall have due regard to
the rights and duties of the coastal State and shall comply with the laws and
regulations adopted by the coastal State in accordance with the provisions of
this Convention and other rules of international law in so far as they are not
incompatible with this Part.
Article 59
Basis for the resolution of conflicts
regarding the attribution of rights and jurisdiction
in the exclusive economic zone
In cases where this Convention does not attribute rights or jurisdiction
to the coastal State or to other States within the exclusive economic zone, and
a conflict arises between the interests of the coastal State and any other State
or States, the conflict should be resolved on the basis of equity and in the
light of all the relevant circumstances, taking into account the respective
importance of the interests involved to the parties as well as to the
international community as a whole.
45
Article 60
Artificial islands, installations and structures
in the exclusive economic zone
1. In the exclusive economic zone, the coastal State shall have the
exclusive right to construct and to authorize and regulate the construction,
operation and use of:
(a) artificial islands;
(b) installations and structures for the purposes provided for in
article 56 and other economic purposes;
(c) installations and structures which may interfere with the
exercise of the rights of the coastal State in the zone.
2. The coastal State shall have exclusive jurisdiction over such artificial
islands, installations and structures, including jurisdiction with regard to
customs, fiscal, health, safety and immigration laws and regulations.
3. Due notice must be given of the construction of such artificial
islands, installations or structures, and permanent means for giving warning
of their presence must be maintained. Any installations or structures which
are abandoned or disused shall be removed to ensure safety of navigation,
taking into account any generally accepted international standards established
in this regard by the competent international organization. Such removal shall
also have due regard to fishing, the protection of the marine environment and
the rights and duties of other States. Appropriate publicity shall be given to
the depth, position and dimensions of any installations or structures not
entirely removed.
4. The coastal State may, where necessary, establish reasonable safety
zones around such artificial islands, installations and structures in which it
may take appropriate measures to ensure the safety both of navigation and of
the artificial islands, installations and structures.
5. The breadth of the safety zones shall be determined by the coastal
State, taking into account applicable international standards. Such zones shall
be designed to ensure that they are reasonably related to the nature and
function of the artificial islands, installations or structures, and shall not
exceed a distance of 500 metres around them, measured from each point of
their outer edge, except as authorized by generally accepted international
standards or as recommended by the competent international organization.
Due notice shall be given of the extent of safety zones.
6. All ships must respect these safety zones and shall comply with
generally accepted international standards regarding navigation in the vicinity
of artificial islands, installations, structures and safety zones.
7. Artificial islands, installations and structures and the safety zones
around them may not be established where interference may be caused to the
use of recognized sea lanes essential to international navigation.
8. Artificial islands, installations and structures do not possess the
status of islands. They have no territorial sea of their own, and their presence
does not affect the delimitation of the territorial sea, the exclusive economic
zone or the continental shelf.
Article 61
Conservation of the living resources
1. The coastal State shall determine the allowable catch of the living
resources in its exclusive economic zone.
46
2. The coastal State, taking into account the best scientific evidence
available to it, shall ensure through proper conservation and management
measures that the maintenance of the living resources in the exclusive
economic zone is not endangered by over-exploitation. As appropriate, the
coastal State and competent international organizations, whether subregional,
regional or global, shall cooperate to this end.
3. Such measures shall also be designed to maintain or restore
populations of harvested species at levels which can produce the maximum
sustainable yield, as qualified by relevant environmental and economic
factors, including the economic needs of coastal fishing communities and the
special requirements of developing States, and taking into account fishing
patterns, the interdependence of stocks and any generally recommended
international minimum standards, whether subregional, regional or global.
4. In taking such measures the coastal State shall take into
consideration the effects on species associated with or dependent upon
harvested species with a view to maintaining or restoring populations of such
associated or dependent species above levels at which their reproduction may
become seriously threatened.
5. Available scientific information, catch and fishing effort statistics,
and other data relevant to the conservation of fish stocks shall be contributed
and exchanged on a regular basis through competent international
organizations, whether subregional, regional or global, where appropriate and
with participation by all States concerned, including States whose nationals
are allowed to fish in the exclusive economic zone.
Article 62
Utilization of the living resources
1. The coastal State shall promote the objective of optimum utilization
of the living resources in the exclusive economic zone without prejudice to
article 61.
2. The coastal State shall determine its capacity to harvest the living
resources of the exclusive economic zone. Where the coastal State does not
have the capacity to harvest the entire allowable catch, it shall, through
agreements or other arrangements and pursuant to the terms, conditions, laws
and regulations referred to in paragraph 4, give other States access to the
surplus of the allowable catch, having particular regard to the provisions of
articles 69 and 70, especially in relation to the developing States mentioned
therein.
3. In giving access to other States to its exclusive economic zone under
this article, the coastal State shall take into account all relevant factors,
including, inter alia, the significance of the living resources of the area to the
economy of the coastal State concerned and its other national interests, the
provisions of articles 69 and 70, the requirements of developing States in the
subregion or region in harvesting part of the surplus and the need to minimize
economic dislocation in States whose nationals have habitually fished in the
zone or which have made substantial efforts in research and identification of
stocks.
4. Nationals of other States fishing in the exclusive economic zone
shall comply with the conservation measures and with the other terms and
conditions established in the laws and regulations of the coastal State. These
laws and regulations shall be consistent with this Convention and may relate,
inter alia, to the following:
47
(a) licensing of fishermen, fishing vessels and equipment,
including payment of fees and other forms of remuneration,
which, in the case of developing coastal States, may consist of
adequate compensation in the field of financing, equipment and
technology relating to the fishing industry;
(b) determining the species which may be caught, and fixing quotas
of catch, whether in relation to particular stocks or groups of
stocks or catch per vessel over a period of time or to the catch
by nationals of any State during a specified period;
(c) regulating seasons and areas of fishing, the types, sizes and
amount of gear, and the types, sizes and number of fishing
vessels that may be used;
(d) fixing the age and size of fish and other species that may be
caught;
(e) specifying information required of fishing vessels, including
catch and effort statistics and vessel position reports;
(f) requiring, under the authorization and control of the coastal
State, the conduct of specified fisheries research programmes
and regulating the conduct of such research, including the
sampling of catches, disposition of samples and reporting of
associated scientific data;
(g) the placing of observers or trainees on board such vessels by the
coastal State;
(h) the landing of all or any part of the catch by such vessels in the
ports of the coastal State;
(i) terms and conditions relating to joint ventures or other
cooperative arrangements;
(j) requirements for the training of personnel and the transfer of
fisheries technology, including enhancement of the coastal
State's capability of undertaking fisheries research;
(k) enforcement procedures.
5. Coastal States shall give due notice of conservation and management
laws and regulations.
Article 63
Stocks occurring within the exclusive economic zones of
two or more coastal States or both within the exclusive economic zone
and in an area beyond and adjacent to it
1. Where the same stock or stocks of associated species occur within
the exclusive economic zones of two or more coastal States, these States shall
seek, either directly or through appropriate subregional or regional
organizations, to agree upon the measures necessary to coordinate and ensure
the conservation and development of such stocks without prejudice to the
other provisions of this Part.
2. Where the same stock or stocks of associated species occur both
within the exclusive economic zone and in an area beyond and adjacent to the
zone, the coastal State and the States fishing for such stocks in the adjacent
area shall seek, either directly or through appropriate subregional or regional
organizations, to agree upon the measures necessary for the conservation of
these stocks in the adjacent area.
Article 64
48
Highly migratory species
1. The coastal State and other States whose nationals fish in the region
for the highly migratory species listed in Annex I shall cooperate directly or
through appropriate international organizations with a view to ensuring
conservation and promoting the objective of optimum utilization of such
species throughout the region, both within and beyond the exclusive
economic zone. In regions for which no appropriate international
organization exists, the coastal State and other States whose nationals harvest
these species in the region shall cooperate to establish such an organization
and participate in its work.
2. The provisions of paragraph 1 apply in addition to the other
provisions of this Part.
Article 65
Marine mammals
Nothing in this Part restricts the right of a coastal State or the competence
of an international organization, as appropriate, to prohibit, limit or regulate
the exploitation of marine mammals more strictly than provided for in this
Part. States shall cooperate with a view to the conservation of marine
mammals and in the case of cetaceans shall in particular work through the
appropriate international organizations for their conservation, management
and study.
Article 66
Anadromous stocks
1. States in whose rivers anadromous stocks originate shall have the
primary interest in and responsibility for such stocks.
2. The State of origin of anadromous stocks shall ensure their
conservation by the establishment of appropriate regulatory measures for
fishing in all waters landward of the outer limits of its exclusive economic
zone and for fishing provided for in paragraph 3(b). The State of origin may,
after consultations with the other States referred to in paragraphs 3 and 4
fishing these stocks, establish total allowable catches for stocks originating
in its rivers.
3. (a) Fisheries for anadromous stocks shall be conducted only in
waters landward of the outer limits of exclusive economic
zones, except in cases where this provision would result in
economic dislocation for a State other than the State of origin.
With respect to such fishing beyond the outer limits of the
exclusive economic zone, States concerned shall maintain
consultations with a view to achieving agreement on terms and
conditions of such fishing giving due regard to the conservation
requirements and the needs of the State of origin in respect of
these stocks.
(b) The State of origin shall cooperate in minimizing economic
dislocation in such other States fishing these stocks, taking into
account the normal catch and the mode of operations of such
States, and all the areas in which such fishing has occurred.
(c) States referred to in subparagraph (b), participating by
agreement with the State of origin in measures to renew
49
anadromous stocks, particularly by expenditures for that
purpose, shall be given special consideration by the State of
origin in the harvesting of stocks originating in its rivers.
(d) Enforcement of regulations regarding anadromous stocks
beyond the exclusive economic zone shall be by agreement
between the State of origin and the other States concerned.
4. In cases where anadromous stocks migrate into or through the waters
landward of the outer limits of the exclusive economic zone of a State other
than the State of origin, such State shall cooperate with the State of origin
with regard to the conservation and management of such stocks.
5. The State of origin of anadromous stocks and other States fishing
these stocks shall make arrangements for the implementation of the provisions
of this article, where appropriate, through regional organizations.
Article 67
Catadromous species
1. A coastal State in whose waters catadromous species spend the
greater part of their life cycle shall have responsibility for the management of
these species and shall ensure the ingress and egress of migrating fish.
2. Harvesting of catadromous species shall be conducted only in waters
landward of the outer limits of exclusive economic zones. When conducted
in exclusive economic zones, harvesting shall be subject to this article and the
other provisions of this Convention concerning fishing in these zones.
3. In cases where catadromous fish migrate through the exclusive
economic zone of another State, whether as juvenile or maturing fish, the
management, including harvesting, of such fish shall be regulated by
agreement between the State mentioned in paragraph 1 and the other State
concerned. Such agreement shall ensure the rational management of the
species and take into account the responsibilities of the State mentioned in
paragraph 1 for the maintenance of these species.
Article 68
Sedentary species
This Part does not apply to sedentary species as defined in article 77,
paragraph 4.
Article 69
Right of land-locked States
1. Land-locked States shall have the right to participate, on an equitable
basis, in the exploitation of an appropriate part of the surplus of the living
resources of the exclusive economic zones of coastal States of the same
subregion or region, taking into account the relevant economic and
geographical circumstances of all the States concerned and in conformity with
the provisions of this article and of articles 61 and 62.
2. The terms and modalities of such participation shall be established
by the States concerned through bilateral, subregional or regional agreements
taking into account, inter alia:
(a) the need to avoid effects detrimental to fishing communities or
fishing industries of the coastal State;
50
(b) the extent to which the land-locked State, in accordance with
the provisions of this article, is participating or is entitled to
participate under existing bilateral, subregional or regional
agreements in the exploitation of living resources of the
exclusive economic zones of other coastal States;
(c) the extent to which other land-locked States and geographically
disadvantaged States are participating in the exploitation of the
living resources of the exclusive economic zone of the coastal
State and the consequent need to avoid a particular burden for
any single coastal State or a part of it;
(d) the nutritional needs of the populations of the respective States.
3. When the harvesting capacity of a coastal State approaches a point
which would enable it to harvest the entire allowable catch of the living
resources in its exclusive economic zone, the coastal State and other States
concerned shall cooperate in the establishment of equitable arrangements on
a bilateral, subregional or regional basis to allow for participation of
developing land-locked States of the same subregion or region in the
exploitation of the living resources of the exclusive economic zones of coastal
States of the subregion or region, as may be appropriate in the circumstances
and on terms satisfactory to all parties. In the implementation of this
provision the factors mentioned in paragraph 2 shall also be taken into
account.
4. Developed land-locked States shall, under the provisions of this
article, be entitled to participate in the exploitation of living resources only
in the exclusive economic zones of developed coastal States of the same
subregion or region having regard to the extent to which the coastal State, in
giving access to other States to the living resources of its exclusive economic
zone, has taken into account the need to minimize detrimental effects on
fishing communities and economic dislocation in States whose nationals have
habitually fished in the zone.
5. The above provisions are without prejudice to arrangements agreed
upon in subregions or regions where the coastal States may grant to
land-locked States of the same subregion or region equal or preferential rights
for the exploitation of the living resources in the exclusive economic zones.
Article 70
Right of geographically disadvantaged States
1. Geographically disadvantaged States shall have the right to
participate, on an equitable basis, in the exploitation of an appropriate part of
the surplus of the living resources of the exclusive economic zones of coastal
States of the same subregion or region, taking into account the relevant
economic and geographical circumstances of all the States concerned and in
conformity with the provisions of this article and of articles 61 and 62.
2. For the purposes of this Part, "geographically disadvantaged States"
means coastal States, including States bordering enclosed or semi-enclosed
seas, whose geographical situation makes them dependent upon the
exploitation of the living resources of the exclusive economic zones of other
States in the subregion or region for adequate supplies of fish for the
nutritional purposes of their populations or parts thereof, and coastal States
which can claim no exclusive economic zones of their own.
51
3. The terms and modalities of such participation shall be established
by the States concerned through bilateral, subregional or regional agreements
taking into account, inter alia:
(a) the need to avoid effects detrimental to fishing communities or
fishing industries of the coastal State;
(b) the extent to which the geographically disadvantaged State, in
accordance with the provisions of this article, is participating or
is entitled to participate under existing bilateral, subregional or
regional agreements in the exploitation of living resources of
the exclusive economic zones of other coastal States;
(c) the extent to which other geographically disadvantaged States
and land-locked States are participating in the exploitation of
the living resources of the exclusive economic zone of the
coastal State and the consequent need to avoid a particular
burden for any single coastal State or a part of it;
(d) the nutritional needs of the populations of the respective States.
4. When the harvesting capacity of a coastal State approaches a point
which would enable it to harvest the entire allowable catch of the living
resources in its exclusive economic zone, the coastal State and other States
concerned shall cooperate in the establishment of equitable arrangements on
a bilateral, subregional or regional basis to allow for participation of
developing geographically disadvantaged States of the same subregion or
region in the exploitation of the living resources of the exclusive economic
zones of coastal States of the subregion or region, as may be appropriate in
the circumstances and on terms satisfactory to all parties. In the
implementation of this provision the factors mentioned in paragraph 3 shall
also be taken into account.
5. Developed geographically disadvantaged States shall, under the
provisions of this article, be entitled to participate in the exploitation of living
resources only in the exclusive economic zones of developed coastal States
of the same subregion or region having regard to the extent to which the
coastal State, in giving access to other States to the living resources of its
exclusive economic zone, has taken into account the need to minimize
detrimental effects on fishing communities and economic dislocation in States
whose nationals have habitually fished in the zone.
6. The above provisions are without prejudice to arrangements agreed
upon in subregions or regions where the coastal States may grant to
geographically disadvantaged States of the same subregion or region equal or
preferential rights for the exploitation of the living resources in the exclusive
economic zones.
Article 71
Non-applicability of articles 69 and 70
The provisions of articles 69 and 70 do not apply in the case of a coastal
State whose economy is overwhelmingly dependent on the exploitation of the
living resources of its exclusive economic zone.
Article 72
Restrictions on transfer of rights
1. Rights provided under articles 69 and 70 to exploit living resources
shall not be directly or indirectly transferred to third States or their nationals
52
by lease or licence, by establishing joint ventures or in any other manner
which has the effect of such transfer unless otherwise agreed by the States
concerned.
2. The foregoing provision does not preclude the States concerned from
obtaining technical or financial assistance from third States or international
organizations in order to facilitate the exercise of the rights pursuant to
articles 69 and 70, provided that it does not have the effect referred to in
paragraph 1.
Article 73
Enforcement of laws and regulations of the coastal State
1. The coastal State may, in the exercise of its sovereign rights to
explore, exploit, conserve and manage the living resources in the exclusive
economic zone, take such measures, including boarding, inspection, arrest
and judicial proceedings, as may be necessary to ensure compliance with the
laws and regulations adopted by it in conformity with this Convention.
2. Arrested vessels and their crews shall be promptly released upon the
posting of reasonable bond or other security.
3. Coastal State penalties for violations of fisheries laws and
regulations in the exclusive economic zone may not include imprisonment, in
the absence of agreements to the contrary by the States concerned, or any
other form of corporal punishment.
4. In cases of arrest or detention of foreign vessels the coastal State
shall promptly notify the flag State, through appropriate channels, of the
action taken and of any penalties subsequently imposed.
Article 74
Delimitation of the exclusive economic zone
between States with opposite or adjacent coasts
1. The delimitation of the exclusive economic zone between States with
opposite or adjacent coasts shall be effected by agreement on the basis of
international law, as referred to in Article 38 of the Statute of the
International Court of Justice, in order to achieve an equitable solution.
2. If no agreement can be reached within a reasonable period of time,
the States concerned shall resort to the procedures provided for in Part XV.
3. Pending agreement as provided for in paragraph 1, the States
concerned, in a spirit of understanding and cooperation, shall make every
effort to enter into provisional arrangements of a practical nature and, during
this transitional period, not to jeopardize or hamper the reaching of the final
agreement. Such arrangements shall be without prejudice to the final
delimitation.
4. Where there is an agreement in force between the States concerned,
questions relating to the delimitation of the exclusive economic zone shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of that agreement.
Article 75
Charts and lists of geographical coordinates
1. Subject to this Part, the outer limit lines of the exclusive economic
zone and the lines of delimitation drawn in accordance with article 74 shall
be shown on charts of a scale or scales adequate for ascertaining their
53
position. Where appropriate, lists of geographical coordinates of points,
specifying the geodetic datum, may be substituted for such outer limit lines
or lines of delimitation.
2. The coastal State shall give due publicity to such charts or lists of
geographical coordinates and shall deposit a copy of each such chart or list
with the Secretary-General of the United Nations.
PART VI
CONTINENTAL SHELF
Article 76
Definition of the continental shelf
1. The continental shelf of a coastal State comprises the seabed and
subsoil of the submarine areas that extend beyond its territorial sea
throughout the natural prolongation of its land territory to the outer edge of
the continental margin, or to a distance of 200 nautical miles from the
baselines from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured where the
outer edge of the continental margin does not extend up to that distance.
2. The continental shelf of a coastal State shall not extend beyond the
limits provided for in paragraphs 4 to 6.
3. The continental margin comprises the submerged prolongation of the
land mass of the coastal State, and consists of the seabed and subsoil of the
shelf, the slope and the rise. It does not include the deep ocean floor with its
oceanic ridges or the subsoil thereof.
4. (a) For the purposes of this Convention, the coastal State shall
establish the outer edge of the continental margin wherever the
margin extends beyond 200 nautical miles from the baselines
from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured, by
either:
(i) a line delineated in accordance with paragraph 7 by
reference to the outermost fixed points at each of which
the thickness of sedimentary rocks is at least 1 per cent of
the shortest distance from such point to the foot of the
continental slope; or
(ii) a line delineated in accordance with paragraph 7 by
reference to fixed points not more than 60 nautical miles
from the foot of the continental slope.
(b) In the absence of evidence to the contrary, the foot of the
continental slope shall be determined as the point of maximum
change in the gradient at its base.
5. The fixed points comprising the line of the outer limits of the
continental shelf on the seabed, drawn in accordance with paragraph 4 (a)(i)
and (ii), either shall not exceed 350 nautical miles from the baselines from
which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured or shall not exceed
100 nautical miles from the 2,500 metre isobath, which is a line connecting
the depth of 2,500 metres.
6. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 5, on submarine ridges,
the outer limit of the continental shelf shall not exceed 350 nautical miles
from the baselines from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured.
This paragraph does not apply to submarine elevations that are natural
54
components of the continental margin, such as its plateaux, rises, caps, banks
and spurs.
7. The coastal State shall delineate the outer limits of its continental
shelf, where that shelf extends beyond 200 nautical miles from the baselines
from which the breadth of the territorial sea is measured, by straight lines not
exceeding 60 nautical miles in length, connecting fixed points, defined by
coordinates of latitude and longitude.
8. Information on the limits of the continental shelf beyond
200 nautical miles from the baselines from which the breadth of the territorial
sea is measured shall be submitted by the coastal State to the Commission on
the Limits of the Continental Shelf set up under Annex II on the basis of
equitable geographical representation. The Commission shall make
recommendations to coastal States on matters related to the establishment of
the outer limits of their continental shelf. The limits of the shelf established
by a coastal State on the basis of these recommendations shall be final and
binding.
9. The coastal State shall deposit with the Secretary-General of the
United Nations charts and relevant information, including geodetic data,
permanently describing the outer limits of its continental shelf. The
Secretary-General shall give due publicity thereto.
10. The provisions of this article are without prejudice to the question
of delimitation of the continental shelf between States with opposite or
adjacent coasts.
Article 77
Rights of the coastal State over the continental shelf
1. The coastal State exercises over the continental shelf sovereign
rights for the purpose of exploring it and exploiting its natural resources.
2. The rights referred to in paragraph 1 are exclusive in the sense that
if the coastal State does not explore the continental shelf or exploit its natural
resources, no one may undertake these activities without the express consent
of the coastal State.
3. The rights of the coastal State over the continental shelf do not
depend on occupation, effective or notional, or on any express proclamation.
4. The natural resources referred to in this Part consist of the mineral
and other non-living resources of the seabed and subsoil together with living
organisms belonging to sedentary species, that is to say, organisms which, at
the harvestable stage, either are immobile on or under the seabed or are
unable to move except in constant physical contact with the seabed or the
subsoil.
Article 78
Legal status of the superjacent waters and air space
and the rights and freedoms of other States
1. The rights of the coastal State over the continental shelf do not affect
the legal status of the superjacent waters or of the air space above those
waters.
2. The exercise of the rights of the coastal State over the continental
shelf must not infringe or result in any unjustifiable interference with
navigation and other rights and freedoms of other States as provided for in
this Convention.
55
Article 79
Submarine cables and pipelines on the continental shelf
1. All States are entitled to lay submarine cables and pipelines on the
continental shelf, in accordance with the provisions of this article.
2. Subject to its right to take reasonable measures for the exploration
of the continental shelf, the exploitation of its natural resources and the
prevention, reduction and control of pollution from pipelines, the coastal
State may not impede the laying or maintenance of such cables or pipelines.
3. The delineation of the course for the laying of such pipelines on the
continental shelf is subject to the consent of the coastal State.
4. Nothing in this Part affects the right of the coastal State to establish
conditions for cables or pipelines entering its territory or territorial sea, or its
jurisdiction over cables and pipelines constructed or used in connection with
the exploration of its continental shelf or exploitation of its resources or the
operations of artificial islands, installations and structures under its
jurisdiction.
5. When laying submarine cables or pipelines, States shall have due
regard to cables or pipelines already in position. In particular, possibilities
of repairing existing cables or pipelines shall not be prejudiced.
Article 80
Artificial islands, installations and structures on the continental shelf
Article 60 applies mutatis mutandis to artificial islands, installations and
structures on the continental shelf.
Article 81
Drilling on the continental shelf
The coastal State shall have the exclusive right to authorize and regulate
drilling on the continental shelf for all purposes.
Article 82
Payments and contributions with respect to the
exploitation of the continental shelf beyond 200 nautical miles
1. The coastal State shall make payments or contributions in kind in
respect of the exploitation of the non-living resources of the continental shelf
beyond 200 nautical miles from the baselines from which the breadth of the
territorial sea is measured.
2. The payments and contributions shall be made annually with respect
to all production at a site after the first five years of production at that site.
For the sixth year, the rate of payment or contribution shall be 1 per cent of
the value or volume of production at the site. The rate shall increase by
1 per cent for each subsequent year until the twelfth year and shall remain at
7 per cent thereafter. Production does not include resources used in
connection with exploitation.
3. A developing State which is a net importer of a mineral resource
produced from its continental shelf is exempt from making such payments or
contributions in respect of that mineral resource.
4. The payments or contributions shall be made through the Authority,
which shall distribute them to States Parties to this Convention, on the basis
56
of equitable sharing criteria, taking into account the interests and needs of
developing States, particularly the least developed and the land-locked among
them.
Article 83
Delimitation of the continental shelf
between States with opposite or adjacent coasts
1. The delimitation of the continental shelf between States with
opposite or adjacent coasts shall be effected by agreement on the basis of
international law, as referred to in Article 38 of the Statute of the
International Court of Justice, in order to achieve an equitable solution.
2. If no agreement can be reached within a reasonable period of time,
the States concerned shall resort to the procedures provided for in Part XV.
3. Pending agreement as provided for in paragraph 1, the States
concerned, in a spirit of understanding and cooperation, shall make every
effort to enter into provisional arrangements of a practical nature and, during
this transitional period, not to jeopardize or hamper the reaching of the final
agreement. Such arrangements shall be without prejudice to the final
delimitation.
4. Where there is an agreement in force between the States concerned,
questions relating to the delimitation of the continental shelf shall be
determined in accordance with the provisions of that agreement.
Article 84
Charts and lists of geographical coordinates
1. Subject to this Part, the outer limit lines of the continental shelf and
the lines of delimitation drawn in accordance with article 83 shall be shown
on charts of a scale or scales adequate for ascertaining their position. Where
appropriate, lists of geographical coordinates of points, specifying the
geodetic datum, may be substituted for such outer limit lines or lines of
delimitation.
2. The coastal State shall give due publicity to such charts or lists of
geographical coordinates and shall deposit a copy of each such chart or list
with the Secretary-General of the United Nations and, in the case of those
showing the outer limit lines of the continental shelf, with the
Secretary-General of the Authority.
Article 85
Tunnelling
This Part does not prejudice the right of the coastal State to exploit the
subsoil by means of tunnelling, irrespective of the depth of water above the
subsoil.
57
PART VII
HIGH SEAS
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 86
Application of the provisions of this Part
The provisions of this Part apply to all parts of the sea that are not
included in the exclusive economic zone, in the territorial sea or in the
internal waters of a State, or in the archipelagic waters of an archipelagic
State. This article does not entail any abridgement of the freedoms enjoyed
by all States in the exclusive economic zone in accordance with article 58.
Article 87
Freedom of the high seas
1. The high seas are open to all States, whether coastal or land-locked.
Freedom of the high seas is exercised under the conditions laid down by this
Convention and by other rules of international law. It comprises, inter alia,
both for coastal and land-locked States:
(a) freedom of navigation;
(b) freedom of overflight;
(c) freedom to lay submarine cables and pipelines, subject to
Part VI;
(d) freedom to construct artificial islands and other installations
permitted under international law, subject to Part VI;
(e) freedom of fishing, subject to the conditions laid down in
section 2;
(f) freedom of scientific research, subject to Parts VI and XIII.
2. These freedoms shall be exercised by all States with due regard for
the interests of other States in their exercise of the freedom of the high seas,
and also with due regard for the rights under this Convention with respect to
activities in the Area.
Article 88
Reservation of the high seas for peaceful purposes
The high seas shall be reserved for peaceful purposes.
Article 89
Invalidity of claims of sovereignty over the high seas
No State may validly purport to subject any part of the high seas to its
sovereignty.
Article 90
Right of navigation
Every State, whether coastal or land-locked, has the right to sail ships
flying its flag on the high seas.
58
Article 91
Nationality of ships
1. Every State shall fix the conditions for the grant of its nationality to
ships, for the registration of ships in its territory, and for the right to fly its
flag. Ships have the nationality of the State whose flag they are entitled to
fly. There must exist a genuine link between the State and the ship.
2. Every State shall issue to ships to which it has granted the right to
fly its flag documents to that effect.
Article 92
Status of ships
1. Ships shall sail under the flag of one State only and, save in
exceptional cases expressly provided for in international treaties or in this
Convention, shall be subject to its exclusive jurisdiction on the high seas.
A ship may not change its flag during a voyage or while in a port of call, save
in the case of a real transfer of ownership or change of registry.
2. A ship which sails under the flags of two or more States, using them
according to convenience, may not claim any of the nationalities in question
with respect to any other State, and may be assimilated to a ship without
nationality.
Article 93
Ships flying the flag of the United Nations, its specialized agencies
and the International Atomic Energy Agency
The preceding articles do not prejudice the question of ships employed
on the official service of the United Nations, its specialized agencies or the
International Atomic Energy Agency, flying the flag of the organization.
Article 94
Duties of the flag State
1. Every State shall effectively exercise its jurisdiction and control in
administrative, technical and social matters over ships flying its flag.
2. In particular every State shall:
(a) maintain a register of ships containing the names and particulars
of ships flying its flag, except those which are excluded from
generally accepted international regulations on account of their
small size; and
(b) assume jurisdiction under its internal law over each ship flying
its flag and its master, officers and crew in respect of
administrative, technical and social matters concerning the ship.
3. Every State shall take such measures for ships flying its flag as are
necessary to ensure safety at sea with regard, inter alia, to:
(a) the construction, equipment and seaworthiness of ships;
(b) the manning of ships, labour conditions and the training of
crews, taking into account the applicable international
instruments;
(c) the use of signals, the maintenance of communications and the
prevention of collisions.
4. Such measures shall include those necessary to ensure:
59
(a) that each ship, before registration and thereafter at appropriate
intervals, is surveyed by a qualified surveyor of ships, and has
on board such charts, nautical publications and navigational
equipment and instruments as are appropriate for the safe
navigation of the ship;
(b) that each ship is in the charge of a master and officers who
possess appropriate qualifications, in particular in seamanship,
navigation, communications and marine engineering, and that
the crew is appropriate in qualification and numbers for the
type, size, machinery and equipment of the ship;
(c) that the master, officers and, to the extent appropriate, the crew
are fully conversant with and required to observe the applicable
international regulations concerning the safety of life at sea, the
prevention of collisions, the prevention, reduction and control
of marine pollution, and the maintenance of communications by
radio.
5. In taking the measures called for in paragraphs 3 and 4 each State is
required to conform to generally accepted international regulations,
procedures and practices and to take any steps which may be necessary to
secure their observance.
6. A State which has clear grounds to believe that proper jurisdiction
and control with respect to a ship have not been exercised may report the facts
to the flag State. Upon receiving such a report, the flag State shall investigate
the matter and, if appropriate, take any action necessary to remedy the
situation.
7. Each State shall cause an inquiry to be held by or before a suitably
qualified person or persons into every marine casualty or incident of
navigation on the high seas involving a ship flying its flag and causing loss
of life or serious injury to nationals of another State or serious damage to
ships or installations of another State or to the marine environment. The flag
State and the other State shall cooperate in the conduct of any inquiry held by
that other State into any such marine casualty or incident of navigation.
Article 95
Immunity of warships on the high seas
Warships on the high seas have complete immunity from the jurisdiction
of any State other than the flag State.
Article 96
Immunity of ships used only on government non-commercial service
Ships owned or operated by a State and used only on government
non-commercial service shall, on the high seas, have complete immunity from
the jurisdiction of any State other than the flag State.
Article 97
Penal jurisdiction in matters of collision or any other incident of
navigation
1. In the event of a collision or any other incident of navigation
concerning a ship on the high seas, involving the penal or disciplinary
responsibility of the master or of any other person in the service of the ship,
60
no penal or disciplinary proceedings may be instituted against such person
except before the judicial or administrative authorities either of the flag State
or of the State of which such person is a national.
2. In disciplinary matters, the State which has issued a master's
certificate or a certificate of competence or licence shall alone be competent,
after due legal process, to pronounce the withdrawal of such certificates, even
if the holder is not a national of the State which issued them.
3. No arrest or detention of the ship, even as a measure of
investigation, shall be ordered by any authorities other than those of the flag
State.
Article 98
Duty to render assistance
1. Every State shall require the master of a ship flying its flag, in so far
as he can do so without serious danger to the ship, the crew or the passengers:
(a) to render assistance to any person found at sea in danger of
being lost;
(b) to proceed with all possible speed to the rescue of persons in
distress, if informed of their need of assistance, in so far as such
action may reasonably be expected of him;
(c) after a collision, to render assistance to the other ship, its crew
and its passengers and, where possible, to inform the other ship
of the name of his own ship, its port of registry and the nearest
port at which it will call.
2. Every coastal State shall promote the establishment, operation and
maintenance of an adequate and effective search and rescue service regarding
safety on and over the sea and, where circumstances so require, by way of
mutual regional arrangements cooperate with neighbouring States for this
purpose.
Article 99
Prohibition of the transport of slaves
Every State shall take effective measures to prevent and punish the
transport of slaves in ships authorized to fly its flag and to prevent the
unlawful use of its flag for that purpose. Any slave taking refuge on board
any ship, whatever its flag, shall ipso facto be free.
Article 100
Duty to cooperate in the repression of piracy
All States shall cooperate to the fullest possible extent in the repression
of piracy on the high seas or in any other place outside the jurisdiction of any
State.
Article 101
Definition of piracy
Piracy consists of any of the following acts:
61
(a) any illegal acts of violence or detention, or any act of
depredation, committed for private ends by the crew or the
passengers of a private ship or a private aircraft, and directed:
(i) on the high seas, against another ship or aircraft, or
against persons or property on board such ship or aircraft;
(ii) against a ship, aircraft, persons or property in a place
outside the jurisdiction of any State;
(b) any act of voluntary participation in the operation of a ship or
of an aircraft with knowledge of facts making it a pirate ship or
aircraft;
(c) any act of inciting or of intentionally facilitating an act
described in subparagraph (a) or (b).
Article 102
Piracy by a warship, government ship or government aircraft
whose crew has mutinied
The acts of piracy, as defined in article 101, committed by a warship,
government ship or government aircraft whose crew has mutinied and taken
control of the ship or aircraft are assimilated to acts committed by a private
ship or aircraft.
Article 103
Definition of a pirate ship or aircraft
A ship or aircraft is considered a pirate ship or aircraft if it is intended by
the persons in dominant control to be used for the purpose of committing one
of the acts referred to in article 101. The same applies if the ship or aircraft
has been used to commit any such act, so long as it remains under the control
of the persons guilty of that act.
Article 104
Retention or loss of the nationality of a pirate ship or aircraft
A ship or aircraft may retain its nationality although it has become a
pirate ship or aircraft. The retention or loss of nationality is determined by
the law of the State from which such nationality was derived.
Article 105
Seizure of a pirate ship or aircraft
On the high seas, or in any other place outside the jurisdiction of any
State, every State may seize a pirate ship or aircraft, or a ship or aircraft taken
by piracy and under the control of pirates, and arrest the persons and seize the
property on board. The courts of the State which carried out the seizure may
decide upon the penalties to be imposed, and may also determine the action
to be taken with regard to the ships, aircraft or property, subject to the rights
of third parties acting in good faith.
62
Article 106
Liability for seizure without adequate grounds
Where the seizure of a ship or aircraft on suspicion of piracy has been
effected without adequate grounds, the State making the seizure shall be
liable to the State the nationality of which is possessed by the ship or aircraft
for any loss or damage caused by the seizure.
Article 107
Ships and aircraft which are entitled to seize on account of piracy
A seizure on account of piracy may be carried out only by warships or
military aircraft, or other ships or aircraft clearly marked and identifiable as
being on government service and authorized to that effect.
Article 108
Illicit traffic in narcotic drugs or psychotropic substances
1. All States shall cooperate in the suppression of illicit traffic in
narcotic drugs and psychotropic substances engaged in by ships on the high
seas contrary to international conventions.
2. Any State which has reasonable grounds for believing that a ship
flying its flag is engaged in illicit traffic in narcotic drugs or psychotropic
substances may request the cooperation of other States to suppress such
traffic.
Article 109
Unauthorized broadcasting from the high seas
1. All States shall cooperate in the suppression of unauthorized
broadcasting from the high seas.
2. For the purposes of this Convention, "unauthorized broadcasting"
means the transmission of sound radio or television broadcasts from a ship or
installation on the high seas intended for reception by the general public
contrary to international regulations, but excluding the transmission of
distress calls.
3. Any person engaged in unauthorized broadcasting may be
prosecuted before the court of:
(a) the flag State of the ship;
(b) the State of registry of the installation;
(c) the State of which the person is a national;
(d) any State where the transmissions can be received; or
(e) any State where authorized radio communication is suffering
interference.
4. On the high seas, a State having jurisdiction in accordance with
paragraph 3 may, in conformity with article 110, arrest any person or ship
engaged in unauthorized broadcasting and seize the broadcasting apparatus.
63
Article 110
Right of visit
1. Except where acts of interference derive from powers conferred by
treaty, a warship which encounters on the high seas a foreign ship, other than
a ship entitled to complete immunity in accordance with articles 95 and 96,
is not justified in boarding it unless there is reasonable ground for suspecting
that:
(a) the ship is engaged in piracy;
(b) the ship is engaged in the slave trade;
(c) the ship is engaged in unauthorized broadcasting and the flag
State of the warship has jurisdiction under article 109;
(d) the ship is without nationality; or
(e) though flying a foreign flag or refusing to show its flag, the ship
is, in reality, of the same nationality as the warship.
2. In the cases provided for in paragraph 1, the warship may proceed
to verify the ship's right to fly its flag. To this end, it may send a boat under
the command of an officer to the suspected ship. If suspicion remains after
the documents have been checked, it may proceed to a further examination on
board the ship, which must be carried out with all possible consideration.
3. If the suspicions prove to be unfounded, and provided that the ship
boarded has not committed any act justifying them, it shall be compensated
for any loss or damage that may have been sustained.
4. These provisions apply mutatis mutandis to military aircraft.
5. These provisions also apply to any other duly authorized ships or
aircraft clearly marked and identifiable as being on government service.
Article 111
Right of hot pursuit
1. The hot pursuit of a foreign ship may be undertaken when the
competent authorities of the coastal State have good reason to believe that the
ship has violated the laws and regulations of that State. Such pursuit must be
commenced when the foreign ship or one of its boats is within the internal
waters, the archipelagic waters, the territorial sea or the contiguous zone of
the pursuing State, and may only be continued outside the territorial sea or the
contiguous zone if the pursuit has not been interrupted. It is not necessary
that, at the time when the foreign ship within the territorial sea or the
contiguous zone receives the order to stop, the ship giving the order should
likewise be within the territorial sea or the contiguous zone. If the foreign
ship is within a contiguous zone, as defined in article 33, the pursuit may only
be undertaken if there has been a violation of the rights for the protection of
which the zone was established.
2. The right of hot pursuit shall apply mutatis mutandis to violations in
the exclusive economic zone or on the continental shelf, including safety
zones around continental shelf installations, of the laws and regulations of the
coastal State applicable in accordance with this Convention to the exclusive
economic zone or the continental shelf, including such safety zones.
3. The right of hot pursuit ceases as soon as the ship pursued enters the
territorial sea of its own State or of a third State.
4. Hot pursuit is not deemed to have begun unless the pursuing ship has
satisfied itself by such practicable means as may be available that the ship
pursued or one of its boats or other craft working as a team and using the ship
64
pursued as a mother ship is within the limits of the territorial sea, or, as the
case may be, within the contiguous zone or the exclusive economic zone or
above the continental shelf. The pursuit may only be commenced after a
visual or auditory signal to stop has been given at a distance which enables
it to be seen or heard by the foreign ship.
5. The right of hot pursuit may be exercised only by warships or
military aircraft, or other ships or aircraft clearly marked and identifiable as
being on government service and authorized to that effect.
6. Where hot pursuit is effected by an aircraft:
(a) the provisions of paragraphs 1 to 4 shall apply
mutatis mutandis;
(b) the aircraft giving the order to stop must itself actively pursue
the ship until a ship or another aircraft of the coastal State,
summoned by the aircraft, arrives to take over the pursuit,
unless the aircraft is itself able to arrest the ship. It does not
suffice to justify an arrest outside the territorial sea that the ship
was merely sighted by the aircraft as an offender or suspected
offender, if it was not both ordered to stop and pursued by the
aircraft itself or other aircraft or ships which continue the
pursuit without interruption.
7. The release of a ship arrested within the jurisdiction of a State and
escorted to a port of that State for the purposes of an inquiry before the
competent authorities may not be claimed solely on the ground that the ship,
in the course of its voyage, was escorted across a portion of the exclusive
economic zone or the high seas, if the circumstances rendered this necessary.
8. Where a ship has been stopped or arrested outside the territorial sea
in circumstances which do not justify the exercise of the right of hot pursuit,
it shall be compensated for any loss or damage that may have been thereby
sustained.
Article 112
Right to lay submarine cables and pipelines
1. All States are entitled to lay submarine cables and pipelines on the
bed of the high seas beyond the continental shelf.
2. Article 79, paragraph 5, applies to such cables and pipelines.
Article 113
Breaking or injury of a submarine cable or pipeline
Every State shall adopt the laws and regulations necessary to provide that
the breaking or injury by a ship flying its flag or by a person subject to its
jurisdiction of a submarine cable beneath the high seas done wilfully or
through culpable negligence, in such a manner as to be liable to interrupt or
obstruct telegraphic or telephonic communications, and similarly the breaking
or injury of a submarine pipeline or high-voltage power cable, shall be a
punishable offence. This provision shall apply also to conduct calculated or
likely to result in such breaking or injury. However, it shall not apply to any
break or injury caused by persons who acted merely with the legitimate object
of saving their lives or their ships, after having taken all necessary
precautions to avoid such break or injury.
65
Article 114
Breaking or injury by owners of a submarine cable or pipeline
of another submarine cable or pipeline
Every State shall adopt the laws and regulations necessary to provide
that, if persons subject to its jurisdiction who are the owners of a submarine
cable or pipeline beneath the high seas, in laying or repairing that cable or
pipeline, cause a break in or injury to another cable or pipeline, they shall
bear the cost of the repairs.
Article 115
Indemnity for loss incurred in avoiding injury
to a submarine cable or pipeline
Every State shall adopt the laws and regulations necessary to ensure that
the owners of ships who can prove that they have sacrificed an anchor, a net
or any other fishing gear, in order to avoid injuring a submarine cable or
pipeline, shall be indemnified by the owner of the cable or pipeline, provided
that the owner of the ship has taken all reasonable precautionary measures
beforehand.
SECTION 2. CONSERVATION AND MANAGEMENT OF THE
LIVING RESOURCES OF THE HIGH SEAS
Article 116
Right to fish on the high seas
All States have the right for their nationals to engage in fishing on the
high seas subject to:
(a) their treaty obligations;
(b) the rights and duties as well as the interests of coastal States
provided for, inter alia, in article 63, paragraph 2, and articles 64
to 67; and
(c) the provisions of this section.
Article 117
Duty of States to adopt with respect to their nationals
measures for the conservation of the living resources of the high seas
All States have the duty to take, or to cooperate with other States in
taking, such measures for their respective nationals as may be necessary for
the conservation of the living resources of the high seas.
Article 118
Cooperation of States in the conservation and management
of living resources
States shall cooperate with each other in the conservation and
management of living resources in the areas of the high seas. States whose
nationals exploit identical living resources, or different living resources in the
same area, shall enter into negotiations with a view to taking the measures
necessary for the conservation of the living resources concerned. They shall,
66
as appropriate, cooperate to establish subregional or regional fisheries
organizations to this end.
Article 119
Conservation of the living resources of the high seas
1. In determining the allowable catch and establishing other
conservation measures for the living resources in the high seas, States shall:
(a) take measures which are designed, on the best scientific
evidence available to the States concerned, to maintain or
restore populations of harvested species at levels which can
produce the maximum sustainable yield, as qualified by relevant
environmental and economic factors, including the special
requirements of developing States, and taking into account
fishing patterns, the interdependence of stocks and any
generally recommended international minimum standards,
whether subregional, regional or global;
(b) take into consideration the effects on species associated with or
dependent upon harvested species with a view to maintaining or
restoring populations of such associated or dependent species
above levels at which their reproduction may become seriously
threatened.
2. Available scientific information, catch and fishing effort statistics,
and other data relevant to the conservation of fish stocks shall be contributed
and exchanged on a regular basis through competent international
organizations, whether subregional, regional or global, where appropriate and
with participation by all States concerned.
3. States concerned shall ensure that conservation measures and their
implementation do not discriminate in form or in fact against the fishermen
of any State.
Article 120
Marine mammals
Article 65 also applies to the conservation and management of marine
mammals in the high seas.
PART VIII
REGIME OF ISLANDS
Article 121
Regime of islands
1. An island is a naturally formed area of land, surrounded by water,
which is above water at high tide.
2. Except as provided for in paragraph 3, the territorial sea, the
contiguous zone, the exclusive economic zone and the continental shelf of an
island are determined in accordance with the provisions of this Convention
applicable to other land territory.
3. Rocks which cannot sustain human habitation or economic life of
their own shall have no exclusive economic zone or continental shelf.
67
PART IX
ENCLOSED OR SEMI-ENCLOSED SEAS
Article 122
Definition
For the purposes of this Convention, "enclosed or semi-enclosed sea"
means a gulf, basin or sea surrounded by two or more States and connected
to another sea or the ocean by a narrow outlet or consisting entirely or
primarily of the territorial seas and exclusive economic zones of two or more
coastal States.
Article 123
Cooperation of States bordering enclosed or semi-enclosed seas
States bordering an enclosed or semi-enclosed sea should cooperate with
each other in the exercise of their rights and in the performance of their duties
under this Convention. To this end they shall endeavour, directly or through
an appropriate regional organization:
(a) to coordinate the management, conservation, exploration and
exploitation of the living resources of the sea;
(b) to coordinate the implementation of their rights and duties with
respect to the protection and preservation of the marine
environment;
(c) to coordinate their scientific research policies and undertake where
appropriate joint programmes of scientific research in the area;
(d) to invite, as appropriate, other interested States or international
organizations to cooperate with them in furtherance of the
provisions of this article.
PART X
RIGHT OF ACCESS OF LAND-LOCKED
STATES TO AND FROM THE SEA
AND FREEDOM OF TRANSIT
Article 124
Use of terms
1. For the purposes of this Convention:
(a) "land-locked State" means a State which has no sea-coast;
(b) "transit State" means a State, with or without a sea-coast,
situated between a land-locked State and the sea, through whose
territory traffic in transit passes;
(c) "traffic in transit" means transit of persons, baggage, goods and
means of transport across the territory of one or more transit
States, when the passage across such territory, with or without
trans-shipment, warehousing, breaking bulk or change in the
mode of transport, is only a portion of a complete journey
68
which begins or terminates within the territory of the
land-locked State;
(d) "means of transport" means:
(i) railway rolling stock, sea, lake and river craft and road
vehicles;
(ii) where local conditions so require, porters and pack
animals.
2. Land-locked States and transit States may, by agreement between
them, include as means of transport pipelines and gas lines and means of
transport other than those included in paragraph 1.
Article 125
Right of access to and from the sea and freedom of transit
1. Land-locked States shall have the right of access to and from the sea
for the purpose of exercising the rights provided for in this Convention
including those relating to the freedom of the high seas and the common
heritage of mankind. To this end, land-locked States shall enjoy freedom of
transit through the territory of transit States by all means of transport.
2. The terms and modalities for exercising freedom of transit shall be
agreed between the land-locked States and transit States concerned through
bilateral, subregional or regional agreements.
3. Transit States, in the exercise of their full sovereignty over their
territory, shall have the right to take all measures necessary to ensure that the
rights and facilities provided for in this Part for land-locked States shall in no
way infringe their legitimate interests.
Article 126
Exclusion of application of the most-favoured-nation clause
The provisions of this Convention, as well as special agreements relating
to the exercise of the right of access to and from the sea, establishing rights
and facilities on account of the special geographical position of land-locked
States, are excluded from the application of the most-favoured-nation clause.
Article 127
Customs duties, taxes and other charges
1. Traffic in transit shall not be subject to any customs duties, taxes or
other charges except charges levied for specific services rendered in
connection with such traffic.
2. Means of transport in transit and other facilities provided for and
used by land-locked States shall not be subject to taxes or charges higher than
those levied for the use of means of transport of the transit State.
Article 128
Free zones and other customs facilities
For the convenience of traffic in transit, free zones or other customs
facilities may be provided at the ports of entry and exit in the transit States,
by agreement between those States and the land-locked States.
69
Article 129
Cooperation in the construction and improvement of means of transport
Where there are no means of transport in transit States to give effect to
the freedom of transit or where the existing means, including the port
installations and equipment, are inadequate in any respect, the transit States
and land-locked States concerned may cooperate in constructing or improving
them.
Article 130
Measures to avoid or eliminate delays
or other difficulties of a technical nature in traffic in transit
1. Transit States shall take all appropriate measures to avoid delays or
other difficulties of a technical nature in traffic in transit.
2. Should such delays or difficulties occur, the competent authorities
of the transit States and land-locked States concerned shall cooperate towards
their expeditious elimination.
Article 131
Equal treatment in maritime ports
Ships flying the flag of land-locked States shall enjoy treatment equal to
that accorded to other foreign ships in maritime ports.
Article 132
Grant of greater transit facilities
This Convention does not entail in any way the withdrawal of transit
facilities which are greater than those provided for in this Convention and
which are agreed between States Parties to this Convention or granted by a
State Party. This Convention also does not preclude such grant of greater
facilities in the future.
PART XI
THE AREA
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 133
Use of terms
For the purposes of this Part:
(a) "resources" means all solid, liquid or gaseous mineral resources
in situ in the Area at or beneath the seabed, including polymetallic
nodules;
(b) resources, when recovered from the Area, are referred to as
"minerals".
70
Article 134
Scope of this Part
1. This Part applies to the Area.
2. Activities in the Area shall be governed by the provisions of this
Part.
3. The requirements concerning deposit of, and publicity to be given
to, the charts or lists of geographical coordinates showing the limits
referred to in article l, paragraph l(1), are set forth in Part VI.
4. Nothing in this article affects the establishment of the outer limits of
the continental shelf in accordance with Part VI or the validity of
agreements relating to delimitation between States with opposite or
adjacent coasts.
Article 135
Legal status of the superjacent waters and air space
Neither this Part nor any rights granted or exercised pursuant thereto
shall affect the legal status of the waters superjacent to the Area or that of the
air space above those waters.
SECTION 2. PRINCIPLES GOVERNING THE AREA
Article 136
Common heritage of mankind
The Area and its resources are the common heritage of mankind.
Article 137
Legal status of the Area and its resources
1. No State shall claim or exercise sovereignty or sovereign rights over
any part of the Area or its resources, nor shall any State or natural or juridical
person appropriate any part thereof. No such claim or exercise of sovereignty
or sovereign rights nor such appropriation shall be recognized.
2. All rights in the resources of the Area are vested in mankind as a
whole, on whose behalf the Authority shall act. These resources are not
subject to alienation. The minerals recovered from the Area, however, may
only be alienated in accordance with this Part and the rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority.
3. No State or natural or juridical person shall claim, acquire or
exercise rights with respect to the minerals recovered from the Area except
in accordance with this Part. Otherwise, no such claim, acquisition or
exercise of such rights shall be recognized.
Article 138
General conduct of States in relation to the Area
The general conduct of States in relation to the Area shall be in
accordance with the provisions of this Part, the principles embodied in the
Charter of the United Nations and other rules of international law in the
interests of maintaining peace and security and promoting international
cooperation and mutual understanding.
71
Article 139
Responsibility to ensure compliance and liability for damage
1. States Parties shall have the responsibility to ensure that activities in
the Area, whether carried out by States Parties, or state enterprises or natural
or juridical persons which possess the nationality of States Parties or are
effectively controlled by them or their nationals, shall be carried out in
conformity with this Part. The same responsibility applies to international
organizations for activities in the Area carried out by such organizations.
2. Without prejudice to the rules of international law and Annex III,
article 22, damage caused by the failure of a State Party or international
organization to carry out its responsibilities under this Part shall entail
liability; States Parties or international organizations acting together shall bear
joint and several liability. A State Party shall not however be liable for
damage caused by any failure to comply with this Part by a person whom it
has sponsored under article 153, paragraph 2(b), if the State Party has taken
all necessary and appropriate measures to secure effective compliance under
article 153, paragraph 4, and Annex III, article 4, paragraph 4.
3. States Parties that are members of international organizations shall
take appropriate measures to ensure the implementation of this article with
respect to such organizations.
Article 140
Benefit of mankind
1. Activities in the Area shall, as specifically provided for in this Part,
be carried out for the benefit of mankind as a whole, irrespective of the
geographical location of States, whether coastal or land-locked, and taking
into particular consideration the interests and needs of developing States and
of peoples who have not attained full independence or other self-governing
status recognized by the United Nations in accordance with General
Assembly resolution 1514 (XV) and other relevant General Assembly
resolutions.
2. The Authority shall provide for the equitable sharing of financial and
other economic benefits derived from activities in the Area through any
appropriate mechanism, on a non-discriminatory basis, in accordance with
article 160, paragraph 2(f)(i).
Article 141
Use of the Area exclusively for peaceful purposes
The Area shall be open to use exclusively for peaceful purposes by all
States, whether coastal or land-locked, without discrimination and without
prejudice to the other provisions of this Part.
Article 142
Rights and legitimate interests of coastal States
1. Activities in the Area, with respect to resource deposits in the Area
which lie across limits of national jurisdiction, shall be conducted with due
regard to the rights and legitimate interests of any coastal State across whose
jurisdiction such deposits lie.
72
2. Consultations, including a system of prior notification, shall be
maintained with the State concerned, with a view to avoiding infringement of
such rights and interests. In cases where activities in the Area may result in
the exploitation of resources lying within national jurisdiction, the prior
consent of the coastal State concerned shall be required.
3. Neither this Part nor any rights granted or exercised pursuant thereto
shall affect the rights of coastal States to take such measures consistent with
the relevant provisions of Part XII as may be necessary to prevent, mitigate
or eliminate grave and imminent danger to their coastline, or related interests
from pollution or threat thereof or from other hazardous occurrences resulting
from or caused by any activities in the Area.
Article 143
Marine scientific research
1. Marine scientific research in the Area shall be carried out
exclusively for peaceful purposes and for the benefit of mankind as a whole,
in accordance with Part XIII.
2. The Authority may carry out marine scientific research concerning
the Area and its resources, and may enter into contracts for that purpose. The
Authority shall promote and encourage the conduct of marine scientific
research in the Area, and shall coordinate and disseminate the results of such
research and analysis when available.
3. States Parties may carry out marine scientific research in the Area.
States Parties shall promote international cooperation in marine scientific
research in the Area by:
(a) participating in international programmes and encouraging
cooperation in marine scientific research by personnel of
different countries and of the Authority;
(b) ensuring that programmes are developed through the Authority
or other international organizations as appropriate for the
benefit of developing States and technologically less developed
States with a view to:
(i) strengthening their research capabilities;
(ii) training their personnel and the personnel of the Authority
in the techniques and applications of research;
(iii) fostering the employment of their qualified personnel in
research in the Area;
(c) effectively disseminating the results of research and analysis
when available, through the Authority or other international
channels when appropriate.
Article 144
Transfer of technology
1. The Authority shall take measures in accordance with this
Convention:
(a) to acquire technology and scientific knowledge relating to
activities in the Area; and
(b) to promote and encourage the transfer to developing States of
such technology and scientific knowledge so that all States
Parties benefit therefrom.
73
2. To this end the Authority and States Parties shall cooperate in
promoting the transfer of technology and scientific knowledge relating to
activities in the Area so that the Enterprise and all States Parties may benefit
therefrom. In particular they shall initiate and promote:
(a) programmes for the transfer of technology to the Enterprise and
to developing States with regard to activities in the Area,
including, inter alia, facilitating the access of the Enterprise and
of developing States to the relevant technology, under fair and
reasonable terms and conditions;
(b) measures directed towards the advancement of the technology
of the Enterprise and the domestic technology of developing
States, particularly by providing opportunities to personnel
from the Enterprise and from developing States for training in
marine science and technology and for their full participation in
activities in the Area.
Article 145
Protection of the marine environment
Necessary measures shall be taken in accordance with this Convention
with respect to activities in the Area to ensure effective protection for the
marine environment from harmful effects which may arise from such
activities. To this end the Authority shall adopt appropriate rules, regulations
and procedures for inter alia:
(a) the prevention, reduction and control of pollution and other hazards
to the marine environment, including the coastline, and of
interference with the ecological balance of the marine environment,
particular attention being paid to the need for protection from
harmful effects of such activities as drilling, dredging, excavation,
disposal of waste, construction and operation or maintenance of
installations, pipelines and other devices related to such activities;
(b) the protection and conservation of the natural resources of the Area
and the prevention of damage to the flora and fauna of the marine
environment.
Article 146
Protection of human life
With respect to activities in the Area, necessary measures shall be taken
to ensure effective protection of human life. To this end the Authority shall
adopt appropriate rules, regulations and procedures to supplement existing
international law as embodied in relevant treaties.
Article 147
Accommodation of activities in the Area and in the marine environment
1. Activities in the Area shall be carried out with reasonable regard for
other activities in the marine environment.
2. Installations used for carrying out activities in the Area shall be
subject to the following conditions:
(a) such installations shall be erected, emplaced and removed
solely in accordance with this Part and subject to the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority. Due notice must
74
be given of the erection, emplacement and removal of such
installations, and permanent means for giving warning of their
presence must be maintained;
(b) such installations may not be established where interference
may be caused to the use of recognized sea lanes essential to
international navigation or in areas of intense fishing activity;
(c) safety zones shall be established around such installations with
appropriate markings to ensure the safety of both navigation
and the installations. The configuration and location of such
safety zones shall not be such as to form a belt impeding the
lawful access of shipping to particular maritime zones or
navigation along international sea lanes;
(d) such installations shall be used exclusively for peaceful
purposes;
(e) such installations do not possess the status of islands. They
have no territorial sea of their own, and their presence does not
affect the delimitation of the territorial sea, the exclusive
economic zone or the continental shelf.
3. Other activities in the marine environment shall be conducted with
reasonable regard for activities in the Area.
Article 148
Participation of developing States in activities in the Area
The effective participation of developing States in activities in the Area
shall be promoted as specifically provided for in this Part, having due regard
to their special interests and needs, and in particular to the special need of the
land-locked and geographically disadvantaged among them to overcome
obstacles arising from their disadvantaged location, including remoteness
from the Area and difficulty of access to and from it.
Article 149
Archaeological and historical objects
All objects of an archaeological and historical nature found in the Area
shall be preserved or disposed of for the benefit of mankind as a whole,
particular regard being paid to the preferential rights of the State or country
of origin, or the State of cultural origin, or the State of historical and
archaeological origin.
SECTION 3. DEVELOPMENT OF RESOURCES OF THE AREA
Article 150
Policies relating to activities in the Area
Activities in the Area shall, as specifically provided for in this Part, be
carried out in such a manner as to foster healthy development of the world
economy and balanced growth of international trade, and to promote
international cooperation for the over-all development of all countries,
especially developing States, and with a view to ensuring:
(a) the development of the resources of the Area;
(b) orderly, safe and rational management of the resources of the Area,
including the efficient conduct of activities in the Area and, in
75
accordance with sound principles of conservation, the avoidance of
unnecessary waste;
(c) the expansion of opportunities for participation in such activities
consistent in particular with articles 144 and 148;
(d) participation in revenues by the Authority and the transfer of
technology to the Enterprise and developing States as provided for
in this Convention;
(e) increased availability of the minerals derived from the Area as
needed in conjunction with minerals derived from other sources, to
ensure supplies to consumers of such minerals;
(f) the promotion of just and stable prices remunerative to producers
and fair to consumers for minerals derived both from the Area and
from other sources, and the promotion of long-term equilibrium
between supply and demand;
(g) the enhancement of opportunities for all States Parties, irrespective
of their social and economic systems or geographical location, to
participate in the development of the resources of the Area and the
prevention of monopolization of activities in the Area;
(h) the protection of developing countries from adverse effects on their
economies or on their export earnings resulting from a reduction in
the price of an affected mineral, or in the volume of exports of that
mineral, to the extent that such reduction is caused by activities in
the Area, as provided in article 151;
(i) the development of the common heritage for the benefit of mankind
as a whole; and
(j) conditions of access to markets for the imports of minerals produced
from the resources of the Area and for imports of commodities
produced from such minerals shall not be more favourable than the
most favourable applied to imports from other sources.
Article 151
Production policies
1. (a) Without prejudice to the objectives set forth in article 150 and
for the purpose of implementing subparagraph (h) of that
article, the Authority, acting through existing forums or such
new arrangements or agreements as may be appropriate, in
which all interested parties, including both producers and
consumers, participate, shall take measures necessary to
promote the growth, efficiency and stability of markets for
those commodities produced from the minerals derived from the
Area, at prices remunerative to producers and fair to consumers.
All States Parties shall cooperate to this end.
(b) The Authority shall have the right to participate in any
commodity conference dealing with those commodities and in
which all interested parties including both producers and
consumers participate. The Authority shall have the right to
become a party to any arrangement or agreement resulting from
such conferences. Participation of the Authority in any organs
established under those arrangements or agreements shall be in
respect of production in the Area and in accordance with the
relevant rules of those organs.
76
(c) The Authority shall carry out its obligations under the
arrangements or agreements referred to in this paragraph in a
manner which assures a uniform and non-discriminatory
implementation in respect of all production in the Area of the
minerals concerned. In doing so, the Authority shall act in a
manner consistent with the terms of existing contracts and
approved plans of work of the Enterprise.
2. (a) During the interim period specified in paragraph 3, commercial
production shall not be undertaken pursuant to an approved
plan of work until the operator has applied for and has been
issued a production authorization by the Authority. Such
production authorizations may not be applied for or issued more
than five years prior to the planned commencement of
commercial production under the plan of work unless, having
regard to the nature and timing of project development, the
rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority prescribe
another period.
(b) In the application for the production authorization, the operator
shall specify the annual quantity of nickel expected to be
recovered under the approved plan of work. The application
shall include a schedule of expenditures to be made by the
operator after he has received the authorization which are
reasonably calculated to allow him to begin commercial
production on the date planned.
(c) For the purposes of subparagraphs (a) and (b), the Authority
shall establish appropriate performance requirements in
accordance with Annex III, article 17.
(d) The Authority shall issue a production authorization for the
level of production applied for unless the sum of that level and
the levels already authorized exceeds the nickel production
ceiling, as calculated pursuant to paragraph 4 in the year of
issuance of the authorization, during any year of planned
production falling within the interim period.
(e) When issued, the production authorization and approved
application shall become a part of the approved plan of work.
(f) If the operator's application for a production authorization is
denied pursuant to subparagraph (d), the operator may apply
again to the Authority at any time.
3. The interim period shall begin five years prior to 1 January of the
year in which the earliest commercial production is planned to commence
under an approved plan of work. If the earliest commercial production is
delayed beyond the year originally planned, the beginning of the interim
period and the production ceiling originally calculated shall be adjusted
accordingly. The interim period shall last 25 years or until the end of the
Review Conference referred to in article 155 or until the day when such new
arrangements or agreements as are referred to in paragraph 1 enter into force,
whichever is earliest. The Authority shall resume the power provided in this
article for the remainder of the interim period if the said arrangements or
agreements should lapse or become ineffective for any reason whatsoever.
4. (a) The production ceiling for any year of the interim period shall
be the sum of:
(i) the difference between the trend line values for nickel
consumption, as calculated pursuant to subparagraph (b),
77
for the year immediately prior to the year of the earliest
commercial production and the year immediately prior to
the commencement of the interim period; and
(ii) sixty per cent of the difference between the trend line
values for nickel consumption, as calculated pursuant to
subparagraph (b), for the year for which the production
authorization is being applied for and the year
immediately prior to the year of the earliest commercial
production.
(b) For the purposes of subparagraph (a):
(i) trend line values used for computing the nickel production
ceiling shall be those annual nickel consumption values
on a trend line computed during the year in which a
production authorization is issued. The trend line shall be
derived from a linear regression of the logarithms of
actual nickel consumption for the most recent 15-year
period for which such data are available, time being the
independent variable. This trend line shall be referred to
as the original trend line;
(ii) if the annual rate of increase of the original trend line is
less than 3 per cent, then the trend line used to determine
the quantities referred to in subparagraph (a) shall instead
be one passing through the original trend line at the value
for the first year of the relevant 15-year period, and
increasing at 3 per cent annually; provided however that
the production ceiling established for any year of the
interim period may not in any case exceed the difference
between the original trend line value for that year and the
original trend line value for the year immediately prior to
the commencement of the interim period.
5. The Authority shall reserve to the Enterprise for its initial production
a quantity of 38,000 metric tonnes of nickel from the available production
ceiling calculated pursuant to paragraph 4.
6. (a) An operator may in any year produce less than or up to
8 per cent more than the level of annual production of minerals
from polymetallic nodules specified in his production
authorization, provided that the over-all amount of production
shall not exceed that specified in the authorization. Any excess
over 8 per cent and up to 20 per cent in any year, or any excess
in the first and subsequent years following two consecutive
years in which excesses occur, shall be negotiated with the
Authority, which may require the operator to obtain a
supplementary production authorization to cover additional
production.
(b) Applications for such supplementary production authorizations
shall be considered by the Authority only after all pending
applications by operators who have not yet received production
authorizations have been acted upon and due account has been
taken of other likely applicants. The Authority shall be guided
by the principle of not exceeding the total production allowed
under the production ceiling in any year of the interim period.
It shall not authorize the production under any plan of work of
a quantity in excess of 46,500 metric tonnes of nickel per year.
78
7. The levels of production of other metals such as copper, cobalt and
manganese extracted from the polymetallic nodules that are recovered
pursuant to a production authorization should not be higher than those which
would have been produced had the operator produced the maximum level of
nickel from those nodules pursuant to this article. The Authority shall
establish rules, regulations and procedures pursuant to Annex III, article 17,
to implement this paragraph.
8. Rights and obligations relating to unfair economic practices under
relevant multilateral trade agreements shall apply to the exploration for and
exploitation of minerals from the Area. In the settlement of disputes arising
under this provision, States Parties which are Parties to such multilateral trade
agreements shall have recourse to the dispute settlement procedures of such
agreements.
9. The Authority shall have the power to limit the level of production
of minerals from the Area, other than minerals from polymetallic nodules,
under such conditions and applying such methods as may be appropriate by
adopting regulations in accordance with article 161, paragraph 8.
10. Upon the recommendation of the Council on the basis of advice
from the Economic Planning Commission, the Assembly shall establish a
system of compensation or take other measures of economic adjustment
assistance including cooperation with specialized agencies and other
international organizations to assist developing countries which suffer serious
adverse effects on their export earnings or economies resulting from a
reduction in the price of an affected mineral or in the volume of exports of
that mineral, to the extent that such reduction is caused by activities in the
Area. The Authority on request shall initiate studies on the problems of those
States which are likely to be most seriously affected with a view to
minimizing their difficulties and assisting them in their economic adjustment.
Article 152
Exercise of powers and functions by the Authority
1. The Authority shall avoid discrimination in the exercise of its
powers and functions, including the granting of opportunities for activities in
the Area.
2. Nevertheless, special consideration for developing States, including
particular consideration for the land-locked and geographically disadvantaged
among them, specifically provided for in this Part shall be permitted.
Article 153
System of exploration and exploitation
1. Activities in the Area shall be organized, carried out and controlled
by the Authority on behalf of mankind as a whole in accordance with this
article as well as other relevant provisions of this Part and the relevant
Annexes, and the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority.
2. Activities in the Area shall be carried out as prescribed in
paragraph 3:
(a) by the Enterprise, and
(b) in association with the Authority by States Parties, or state
enterprises or natural or juridical persons which possess the
nationality of States Parties or are effectively controlled by
them or their nationals, when sponsored by such States, or any
79
group of the foregoing which meets the requirements provided
in this Part and in Annex III.
3. Activities in the Area shall be carried out in accordance with a
formal written plan of work drawn up in accordance with Annex III and
approved by the Council after review by the Legal and Technical
Commission. In the case of activities in the Area carried out as authorized by
the Authority by the entities specified in paragraph 2(b), the plan of work
shall, in accordance with Annex III, article 3, be in the form of a contract.
Such contracts may provide for joint arrangements in accordance with
Annex III, article 11.
4. The Authority shall exercise such control over activities in the Area
as is necessary for the purpose of securing compliance with the relevant
provisions of this Part and the Annexes relating thereto, and the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority, and the plans of work approved
in accordance with paragraph 3. States Parties shall assist the Authority by
taking all measures necessary to ensure such compliance in accordance with
article 139.
5. The Authority shall have the right to take at any time any measures
provided for under this Part to ensure compliance with its provisions and the
exercise of the functions of control and regulation assigned to it thereunder
or under any contract. The Authority shall have the right to inspect all
installations in the Area used in connection with activities in the Area.
6. A contract under paragraph 3 shall provide for security of tenure.
Accordingly, the contract shall not be revised, suspended or terminated except
in accordance with Annex III, articles 18 and 19.
Article 154
Periodic review
Every five years from the entry into force of this Convention, the
Assembly shall undertake a general and systematic review of the manner in
which the international regime of the Area established in this Convention has
operated in practice. In the light of this review the Assembly may take, or
recommend that other organs take, measures in accordance with the
provisions and procedures of this Part and the Annexes relating thereto which
will lead to the improvement of the operation of the regime.
Article 155
The Review Conference
1. Fifteen years from 1 January of the year in which the earliest
commercial production commences under an approved plan of work, the
Assembly shall convene a conference for the review of those provisions of
this Part and the relevant Annexes which govern the system of exploration
and exploitation of the resources of the Area. The Review Conference shall
consider in detail, in the light of the experience acquired during that period:
(a) whether the provisions of this Part which govern the system of
exploration and exploitation of the resources of the Area have
achieved their aims in all respects, including whether they have
benefited mankind as a whole;
(b) whether, during the 15-year period, reserved areas have been
exploited in an effective and balanced manner in comparison
with non-reserved areas;
80
(c) whether the development and use of the Area and its resources
have been undertaken in such a manner as to foster healthy
development of the world economy and balanced growth of
international trade;
(d) whether monopolization of activities in the Area has been
prevented;
(e) whether the policies set forth in articles 150 and 151 have been
fulfilled; and
(f) whether the system has resulted in the equitable sharing of
benefits derived from activities in the Area, taking into
particular consideration the interests and needs of the
developing States.
2. The Review Conference shall ensure the maintenance of the
principle of the common heritage of mankind, the international regime
designed to ensure equitable exploitation of the resources of the Area for the
benefit of all countries, especially the developing States, and an Authority to
organize, conduct and control activities in the Area. It shall also ensure the
maintenance of the principles laid down in this Part with regard to the
exclusion of claims or exercise of sovereignty over any part of the Area, the
rights of States and their general conduct in relation to the Area, and their
participation in activities in the Area in conformity with this Convention, the
prevention of monopolization of activities in the Area, the use of the Area
exclusively for peaceful purposes, economic aspects of activities in the Area,
marine scientific research, transfer of technology, protection of the marine
environment, protection of human life, rights of coastal States, the legal status
of the waters superjacent to the Area and that of the air space above those
waters and accommodation between activities in the Area and other activities
in the marine environment.
3. The decision-making procedure applicable at the Review Conference
shall be the same as that applicable at the Third United Nations Conference
on the Law of the Sea. The Conference shall make every effort to reach
agreement on any amendments by way of consensus and there should be no
voting on such matters until all efforts at achieving consensus have been
exhausted.
4. If, five years after its commencement, the Review Conference has
not reached agreement on the system of exploration and exploitation of the
resources of the Area, it may decide during the ensuing 12 months, by a
three-fourths majority of the States Parties, to adopt and submit to the States
Parties for ratification or accession such amendments changing or modifying
the system as it determines necessary and appropriate. Such amendments
shall enter into force for all States Parties 12 months after the deposit of
instruments of ratification or accession by three fourths of the States Parties.
5. Amendments adopted by the Review Conference pursuant to this
article shall not affect rights acquired under existing contracts.
81
SECTION 4. THE AUTHORITY
SUBSECTION A. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 156
Establishment of the Authority
1. There is hereby established the International Seabed Authority,
which shall function in accordance with this Part.
2. All States Parties are ipso facto members of the Authority.
3. Observers at the Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the
Sea who have signed the Final Act and who are not referred to in article 305,
paragraph 1(c), (d), (e) or (f), shall have the right to participate in the
Authority as observers, in accordance with its rules, regulations and
procedures.
4. The seat of the Authority shall be in Jamaica.
5. The Authority may establish such regional centres or offices as it
deems necessary for the exercise of its functions.
Article 157
Nature and fundamental principles of the Authority
1. The Authority is the organization through which States Parties shall,
in accordance with this Part, organize and control activities in the Area,
particularly with a view to administering the resources of the Area.
2. The powers and functions of the Authority shall be those expressly
conferred upon it by this Convention. The Authority shall have such
incidental powers, consistent with this Convention, as are implicit in and
necessary for the exercise of those powers and functions with respect to
activities in the Area.
3. The Authority is based on the principle of the sovereign equality of
all its members.
4. All members of the Authority shall fulfil in good faith the
obligations assumed by them in accordance with this Part in order to ensure
to all of them the rights and benefits resulting from membership.
Article 158
Organs of the Authority
1. There are hereby established, as the principal organs of the
Authority, an Assembly, a Council and a Secretariat.
2. There is hereby established the Enterprise, the organ through which
the Authority shall carry out the functions referred to in article 170,
paragraph 1.
3. Such subsidiary organs as may be found necessary may be
established in accordance with this Part.
4. Each principal organ of the Authority and the Enterprise shall be
responsible for exercising those powers and functions which are conferred
upon it. In exercising such powers and functions each organ shall avoid
taking any action which may derogate from or impede the exercise of specific
powers and functions conferred upon another organ.
82
SUBSECTION B. THE ASSEMBLY
Article 159
Composition, procedure and voting
1. The Assembly shall consist of all the members of the Authority.
Each member shall have one representative in the Assembly, who may be
accompanied by alternates and advisers.
2. The Assembly shall meet in regular annual sessions and in such
special sessions as may be decided by the Assembly, or convened by the
Secretary-General at the request of the Council or of a majority of the
members of the Authority.
3. Sessions shall take place at the seat of the Authority unless otherwise
decided by the Assembly.
4. The Assembly shall adopt its rules of procedure. At the beginning
of each regular session, it shall elect its President and such other officers as
may be required. They shall hold office until a new President and other
officers are elected at the next regular session.
5. A majority of the members of the Assembly shall constitute a
quorum.
6. Each member of the Assembly shall have one vote.
7. Decisions on questions of procedure, including decisions to convene
special sessions of the Assembly, shall be taken by a majority of the members
present and voting.
8. Decisions on questions of substance shall be taken by a two-thirds
majority of the members present and voting, provided that such majority
includes a majority of the members participating in the session. When the
issue arises as to whether a question is one of substance or not, that question
shall be treated as one of substance unless otherwise decided by the Assembly
by the majority required for decisions on questions of substance.
9. When a question of substance comes up for voting for the first time,
the President may, and shall, if requested by at least one fifth of the members
of the Assembly, defer the issue of taking a vote on that question for a period
not exceeding five calendar days. This rule may be applied only once to any
question, and shall not be applied so as to defer the question beyond the end
of the session.
10. Upon a written request addressed to the President and sponsored by
at least one fourth of the members of the Authority for an advisory opinion
on the conformity with this Convention of a proposal before the Assembly on
any matter, the Assembly shall request the Seabed Disputes Chamber of the
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea to give an advisory opinion
thereon and shall defer voting on that proposal pending receipt of the
advisory opinion by the Chamber. If the advisory opinion is not received
before the final week of the session in which it is requested, the Assembly
shall decide when it will meet to vote upon the deferred proposal.
Article 160
Powers and functions
1. The Assembly, as the sole organ of the Authority consisting of all
the members, shall be considered the supreme organ of the Authority to which
the other principal organs shall be accountable as specifically provided for in
this Convention. The Assembly shall have the power to establish general
83
policies in conformity with the relevant provisions of this Convention on any
question or matter within the competence of the Authority.
2. In addition, the powers and functions of the Assembly shall be:
(a) to elect the members of the Council in accordance with
article 161;
(b) to elect the Secretary-General from among the candidates
proposed by the Council;
(c) to elect, upon the recommendation of the Council, the members
of the Governing Board of the Enterprise and the
Director-General of the Enterprise;
(d) to establish such subsidiary organs as it finds necessary for the
exercise of its functions in accordance with this Part. In the
composition of these subsidiary organs due account shall be
taken of the principle of equitable geographical distribution and
of special interests and the need for members qualified and
competent in the relevant technical questions dealt with by such
organs;
(e) to assess the contributions of members to the administrative
budget of the Authority in accordance with an agreed scale of
assessment based upon the scale used for the regular budget of
the United Nations until the Authority shall have sufficient
income from other sources to meet its administrative expenses;
(f) (i) to consider and approve, upon the recommendation of the
Council, the rules, regulations and procedures on the
equitable sharing of financial and other economic benefits
derived from activities in the Area and the payments and
contributions made pursuant to article 82, taking into
particular consideration the interests and needs of
developing States and peoples who have not attained full
independence or other self-governing status. If the
Assembly does not approve the recommendations of the
Council, the Assembly shall return them to the Council
for reconsideration in the light of the views expressed by
the Assembly;
(ii) to consider and approve the rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority, and any amendments thereto,
provisionally adopted by the Council pursuant to
article 162, paragraph 2 (o)(ii). These rules, regulations
and procedures shall relate to prospecting, exploration
and exploitation in the Area, the financial management
and internal administration of the Authority, and, upon the
recommendation of the Governing Board of the
Enterprise, to the transfer of funds from the Enterprise to
the Authority;
(g) to decide upon the equitable sharing of financial and other
economic benefits derived from activities in the Area,
consistent with this Convention and the rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority;
(h) to consider and approve the proposed annual budget of the
Authority submitted by the Council;
(i) to examine periodic reports from the Council and from the
Enterprise and special reports requested from the Council or
any other organ of the Authority;
84
(j) to initiate studies and make recommendations for the purpose
of promoting international cooperation concerning activities in
the Area and encouraging the progressive development of
international law relating thereto and its codification;
(k) to consider problems of a general nature in connection with
activities in the Area arising in particular for developing States,
as well as those problems for States in connection with
activities in the Area that are due to their geographical location,
particularly for land-locked and geographically disadvantaged
States;
(l) to establish, upon the recommendation of the Council, on the
basis of advice from the Economic Planning Commission, a
system of compensation or other measures of economic
adjustment assistance as provided in article 151, paragraph 10;
(m) to suspend the exercise of rights and privileges of membership
pursuant to article 185;
(n) to discuss any question or matter within the competence of the
Authority and to decide as to which organ of the Authority shall
deal with any such question or matter not specifically entrusted
to a particular organ, consistent with the distribution of powers
and functions among the organs of the Authority.
SUBSECTION C. THE COUNCIL
Article 161
Composition, procedure and voting
1. The Council shall consist of 36 members of the Authority elected by
the Assembly in the following order:
(a) four members from among those States Parties which, during
the last five years for which statistics are available, have either
consumed more than 2 per cent of total world consumption or
have had net imports of more than 2 per cent of total world
imports of the commodities produced from the categories of
minerals to be derived from the Area, and in any case one State
from the Eastern European (Socialist) region, as well as the
largest consumer;
(b) four members from among the eight States Parties which have
the largest investments in preparation for and in the conduct of
activities in the Area, either directly or through their nationals,
including at least one State from the Eastern European
(Socialist) region;
(c) four members from among States Parties which on the basis of
production in areas under their jurisdiction are major net
exporters of the categories of minerals to be derived from the
Area, including at least two developing States whose exports of
such minerals have a substantial bearing upon their economies;
(d) six members from among developing States Parties,
representing special interests. The special interests to be
represented shall include those of States with large populations,
States which are land-locked or geographically disadvantaged,
States which are major importers of the categories of minerals
85
to be derived from the Area, States which are potential
producers of such minerals, and least developed States;
(e) eighteen members elected according to the principle of ensuring
an equitable geographical distribution of seats in the Council as
a whole, provided that each geographical region shall have at
least one member elected under this subparagraph. For this
purpose, the geographical regions shall be Africa, Asia, Eastern
European (Socialist), Latin America and Western European and
Others.
2. In electing the members of the Council in accordance with
paragraph 1, the Assembly shall ensure that:
(a) land-locked and geographically disadvantaged States are
represented to a degree which is reasonably proportionate to
their representation in the Assembly;
(b) coastal States, especially developing States, which do not
qualify under paragraph 1(a), (b), (c) or (d) are represented to
a degree which is reasonably proportionate to their
representation in the Assembly;
(c) each group of States Parties to be represented on the Council is
represented by those members, if any, which are nominated by
that group.
3. Elections shall take place at regular sessions of the Assembly. Each
member of the Council shall be elected for four years. At the first election,
however, the term of one half of the members of each group referred to in
paragraph l shall be two years.
4. Members of the Council shall be eligible for re-election, but due
regard should be paid to the desirability of rotation of membership.
5. The Council shall function at the seat of the Authority, and shall
meet as often as the business of the Authority may require, but not less than
three times a year.
6. A majority of the members of the Council shall constitute a quorum.
7. Each member of the Council shall have one vote.
8. (a) Decisions on questions of procedure shall be taken by a
majority of the members present and voting.
(b) Decisions on questions of substance arising under the following
provisions shall be taken by a two-thirds majority of the
members present and voting, provided that such majority
includes a majority of the members of the Council: article 162,
paragraph 2, subparagraphs (f); (g); (h); (i); (n); (p); (v);
article 191.
(c) Decisions on questions of substance arising under the following
provisions shall be taken by a three-fourths majority of the
members present and voting, provided that such majority
includes a majority of the members of the Council: article 162,
paragraph 1; article 162, paragraph 2, subparagraphs (a);
(b); (c); (d); (e); (l); (q); (r); (s); (t); (u) in cases of
non-compliance by a contractor or a sponsor; (w) provided that
orders issued thereunder may be binding for not more than
30 days unless confirmed by a decision taken in accordance
with subparagraph (d); article 162, paragraph 2,
subparagraphs (x); (y); (z); article 163, paragraph 2; article 174,
paragraph 3; Annex IV, article 11.
86
(d) Decisions on questions of substance arising under the following
provisions shall be taken by consensus: article 162,
paragraph 2(m) and (o); adoption of amendments to Part XI.
(e) For the purposes of subparagraphs (d), (f) and (g), "consensus"
means the absence of any formal objection. Within 14 days of
the submission of a proposal to the Council, the President of the
Council shall determine whether there would be a formal
objection to the adoption of the proposal. If the President
determines that there would be such an objection, the President
shall establish and convene, within three days following such
determination, a conciliation committee consisting of not more
than nine members of the Council, with the President as
chairman, for the purpose of reconciling the differences and
producing a proposal which can be adopted by consensus. The
committee shall work expeditiously and report to the Council
within 14 days following its establishment. If the committee is
unable to recommend a proposal which can be adopted by
consensus, it shall set out in its report the grounds on which the
proposal is being opposed.
(f) Decisions on questions not listed above which the Council is
authorized to take by the rules, regulations and procedures of
the Authority or otherwise shall be taken pursuant to the
subparagraphs of this paragraph specified in the rules,
regulations and procedures or, if not specified therein, then
pursuant to the subparagraph determined by the Council if
possible in advance, by consensus.
(g) When the issue arises as to whether a question is within
subparagraph (a), (b), (c) or (d), the question shall be treated as
being within the subparagraph requiring the higher or highest
majority or consensus as the case may be, unless otherwise
decided by the Council by the said majority or by consensus.
9. The Council shall establish a procedure whereby a member of the
Authority not represented on the Council may send a representative to attend
a meeting of the Council when a request is made by such member, or a matter
particularly affecting it is under consideration. Such a representative shall be
entitled to participate in the deliberations but not to vote.
Article 162
Powers and functions
1. The Council is the executive organ of the Authority. The Council
shall have the power to establish, in conformity with this Convention and the
general policies established by the Assembly, the specific policies to be
pursued by the Authority on any question or matter within the competence of
the Authority.
2. In addition, the Council shall:
(a) supervise and coordinate the implementation of the provisions
of this Part on all questions and matters within the competence
of the Authority and invite the attention of the Assembly to
cases of non-compliance;
(b) propose to the Assembly a list of candidates for the election of
the Secretary-General;
87
(c) recommend to the Assembly candidates for the election of the
members of the Governing Board of the Enterprise and the
Director-General of the Enterprise;
(d) establish, as appropriate, and with due regard to economy and
efficiency, such subsidiary organs as it finds necessary for the
exercise of its functions in accordance with this Part. In the
composition of subsidiary organs, emphasis shall be placed on
the need for members qualified and competent in relevant
technical matters dealt with by those organs provided that due
account shall be taken of the principle of equitable geographical
distribution and of special interests;
(e) adopt its rules of procedure including the method of selecting
its president;
(f) enter into agreements with the United Nations or other
international organizations on behalf of the Authority and
within its competence, subject to approval by the Assembly;
(g) consider the reports of the Enterprise and transmit them to the
Assembly with its recommendations;
(h) present to the Assembly annual reports and such special reports
as the Assembly may request;
(i) issue directives to the Enterprise in accordance with article 170;
(j) approve plans of work in accordance with Annex III, article 6.
The Council shall act upon each plan of work within 60 days of
its submission by the Legal and Technical Commission at a
session of the Council in accordance with the following
procedures:
(i) if the Commission recommends the approval of a plan of
work, it shall be deemed to have been approved by the
Council if no member of the Council submits in writing
to the President within 14 days a specific objection
alleging non-compliance with the requirements of
Annex III, article 6. If there is an objection, the
conciliation procedure set forth in article 161,
paragraph 8(e), shall apply. If, at the end of the
conciliation procedure, the objection is still maintained,
the plan of work shall be deemed to have been approved
by the Council unless the Council disapproves it by
consensus among its members excluding any State or
States making the application or sponsoring the applicant;
(ii) if the Commission recommends the disapproval of a plan
of work or does not make a recommendation, the Council
may approve the plan of work by a three-fourths majority
of the members present and voting, provided that such
majority includes a majority of the members participating
in the session;
(k) approve plans of work submitted by the Enterprise in
accordance with Annex IV, article 12, applying, mutatis
mutandis, the procedures set forth in subparagraph (j);
(l) exercise control over activities in the Area in accordance with
article 153, paragraph 4, and the rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority;
(m) take, upon the recommendation of the Economic Planning
Commission, necessary and appropriate measures in accordance
88
with article 150, subparagraph (h), to provide protection from
the adverse economic effects specified therein;
(n) make recommendations to the Assembly, on the basis of advice
from the Economic Planning Commission, for a system of
compensation or other measures of economic adjustment
assistance as provided in article 151, paragraph 10;
(o) (i) recommend to the Assembly rules, regulations and
procedures on the equitable sharing of financial and other
economic benefits derived from activities in the Area and
the payments and contributions made pursuant to
article 82, taking into particular consideration the interests
and needs of the developing States and peoples who have
not attained full independence or other self-governing
status;
(ii) adopt and apply provisionally, pending approval by the
Assembly, the rules, regulations and procedures of the
Authority, and any amendments thereto, taking into
account the recommendations of the Legal and Technical
Commission or other subordinate organ concerned. These
rules, regulations and procedures shall relate to
prospecting, exploration and exploitation in the Area and
the financial management and internal administration of
the Authority. Priority shall be given to the adoption of
rules, regulations and procedures for the exploration for
and exploitation of polymetallic nodules. Rules,
regulations and procedures for the exploration for and
exploitation of any resource other than polymetallic
nodules shall be adopted within three years from the date
of a request to the Authority by any of its members to
adopt such rules, regulations and procedures in respect of
such resource. All rules, regulations and procedures shall
remain in effect on a provisional basis until approved by
the Assembly or until amended by the Council in the light
of any views expressed by the Assembly;
(p) review the collection of all payments to be made by or to the
Authority in connection with operations pursuant to this Part;
(q) make the selection from among applicants for production
authorizations pursuant to Annex III, article 7, where such
selection is required by that provision;
(r) submit the proposed annual budget of the Authority to the
Assembly for its approval;
(s) make recommendations to the Assembly concerning policies on
any question or matter within the competence of the Authority;
(t) make recommendations to the Assembly concerning suspension
of the exercise of the rights and privileges of membership
pursuant to article 185;
(u) institute proceedings on behalf of the Authority before the
Seabed Disputes Chamber in cases of non-compliance;
(v) notify the Assembly upon a decision by the Seabed Disputes
Chamber in proceedings instituted under subparagraph (u), and
make any recommendations which it may find appropriate with
respect to measures to be taken;
89
(w) issue emergency orders, which may include orders for the
suspension or adjustment of operations, to prevent serious harm
to the marine environment arising out of activities in the Area;
(x) disapprove areas for exploitation by contractors or the
Enterprise in cases where substantial evidence indicates the risk
of serious harm to the marine environment;
(y) establish a subsidiary organ for the elaboration of draft
financial rules, regulations and procedures relating to:
(i) financial management in accordance with articles 171
to 175; and
(ii) financial arrangements in accordance with Annex III,
article 13 and article 17, paragraph 1(c);
(z) establish appropriate mechanisms for directing and supervising
a staff of inspectors who shall inspect activities in the Area to
determine whether this Part, the rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority, and the terms and conditions of
any contract with the Authority are being complied with.
Article 163
Organs of the Council
1. There are hereby established the following organs of the Council:
(a) an Economic Planning Commission;
(b) a Legal and Technical Commission.
2. Each Commission shall be composed of 15 members, elected by the
Council from among the candidates nominated by the States Parties.
However, if necessary, the Council may decide to increase the size of either
Commission having due regard to economy and efficiency.
3. Members of a Commission shall have appropriate qualifications in
the area of competence of that Commission. States Parties shall nominate
candidates of the highest standards of competence and integrity with
qualifications in relevant fields so as to ensure the effective exercise of the
functions of the Commissions.
4. In the election of members of the Commissions, due account shall
be taken of the need for equitable geographical distribution and the
representation of special interests.
5. No State Party may nominate more than one candidate for the same
Commission. No person shall be elected to serve on more than one
Commission.
6. Members of the Commissions shall hold office for a term of five
years. They shall be eligible for re-election for a further term.
7. In the event of the death, incapacity or resignation of a member of
a Commission prior to the expiration of the term of office, the Council shall
elect for the remainder of the term, a member from the same geographical
region or area of interest.
8. Members of Commissions shall have no financial interest in any
activity relating to exploration and exploitation in the Area. Subject to their
responsibilities to the Commissions upon which they serve, they shall not
disclose, even after the termination of their functions, any industrial secret,
proprietary data which are transferred to the Authority in accordance with
Annex III, article l4, or any other confidential information coming to their
knowledge by reason of their duties for the Authority.
90
9. Each Commission shall exercise its functions in accordance with
such guidelines and directives as the Council may adopt.
10. Each Commission shall formulate and submit to the Council for
approval such rules and regulations as may be necessary for the efficient
conduct of the Commission's functions.
11. The decision-making procedures of the Commissions shall be
established by the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority.
Recommendations to the Council shall, where necessary, be accompanied by
a summary on the divergencies of opinion in the Commission.
12. Each Commission shall normally function at the seat of the
Authority and shall meet as often as is required for the efficient exercise of
its functions.
13. In the exercise of its functions, each Commission may, where
appropriate, consult another commission, any competent organ of the United
Nations or of its specialized agencies or any international organizations with
competence in the subject-matter of such consultation.
Article 164
The Economic Planning Commission
1. Members of the Economic Planning Commission shall have
appropriate qualifications such as those relevant to mining, management of
mineral resource activities, international trade or international economics.
The Council shall endeavour to ensure that the membership of the
Commission reflects all appropriate qualifications. The Commission shall
include at least two members from developing States whose exports of the
categories of minerals to be derived from the Area have a substantial bearing
upon their economies.
2. The Commission shall:
(a) propose, upon the request of the Council, measures to
implement decisions relating to activities in the Area taken in
accordance with this Convention;
(b) review the trends of and the factors affecting supply, demand
and prices of minerals which may be derived from the Area,
bearing in mind the interests of both importing and exporting
countries, and in particular of the developing States among
them;
(c) examine any situation likely to lead to the adverse effects
referred to in article 150, subparagraph (h), brought to its
attention by the State Party or States Parties concerned, and
make appropriate recommendations to the Council;
(d) propose to the Council for submission to the Assembly, as
provided in article 151, paragraph 10, a system of compensation
or other measures of economic adjustment assistance for
developing States which suffer adverse effects caused by
activities in the Area. The Commission shall make the
recommendations to the Council that are necessary for the
application of the system or other measures adopted by the
Assembly in specific cases.
91
Article 165
The Legal and Technical Commission
1. Members of the Legal and Technical Commission shall have
appropriate qualifications such as those relevant to exploration for and
exploitation and processing of mineral resources, oceanology, protection of
the marine environment, or economic or legal matters relating to ocean
mining and related fields of expertise. The Council shall endeavour to ensure
that the membership of the Commission reflects all appropriate qualifications.
2. The Commission shall:
(a) make recommendations with regard to the exercise of the
Authority's functions upon the request of the Council;
(b) review formal written plans of work for activities in the Area in
accordance with article 153, paragraph 3, and submit
appropriate recommendations to the Council. The Commission
shall base its recommendations solely on the grounds stated in
Annex III and shall report fully thereon to the Council;
(c) supervise, upon the request of the Council, activities in the
Area, where appropriate, in consultation and collaboration with
any entity carrying out such activities or State or States
concerned and report to the Council;
(d) prepare assessments of the environmental implications of
activities in the Area;
(e) make recommendations to the Council on the protection of the
marine environment, taking into account the views of
recognized experts in that field;
(f) formulate and submit to the Council the rules, regulations and
procedures referred to in article 162, paragraph 2(o), taking into
account all relevant factors including assessments of the
environmental implications of activities in the Area;
(g) keep such rules, regulations and procedures under review and
recommend to the Council from time to time such amendments
thereto as it may deem necessary or desirable;
(h) make recommendations to the Council regarding the
establishment of a monitoring programme to observe, measure,
evaluate and analyse, by recognized scientific methods, on a
regular basis, the risks or effects of pollution of the marine
environment resulting from activities in the Area, ensure that
existing regulations are adequate and are complied with and
coordinate the implementation of the monitoring programme
approved by the Council;
(i) recommend to the Council that proceedings be instituted on
behalf of the Authority before the Seabed Disputes Chamber,
in accordance with this Part and the relevant Annexes taking
into account particularly article 187;
(j) make recommendations to the Council with respect to measures
to be taken, upon a decision by the Seabed Disputes Chamber
in proceedings instituted in accordance with subparagraph (i);
(k) make recommendations to the Council to issue emergency
orders, which may include orders for the suspension or
adjustment of operations, to prevent serious harm to the marine
environment arising out of activities in the Area. Such
92
recommendations shall be taken up by the Council on a priority
basis;
(l) make recommendations to the Council to disapprove areas for
exploitation by contractors or the Enterprise in cases where
substantial evidence indicates the risk of serious harm to the
marine environment;
(m) make recommendations to the Council regarding the direction
and supervision of a staff of inspectors who shall inspect
activities in the Area to determine whether the provisions of this
Part, the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority, and
the terms and conditions of any contract with the Authority are
being complied with;
(n) calculate the production ceiling and issue production
authorizations on behalf of the Authority pursuant to
article 151, paragraphs 2 to 7, following any necessary selection
among applicants for production authorizations by the Council
in accordance with Annex III, article 7.
3. The members of the Commission shall, upon request by any State
Party or other party concerned, be accompanied by a representative of such
State or other party concerned when carrying out their function of supervision
and inspection.
SUBSECTION D. THE SECRETARIAT
Article 166
The Secretariat
1. The Secretariat of the Authority shall comprise a Secretary-General
and such staff as the Authority may require.
2. The Secretary-General shall be elected for four years by the
Assembly from among the candidates proposed by the Council and may be
re-elected.
3. The Secretary-General shall be the chief administrative officer of the
Authority, and shall act in that capacity in all meetings of the Assembly, of
the Council and of any subsidiary organ, and shall perform such other
administrative functions as are entrusted to the Secretary-General by these
organs.
4. The Secretary-General shall make an annual report to the Assembly
on the work of the Authority.
Article 167
The staff of the Authority
1. The staff of the Authority shall consist of such qualified scientific
and technical and other personnel as may be required to fulfil the
administrative functions of the Authority.
2. The paramount consideration in the recruitment and employment of
the staff and in the determination of their conditions of service shall be the
necessity of securing the highest standards of efficiency, competence and
integrity. Subject to this consideration, due regard shall be paid to the
importance of recruiting the staff on as wide a geographical basis as possible.
3. The staff shall be appointed by the Secretary-General. The terms
and conditions on which they shall be appointed, remunerated and dismissed
93
shall be in accordance with the rules, regulations and procedures of the
Authority.
Article 168
International character of the Secretariat
1. In the performance of their duties the Secretary-General and the staff
shall not seek or receive instructions from any government or from any other
source external to the Authority. They shall refrain from any action which
might reflect on their position as international officials responsible only to the
Authority. Each State Party undertakes to respect the exclusively
international character of the responsibilities of the Secretary-General and the
staff and not to seek to influence them in the discharge of their
responsibilities. Any violation of responsibilities by a staff member shall be
submitted to the appropriate administrative tribunal as provided in the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority.
2. The Secretary-General and the staff shall have no financial interest
in any activity relating to exploration and exploitation in the Area. Subject
to their responsibilities to the Authority, they shall not disclose, even after the
termination of their functions, any industrial secret, proprietary data which are
transferred to the Authority in accordance with Annex III, article 14, or any
other confidential information coming to their knowledge by reason of their
employment with the Authority.
3. Violations of the obligations of a staff member of the Authority set
forth in paragraph 2 shall, on the request of a State Party affected by such
violation, or a natural or juridical person, sponsored by a State Party as
provided in article 153, paragraph 2(b), and affected by such violation, be
submitted by the Authority against the staff member concerned to a tribunal
designated by the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority. The
Party affected shall have the right to take part in the proceedings. If the
tribunal so recommends, the Secretary-General shall dismiss the staff member
concerned.
4. The rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority shall contain
such provisions as are necessary to implement this article.
Article 169
Consultation and cooperation with international
and non-governmental organizations
1. The Secretary-General shall, on matters within the competence of the
Authority, make suitable arrangements, with the approval of the Council, for
consultation and cooperation with international and non-governmental
organizations recognized by the Economic and Social Council of the United
Nations.
2. Any organization with which the Secretary-General has entered into
an arrangement under paragraph 1 may designate representatives to attend
meetings of the organs of the Authority as observers in accordance with the
rules of procedure of these organs. Procedures shall be established for
obtaining the views of such organizations in appropriate cases.
3. The Secretary-General may distribute to States Parties written
reports submitted by the non-governmental organizations referred to in
paragraph l on subjects in which they have special competence and which are
related to the work of the Authority.
94
SUBSECTION E. THE ENTERPRISE
Article 170
The Enterprise
1. The Enterprise shall be the organ of the Authority which shall carry
out activities in the Area directly, pursuant to article 153, paragraph 2(a), as
well as the transporting, processing and marketing of minerals recovered from
the Area.
2. The Enterprise shall, within the framework of the international legal
personality of the Authority, have such legal capacity as is provided for in the
Statute set forth in Annex IV. The Enterprise shall act in accordance with
this Convention and the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority,
as well as the general policies established by the Assembly, and shall be
subject to the directives and control of the Council.
3. The Enterprise shall have its principal place of business at the seat
of the Authority.
4. The Enterprise shall, in accordance with article 173, paragraph 2,
and Annex IV, article 11, be provided with such funds as it may require to
carry out its functions, and shall receive technology as provided in article 144
and other relevant provisions of this Convention.
SUBSECTION F. FINANCIAL ARRANGEMENTS OF THE
AUTHORITY
Article 171
Funds of the Authority
The funds of the Authority shall include:
(a) assessed contributions made by members of the Authority in
accordance with article 160, paragraph 2(e);
(b) funds received by the Authority pursuant to Annex III, article 13, in
connection with activities in the Area;
(c) funds transferred from the Enterprise in accordance with Annex IV,
article 10;
(d) funds borrowed pursuant to article 174;
(e) voluntary contributions made by members or other entities; and
(f) payments to a compensation fund, in accordance with article 151,
paragraph 10, whose sources are to be recommended by the
Economic Planning Commission.
Article 172
Annual budget of the Authority
The Secretary-General shall draft the proposed annual budget of the
Authority and submit it to the Council. The Council shall consider the
proposed annual budget and submit it to the Assembly, together with any
recommendations thereon. The Assembly shall consider and approve the
proposed annual budget in accordance with article 160, paragraph 2(h).
95
Article 173
Expenses of the Authority
1. The contributions referred to in article 171, subparagraph (a), shall
be paid into a special account to meet the administrative expenses of the
Authority until the Authority has sufficient funds from other sources to meet
those expenses.
2. The administrative expenses of the Authority shall be a first call
upon the funds of the Authority. Except for the assessed contributions
referred to in article 171, subparagraph (a), the funds which remain after
payment of administrative expenses may, inter alia:
(a) be shared in accordance with article 140 and article 160,
paragraph 2(g);
(b) be used to provide the Enterprise with funds in accordance with
article 170, paragraph 4;
(c) be used to compensate developing States in accordance with
article 151, paragraph 10, and article 160, paragraph 2(l).
Article 174
Borrowing power of the Authority
1. The Authority shall have the power to borrow funds.
2. The Assembly shall prescribe the limits on the borrowing power of
the Authority in the financial regulations adopted pursuant to article 160,
paragraph 2(f).
3. The Council shall exercise the borrowing power of the Authority.
4. States Parties shall not be liable for the debts of the Authority.
Article 175
Annual audit
The records, books and accounts of the Authority, including its annual
financial statements, shall be audited annually by an independent auditor
appointed by the Assembly.
SUBSECTION G. LEGAL STATUS, PRIVILEGES AND
IMMUNITIES
Article 176
Legal status
The Authority shall have international legal personality and such legal
capacity as may be necessary for the exercise of its functions and the
fulfilment of its purposes.
Article 177
Privileges and immunities
To enable the Authority to exercise its functions, it shall enjoy in the
territory of each State Party the privileges and immunities set forth in this
subsection. The privileges and immunities relating to the Enterprise shall be
those set forth in Annex IV, article 13.
96
Article 178
Immunity from legal process
The Authority, its property and assets, shall enjoy immunity from legal
process except to the extent that the Authority expressly waives this immunity
in a particular case.
Article 179
Immunity from search and any form of seizure
The property and assets of the Authority, wherever located and by
whomsoever held, shall be immune from search, requisition, confiscation,
expropriation or any other form of seizure by executive or legislative action.
Article 180
Exemption from restrictions, regulations, controls and moratoria
The property and assets of the Authority shall be exempt from
restrictions, regulations, controls and moratoria of any nature.
Article 181
Archives and official communications of the Authority
1. The archives of the Authority, wherever located, shall be inviolable.
2. Proprietary data, industrial secrets or similar information and
personnel records shall not be placed in archives which are open to public
inspection.
3. With regard to its official communications, the Authority shall be
accorded by each State Party treatment no less favourable than that accorded
by that State to other international organizations.
Article 182
Privileges and immunities of certain persons connected with the Authority
Representatives of States Parties attending meetings of the Assembly, the
Council or organs of the Assembly or the Council, and the Secretary-General
and staff of the Authority, shall enjoy in the territory of each State Party:
(a) immunity from legal process with respect to acts performed by them
in the exercise of their functions, except to the extent that the State
which they represent or the Authority, as appropriate, expressly
waives this immunity in a particular case;
(b) if they are not nationals of that State Party, the same exemptions
from immigration restrictions, alien registration requirements and
national service obligations, the same facilities as regards exchange
restrictions and the same treatment in respect of travelling facilities
as are accorded by that State to the representatives, officials and
employees of comparable rank of other States Parties.
Article 183
Exemption from taxes and customs duties
1. Within the scope of its official activities, the Authority, its assets and
property, its income, and its operations and transactions, authorized by this
97
Convention, shall be exempt from all direct taxation and goods imported or
exported for its official use shall be exempt from all customs duties. The
Authority shall not claim exemption from taxes which are no more than
charges for services rendered.
2. When purchases of goods or services of substantial value necessary
for the official activities of the Authority are made by or on behalf of the
Authority, and when the price of such goods or services includes taxes or
duties, appropriate measures shall, to the extent practicable, be taken by
States Parties to grant exemption from such taxes or duties or provide for
their reimbursement. Goods imported or purchased under an exemption
provided for in this article shall not be sold or otherwise disposed of in the
territory of the State Party which granted the exemption, except under
conditions agreed with that State Party.
3. No tax shall be levied by States Parties on or in respect of salaries
and emoluments paid or any other form of payment made by the Authority to
the Secretary-General and staff of the Authority, as well as experts
performing missions for the Authority, who are not their nationals.
SUBSECTION H. SUSPENSION OF THE EXERCISE OF RIGHTS
AND PRIVILEGES OF MEMBERS
Article 184
Suspension of the exercise of voting rights
A State Party which is in arrears in the payment of its financial
contributions to the Authority shall have no vote if the amount of its arrears
equals or exceeds the amount of the contributions due from it for the
preceding two full years. The Assembly may, nevertheless, permit such a
member to vote if it is satisfied that the failure to pay is due to conditions
beyond the control of the member.
Article 185
Suspension of exercise of rights and privileges of membership
1. A State Party which has grossly and persistently violated the
provisions of this Part may be suspended from the exercise of the rights and
privileges of membership by the Assembly upon the recommendation of the
Council.
2. No action may be taken under paragraph 1 until the Seabed Disputes
Chamber has found that a State Party has grossly and persistently violated the
provisions of this Part.
SECTION 5. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES AND ADVISORY
OPINIONS
Article 186
Seabed Disputes Chamber of the
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea
The establishment of the Seabed Disputes Chamber and the manner in
which it shall exercise its jurisdiction shall be governed by the provisions of
this section, of Part XV and of Annex VI.
98
Article 187
Jurisdiction of the Seabed Disputes Chamber
The Seabed Disputes Chamber shall have jurisdiction under this Part and
the Annexes relating thereto in disputes with respect to activities in the Area
falling within the following categories:
(a) disputes between States Parties concerning the interpretation or
application of this Part and the Annexes relating thereto;
(b) disputes between a State Party and the Authority concerning:
(i) acts or omissions of the Authority or of a State Party alleged to
be in violation of this Part or the Annexes relating thereto or of
rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority adopted in
accordance therewith; or
(ii) acts of the Authority alleged to be in excess of jurisdiction or a
misuse of power;
(c) disputes between parties to a contract, being States Parties, the
Authority or the Enterprise, state enterprises and natural or juridical
persons referred to in article 153, paragraph 2(b), concerning:
(i) the interpretation or application of a relevant contract or a plan
of work; or
(ii) acts or omissions of a party to the contract relating to activities
in the Area and directed to the other party or directly affecting
its legitimate interests;
(d) disputes between the Authority and a prospective contractor who has
been sponsored by a State as provided in article 153, paragraph 2(b),
and has duly fulfilled the conditions referred to in Annex III,
article 4, paragraph 6, and article 13, paragraph 2, concerning the
refusal of a contract or a legal issue arising in the negotiation of the
contract;
(e) disputes between the Authority and a State Party, a state enterprise
or a natural or juridical person sponsored by a State Party as
provided for in article 153, paragraph 2(b), where it is alleged that
the Authority has incurred liability as provided in Annex III,
article 22;
(f) any other disputes for which the jurisdiction of the Chamber is
specifically provided in this Convention.
Article 188
Submission of disputes to a special chamber of the
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea
or an ad hoc chamber of the Seabed Disputes Chamber
or to binding commercial arbitration
1. Disputes between States Parties referred to in article 187,
subparagraph (a), may be submitted:
(a) at the request of the parties to the dispute, to a special chamber
of the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea to be
formed in accordance with Annex VI, articles 15 and 17; or
(b) at the request of any party to the dispute, to an ad hoc chamber
of the Seabed Disputes Chamber to be formed in accordance
with Annex VI, article 36.
2. (a) Disputes concerning the interpretation or application of a
contract referred to in article 187, subparagraph (c)(i), shall be
99
submitted, at the request of any party to the dispute, to binding
commercial arbitration, unless the parties otherwise agree.
A commercial arbitral tribunal to which the dispute is submitted
shall have no jurisdiction to decide any question of
interpretation of this Convention. When the dispute also
involves a question of the interpretation of Part XI and the
Annexes relating thereto, with respect to activities in the Area,
that question shall be referred to the Seabed Disputes Chamber
for a ruling.
(b) If, at the commencement of or in the course of such arbitration,
the arbitral tribunal determines, either at the request of any
party to the dispute or proprio motu, that its decision depends
upon a ruling of the Seabed Disputes Chamber, the arbitral
tribunal shall refer such question to the Seabed Disputes
Chamber for such ruling. The arbitral tribunal shall then
proceed to render its award in conformity with the ruling of the
Seabed Disputes Chamber.
(c) In the absence of a provision in the contract on the arbitration
procedure to be applied in the dispute, the arbitration shall be
conducted in accordance with the UNCITRAL Arbitration
Rules or such other arbitration rules as may be prescribed in the
rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority, unless the
parties to the dispute otherwise agree.
Article 189
Limitation on jurisdiction
with regard to decisions of the Authority
The Seabed Disputes Chamber shall have no jurisdiction with regard to
the exercise by the Authority of its discretionary powers in accordance with
this Part; in no case shall it substitute its discretion for that of the Authority.
Without prejudice to article 191, in exercising its jurisdiction pursuant to
article 187, the Seabed Disputes Chamber shall not pronounce itself on the
question of whether any rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority are
in conformity with this Convention, nor declare invalid any such rules,
regulations and procedures. Its jurisdiction in this regard shall be confined
to deciding claims that the application of any rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority in individual cases would be in conflict with the
contractual obligations of the parties to the dispute or their obligations under
this Convention, claims concerning excess of jurisdiction or misuse of power,
and to claims for damages to be paid or other remedy to be given to the party
concerned for the failure of the other party to comply with its contractual
obligations or its obligations under this Convention.
Article 190
Participation and appearance
of sponsoring States Parties in proceedings
1. If a natural or juridical person is a party to a dispute referred to in
article 187, the sponsoring State shall be given notice thereof and shall have
the right to participate in the proceedings by submitting written or oral
statements.
100
2. If an action is brought against a State Party by a natural or juridical
person sponsored by another State Party in a dispute referred to in article 187,
subparagraph (c), the respondent State may request the State sponsoring that
person to appear in the proceedings on behalf of that person. Failing such
appearance, the respondent State may arrange to be represented by a juridical
person of its nationality.
Article 191
Advisory opinions
The Seabed Disputes Chamber shall give advisory opinions at the request
of the Assembly or the Council on legal questions arising within the scope of
their activities. Such opinions shall be given as a matter of urgency.
PART XII
PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION
OF THE MARINE ENVIRONMENT
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 192
General obligation
States have the obligation to protect and preserve the marine
environment.
Article 193
Sovereign right of States to exploit their natural resources
States have the sovereign right to exploit their natural resources pursuant
to their environmental policies and in accordance with their duty to protect
and preserve the marine environment.
Article 194
Measures to prevent, reduce and control pollution
of the marine environment
1. States shall take, individually or jointly as appropriate, all measures
consistent with this Convention that are necessary to prevent, reduce and
control pollution of the marine environment from any source, using for this
purpose the best practicable means at their disposal and in accordance with
their capabilities, and they shall endeavour to harmonize their policies in this
connection.
2. States shall take all measures necessary to ensure that activities
under their jurisdiction or control are so conducted as not to cause damage by
pollution to other States and their environment, and that pollution arising
from incidents or activities under their jurisdiction or control does not spread
beyond the areas where they exercise sovereign rights in accordance with this
Convention.
101
3. The measures taken pursuant to this Part shall deal with all sources
of pollution of the marine environment. These measures shall include,
inter alia, those designed to minimize to the fullest possible extent:
(a) the release of toxic, harmful or noxious substances, especially
those which are persistent, from land-based sources, from or
through the atmosphere or by dumping;
(b) pollution from vessels, in particular measures for preventing
accidents and dealing with emergencies, ensuring the safety of
operations at sea, preventing intentional and unintentional
discharges, and regulating the design, construction, equipment,
operation and manning of vessels;
(c) pollution from installations and devices used in exploration or
exploitation of the natural resources of the seabed and subsoil,
in particular measures for preventing accidents and dealing with
emergencies, ensuring the safety of operations at sea, and
regulating the design, construction, equipment, operation and
manning of such installations or devices;
(d) pollution from other installations and devices operating in the
marine environment, in particular measures for preventing
accidents and dealing with emergencies, ensuring the safety of
operations at sea, and regulating the design, construction,
equipment, operation and manning of such installations or
devices.
4. In taking measures to prevent, reduce or control pollution of the
marine environment, States shall refrain from unjustifiable interference with
activities carried out by other States in the exercise of their rights and in
pursuance of their duties in conformity with this Convention.
5. The measures taken in accordance with this Part shall include those
necessary to protect and preserve rare or fragile ecosystems as well as the
habitat of depleted, threatened or endangered species and other forms of
marine life.
Article 195
Duty not to transfer damage or hazards
or transform one type of pollution into another
In taking measures to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine
environment, States shall act so as not to transfer, directly or indirectly,
damage or hazards from one area to another or transform one type of
pollution into another.
Article 196
Use of technologies or introduction of alien or new species
1. States shall take all measures necessary to prevent, reduce and
control pollution of the marine environment resulting from the use of
technologies under their jurisdiction or control, or the intentional or
accidental introduction of species, alien or new, to a particular part of the
marine environment, which may cause significant and harmful changes
thereto.
2. This article does not affect the application of this Convention
regarding the prevention, reduction and control of pollution of the marine
environment.
102
SECTION 2. GLOBAL AND REGIONAL COOPERATION
Article 197
Cooperation on a global or regional basis
States shall cooperate on a global basis and, as appropriate, on a regional
basis, directly or through competent international organizations, in
formulating and elaborating international rules, standards and recommended
practices and procedures consistent with this Convention, for the protection
and preservation of the marine environment, taking into account characteristic
regional features.
Article 198
Notification of imminent or actual damage
When a State becomes aware of cases in which the marine environment
is in imminent danger of being damaged or has been damaged by pollution,
it shall immediately notify other States it deems likely to be affected by such
damage, as well as the competent international organizations.
Article 199
Contingency plans against pollution
In the cases referred to in article 198, States in the area affected, in
accordance with their capabilities, and the competent international
organizations shall cooperate, to the extent possible, in eliminating the effects
of pollution and preventing or minimizing the damage. To this end, States
shall jointly develop and promote contingency plans for responding to
pollution incidents in the marine environment.
Article 200
Studies, research programmes and exchange of information and data
States shall cooperate, directly or through competent international
organizations, for the purpose of promoting studies, undertaking programmes
of scientific research and encouraging the exchange of information and data
acquired about pollution of the marine environment. They shall endeavour
to participate actively in regional and global programmes to acquire
knowledge for the assessment of the nature and extent of pollution, exposure
to it, and its pathways, risks and remedies.
Article 201
Scientific criteria for regulations
In the light of the information and data acquired pursuant to article 200,
States shall cooperate, directly or through competent international
organizations, in establishing appropriate scientific criteria for the
formulation and elaboration of rules, standards and recommended practices
and procedures for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution of the
marine environment.
103
SECTION 3. TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE
Article 202
Scientific and technical assistance to developing States
States shall, directly or through competent international organizations:
(a) promote programmes of scientific, educational, technical and other
assistance to developing States for the protection and preservation
of the marine environment and the prevention, reduction and control
of marine pollution. Such assistance shall include, inter alia:
(i) training of their scientific and technical personnel;
(ii) facilitating their participation in relevant international
programmes;
(iii) supplying them with necessary equipment and facilities;
(iv) enhancing their capacity to manufacture such equipment;
(v) advice on and developing facilities for research, monitoring,
educational and other programmes;
(b) provide appropriate assistance, especially to developing States, for
the minimization of the effects of major incidents which may cause
serious pollution of the marine environment;
(c) provide appropriate assistance, especially to developing States,
concerning the preparation of environmental assessments.
Article 203
Preferential treatment for developing States
Developing States shall, for the purposes of prevention, reduction and
control of pollution of the marine environment or minimization of its effects,
be granted preference by international organizations in:
(a) the allocation of appropriate funds and technical assistance; and
(b) the utilization of their specialized services.
SECTION 4. MONITORING AND ENVIRONMENTAL
ASSESSMENT
Article 204
Monitoring of the risks or effects of pollution
1. States shall, consistent with the rights of other States, endeavour, as
far as practicable, directly or through the competent international
organizations, to observe, measure, evaluate and analyse, by recognized
scientific methods, the risks or effects of pollution of the marine environment.
2. In particular, States shall keep under surveillance the effects of any
activities which they permit or in which they engage in order to determine
whether these activities are likely to pollute the marine environment.
Article 205
Publication of reports
States shall publish reports of the results obtained pursuant to article 204
or provide such reports at appropriate intervals to the competent international
organizations, which should make them available to all States.
104
Article 206
Assessment of potential effects of activities
When States have reasonable grounds for believing that planned
activities under their jurisdiction or control may cause substantial pollution
of or significant and harmful changes to the marine environment, they shall,
as far as practicable, assess the potential effects of such activities on the
marine environment and shall communicate reports of the results of such
assessments in the manner provided in article 205.
SECTION 5. INTERNATIONAL RULES AND NATIONAL
LEGISLATION
TO PREVENT, REDUCE AND CONTROL
POLLUTION OF THE MARINE ENVIRONMENT
Article 207
Pollution from land-based sources
1. States shall adopt laws and regulations to prevent, reduce and control
pollution of the marine environment from land-based sources, including
rivers, estuaries, pipelines and outfall structures, taking into account
internationally agreed rules, standards and recommended practices and
procedures.
2. States shall take other measures as may be necessary to prevent,
reduce and control such pollution.
3. States shall endeavour to harmonize their policies in this connection
at the appropriate regional level.
4. States, acting especially through competent international
organizations or diplomatic conference, shall endeavour to establish global
and regional rules, standards and recommended practices and procedures to
prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine environment from
land-based sources, taking into account characteristic regional features, the
economic capacity of developing States and their need for economic
development. Such rules, standards and recommended practices and
procedures shall be re-examined from time to time as necessary.
5. Laws, regulations, measures, rules, standards and recommended
practices and procedures referred to in paragraphs 1, 2 and 4 shall include
those designed to minimize, to the fullest extent possible, the release of toxic,
harmful or noxious substances, especially those which are persistent, into the
marine environment.
Article 208
Pollution from seabed activities subject to national jurisdiction
1 Coastal States shall adopt laws and regulations to prevent, reduce
and control pollution of the marine environment arising from or in connection
with seabed activities subject to their jurisdiction and from artificial islands,
installations and structures under their jurisdiction, pursuant to articles 60
and 80.
2. States shall take other measures as may be necessary to prevent,
reduce and control such pollution.
3. Such laws, regulations and measures shall be no less effective than
international rules, standards and recommended practices and procedures.
105
4. States shall endeavour to harmonize their policies in this connection
at the appropriate regional level.
5. States, acting especially through competent international
organizations or diplomatic conference, shall establish global and regional
rules, standards and recommended practices and procedures to prevent,
reduce and control pollution of the marine environment referred to in
paragraph l. Such rules, standards and recommended practices and
procedures shall be re-examined from time to time as necessary.
Article 209
Pollution from activities in the Area
1. International rules, regulations and procedures shall be established
in accordance with Part XI to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the
marine environment from activities in the Area. Such rules, regulations and
procedures shall be re-examined from time to time as necessary.
2. Subject to the relevant provisions of this section, States shall adopt
laws and regulations to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine
environment from activities in the Area undertaken by vessels, installations,
structures and other devices flying their flag or of their registry or operating
under their authority, as the case may be. The requirements of such laws and
regulations shall be no less effective than the international rules, regulations
and procedures referred to in paragraph 1.
Article 210
Pollution by dumping
1. States shall adopt laws and regulations to prevent, reduce and control
pollution of the marine environment by dumping.
2. States shall take other measures as may be necessary to prevent,
reduce and control such pollution.
3. Such laws, regulations and measures shall ensure that dumping is not
carried out without the permission of the competent authorities of States.
4. States, acting especially through competent international
organizations or diplomatic conference, shall endeavour to establish global
and regional rules, standards and recommended practices and procedures to
prevent, reduce and control such pollution. Such rules, standards and
recommended practices and procedures shall be re-examined from time to
time as necessary.
5. Dumping within the territorial sea and the exclusive economic zone
or onto the continental shelf shall not be carried out without the express prior
approval of the coastal State, which has the right to permit, regulate and
control such dumping after due consideration of the matter with other States
which by reason of their geographical situation may be adversely affected
thereby.
6. National laws, regulations and measures shall be no less effective in
preventing, reducing and controlling such pollution than the global rules and
standards.
106
Article 211
Pollution from vessels
1. States, acting through the competent international organization or
general diplomatic conference, shall establish international rules and
standards to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine environment
from vessels and promote the adoption, in the same manner, wherever
appropriate, of routeing systems designed to minimize the threat of accidents
which might cause pollution of the marine environment, including the
coastline, and pollution damage to the related interests of coastal States. Such
rules and standards shall, in the same manner, be re-examined from time to
time as necessary.
2. States shall adopt laws and regulations for the prevention, reduction
and control of pollution of the marine environment from vessels flying their
flag or of their registry. Such laws and regulations shall at least have the
same effect as that of generally accepted international rules and standards
established through the competent international organization or general
diplomatic conference.
3. States which establish particular requirements for the prevention,
reduction and control of pollution of the marine environment as a condition
for the entry of foreign vessels into their ports or internal waters or for a call
at their off-shore terminals shall give due publicity to such requirements and
shall communicate them to the competent international organization.
Whenever such requirements are established in identical form by two or more
coastal States in an endeavour to harmonize policy, the communication shall
indicate which States are participating in such cooperative arrangements.
Every State shall require the master of a vessel flying its flag or of its registry,
when navigating within the territorial sea of a State participating in such
cooperative arrangements, to furnish, upon the request of that State,
information as to whether it is proceeding to a State of the same region
participating in such cooperative arrangements and, if so, to indicate whether
it complies with the port entry requirements of that State. This article is
without prejudice to the continued exercise by a vessel of its right of innocent
passage or to the application of article 25, paragraph 2.
4. Coastal States may, in the exercise of their sovereignty within their
territorial sea, adopt laws and regulations for the prevention, reduction and
control of marine pollution from foreign vessels, including vessels exercising
the right of innocent passage. Such laws and regulations shall, in accordance
with Part II, section 3, not hamper innocent passage of foreign vessels.
5. Coastal States, for the purpose of enforcement as provided for in
section 6, may in respect of their exclusive economic zones adopt laws and
regulations for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution from vessels
conforming to and giving effect to generally accepted international rules and
standards established through the competent international organization or
general diplomatic conference.
6. (a) Where the international rules and standards referred to in
paragraph 1 are inadequate to meet special circumstances and
coastal States have reasonable grounds for believing that a
particular, clearly defined area of their respective exclusive
economic zones is an area where the adoption of special
mandatory measures for the prevention of pollution from
vessels is required for recognized technical reasons in relation
to its oceanographical and ecological conditions, as well as its
107
utilization or the protection of its resources and the particular
character of its traffic, the coastal States, after appropriate
consultations through the competent international organization
with any other States concerned, may, for that area, direct a
communication to that organization, submitting scientific and
technical evidence in support and information on necessary
reception facilities. Within 12 months after receiving such a
communication, the organization shall determine whether the
conditions in that area correspond to the requirements set out
above. If the organization so determines, the coastal States
may, for that area, adopt laws and regulations for the
prevention, reduction and control of pollution from vessels
implementing such international rules and standards or
navigational practices as are made applicable, through the
organization, for special areas. These laws and regulations
shall not become applicable to foreign vessels until 15 months
after the submission of the communication to the organization.
(b) The coastal States shall publish the limits of any such
particular, clearly defined area.
(c) If the coastal States intend to adopt additional laws and
regulations for the same area for the prevention, reduction and
control of pollution from vessels, they shall, when submitting
the aforesaid communication, at the same time notify the
organization thereof. Such additional laws and regulations may
relate to discharges or navigational practices but shall not
require foreign vessels to observe design, construction,
manning or equipment standards other than generally accepted
international rules and standards; they shall become applicable
to foreign vessels 15 months after the submission of the
communication to the organization, provided that the
organization agrees within 12 months after the submission of
the communication.
7. The international rules and standards referred to in this article should
include inter alia those relating to prompt notification to coastal States,
whose coastline or related interests may be affected by incidents, including
maritime casualties, which involve discharges or probability of discharges.
Article 212
Pollution from or through the atmosphere
1. States shall adopt laws and regulations to prevent, reduce and control
pollution of the marine environment from or through the atmosphere,
applicable to the air space under their sovereignty and to vessels flying their
flag or vessels or aircraft of their registry, taking into account internationally
agreed rules, standards and recommended practices and procedures and the
safety of air navigation.
2. States shall take other measures as may be necessary to prevent,
reduce and control such pollution.
3. States, acting especially through competent international
organizations or diplomatic conference, shall endeavour to establish global
and regional rules, standards and recommended practices and procedures to
prevent, reduce and control such pollution.
108
SECTION 6. ENFORCEMENT
Article 213
Enforcement with respect to pollution from land-based sources
States shall enforce their laws and regulations adopted in accordance
with article 207 and shall adopt laws and regulations and take other measures
necessary to implement applicable international rules and standards
established through competent international organizations or diplomatic
conference to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine
environment from land-based sources.
Article 214
Enforcement with respect to pollution from seabed activities
States shall enforce their laws and regulations adopted in accordance
with article 208 and shall adopt laws and regulations and take other measures
necessary to implement applicable international rules and standards
established through competent international organizations or diplomatic
conference to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine
environment arising from or in connection with seabed activities subject to
their jurisdiction and from artificial islands, installations and structures under
their jurisdiction, pursuant to articles 60 and 80.
Article 215
Enforcement with respect to pollution from activities in the Area
Enforcement of international rules, regulations and procedures
established in accordance with Part XI to prevent, reduce and control
pollution of the marine environment from activities in the Area shall be
governed by that Part.
Article 216
Enforcement with respect to pollution by dumping
1. Laws and regulations adopted in accordance with this Convention
and applicable international rules and standards established through
competent international organizations or diplomatic conference for the
prevention, reduction and control of pollution of the marine environment by
dumping shall be enforced:
(a) by the coastal State with regard to dumping within its territorial
sea or its exclusive economic zone or onto its continental shelf;
(b) by the flag State with regard to vessels flying its flag or vessels
or aircraft of its registry;
(c) by any State with regard to acts of loading of wastes or other
matter occurring within its territory or at its off-shore terminals.
2. No State shall be obliged by virtue of this article to institute
proceedings when another State has already instituted proceedings in
accordance with this article.
109
Article 217
Enforcement by flag States
1. States shall ensure compliance by vessels flying their flag or of their
registry with applicable international rules and standards, established through
the competent international organization or general diplomatic conference,
and with their laws and regulations adopted in accordance with this
Convention for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution of the
marine environment from vessels and shall accordingly adopt laws and
regulations and take other measures necessary for their implementation. Flag
States shall provide for the effective enforcement of such rules, standards,
laws and regulations, irrespective of where a violation occurs.
2. States shall, in particular, take appropriate measures in order to
ensure that vessels flying their flag or of their registry are prohibited from
sailing, until they can proceed to sea in compliance with the requirements of
the international rules and standards referred to in paragraph 1, including
requirements in respect of design, construction, equipment and manning of
vessels.
3. States shall ensure that vessels flying their flag or of their registry
carry on board certificates required by and issued pursuant to international
rules and standards referred to in paragraph 1. States shall ensure that vessels
flying their flag are periodically inspected in order to verify that such
certificates are in conformity with the actual condition of the vessels. These
certificates shall be accepted by other States as evidence of the condition of
the vessels and shall be regarded as having the same force as certificates
issued by them, unless there are clear grounds for believing that the condition
of the vessel does not correspond substantially with the particulars of the
certificates.
4. If a vessel commits a violation of rules and standards established
through the competent international organization or general diplomatic
conference, the flag State, without prejudice to articles 218, 220 and 228,
shall provide for immediate investigation and where appropriate institute
proceedings in respect of the alleged violation irrespective of where the
violation occurred or where the pollution caused by such violation has
occurred or has been spotted.
5. Flag States conducting an investigation of the violation may request
the assistance of any other State whose cooperation could be useful in
clarifying the circumstances of the case. States shall endeavour to meet
appropriate requests of flag States.
6. States shall, at the written request of any State, investigate any
violation alleged to have been committed by vessels flying their flag. If
satisfied that sufficient evidence is available to enable proceedings to be
brought in respect of the alleged violation, flag States shall without delay
institute such proceedings in accordance with their laws.
7. Flag States shall promptly inform the requesting State and the
competent international organization of the action taken and its outcome.
Such information shall be available to all States.
8. Penalties provided for by the laws and regulations of States for
vessels flying their flag shall be adequate in severity to discourage violations
wherever they occur.
110
Article 218
Enforcement by port States
1. When a vessel is voluntarily within a port or at an off-shore terminal
of a State, that State may undertake investigations and, where the evidence so
warrants, institute proceedings in respect of any discharge from that vessel
outside the internal waters, territorial sea or exclusive economic zone of that
State in violation of applicable international rules and standards established
through the competent international organization or general diplomatic
conference.
2. No proceedings pursuant to paragraph 1 shall be instituted in respect
of a discharge violation in the internal waters, territorial sea or exclusive
economic zone of another State unless requested by that State, the flag State,
or a State damaged or threatened by the discharge violation, or unless the
violation has caused or is likely to cause pollution in the internal waters,
territorial sea or exclusive economic zone of the State instituting the
proceedings.
3. When a vessel is voluntarily within a port or at an off-shore terminal
of a State, that State shall, as far as practicable, comply with requests from
any State for investigation of a discharge violation referred to in paragraph 1,
believed to have occurred in, caused, or threatened damage to the internal
waters, territorial sea or exclusive economic zone of the requesting State. It
shall likewise, as far as practicable, comply with requests from the flag State
for investigation of such a violation, irrespective of where the violation
occurred.
4. The records of the investigation carried out by a port State pursuant
to this article shall be transmitted upon request to the flag State or to the
coastal State. Any proceedings instituted by the port State on the basis of
such an investigation may, subject to section 7, be suspended at the request
of the coastal State when the violation has occurred within its internal waters,
territorial sea or exclusive economic zone. The evidence and records of the
case, together with any bond or other financial security posted with the
authorities of the port State, shall in that event be transmitted to the coastal
State. Such transmittal shall preclude the continuation of proceedings in the
port State.
Article 219
Measures relating to seaworthiness of vessels to avoid pollution
Subject to section 7, States which, upon request or on their own
initiative, have ascertained that a vessel within one of their ports or at one of
their off-shore terminals is in violation of applicable international rules and
standards relating to seaworthiness of vessels and thereby threatens damage
to the marine environment shall, as far as practicable, take administrative
measures to prevent the vessel from sailing. Such States may permit the
vessel to proceed only to the nearest appropriate repair yard and, upon
removal of the causes of the violation, shall permit the vessel to continue
immediately.
111
Article 220
Enforcement by coastal States
1. When a vessel is voluntarily within a port or at an off-shore terminal
of a State, that State may, subject to section 7, institute proceedings in respect
of any violation of its laws and regulations adopted in accordance with this
Convention or applicable international rules and standards for the prevention,
reduction and control of pollution from vessels when the violation has
occurred within the territorial sea or the exclusive economic zone of that
State.
2. Where there are clear grounds for believing that a vessel navigating
in the territorial sea of a State has, during its passage therein, violated laws
and regulations of that State adopted in accordance with this Convention or
applicable international rules and standards for the prevention, reduction and
control of pollution from vessels, that State, without prejudice to the
application of the relevant provisions of Part II, section 3, may undertake
physical inspection of the vessel relating to the violation and may, where the
evidence so warrants, institute proceedings, including detention of the vessel,
in accordance with its laws, subject to the provisions of section 7.
3. Where there are clear grounds for believing that a vessel navigating
in the exclusive economic zone or the territorial sea of a State has, in the
exclusive economic zone, committed a violation of applicable international
rules and standards for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution
from vessels or laws and regulations of that State conforming and giving
effect to such rules and standards, that State may require the vessel to give
information regarding its identity and port of registry, its last and its next port
of call and other relevant information required to establish whether a violation
has occurred.
4. States shall adopt laws and regulations and take other measures so
that vessels flying their flag comply with requests for information pursuant
to paragraph 3.
5. Where there are clear grounds for believing that a vessel navigating
in the exclusive economic zone or the territorial sea of a State has, in the
exclusive economic zone, committed a violation referred to in paragraph 3
resulting in a substantial discharge causing or threatening significant pollution
of the marine environment, that State may undertake physical inspection of
the vessel for matters relating to the violation if the vessel has refused to give
information or if the information supplied by the vessel is manifestly at
variance with the evident factual situation and if the circumstances of the case
justify such inspection.
6. Where there is clear objective evidence that a vessel navigating in
the exclusive economic zone or the territorial sea of a State has, in the
exclusive economic zone, committed a violation referred to in paragraph 3
resulting in a discharge causing major damage or threat of major damage to
the coastline or related interests of the coastal State, or to any resources of its
territorial sea or exclusive economic zone, that State may, subject to section 7,
provided that the evidence so warrants, institute proceedings, including
detention of the vessel, in accordance with its laws.
7. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 6, whenever
appropriate procedures have been established, either through the competent
international organization or as otherwise agreed, whereby compliance with
requirements for bonding or other appropriate financial security has been
112
assured, the coastal State if bound by such procedures shall allow the vessel
to proceed.
8. The provisions of paragraphs 3, 4, 5, 6and 7 also apply in respect of
national laws and regulations adopted pursuant to article 211, paragraph 6.
Article 221
Measures to avoid pollution arising from maritime casualties
1. Nothing in this Part shall prejudice the right of States, pursuant to
international law, both customary and conventional, to take and enforce
measures beyond the territorial sea proportionate to the actual or threatened
damage to protect their coastline or related interests, including fishing, from
pollution or threat of pollution following upon a maritime casualty or acts
relating to such a casualty, which may reasonably be expected to result in
major harmful consequences.
2. For the purposes of this article, "maritime casualty" means a
collision of vessels, stranding or other incident of navigation, or other
occurrence on board a vessel or external to it resulting in material damage or
imminent threat of material damage to a vessel or cargo.
Article 222
Enforcement with respect to pollution from or through the atmosphere
States shall enforce, within the air space under their sovereignty or with
regard to vessels flying their flag or vessels or aircraft of their registry, their
laws and regulations adopted in accordance with article 212, paragraph 1, and
with other provisions of this Convention and shall adopt laws and regulations
and take other measures necessary to implement applicable international rules
and standards established through competent international organizations or
diplomatic conference to prevent, reduce and control pollution of the marine
environment from or through the atmosphere, in conformity with all relevant
international rules and standards concerning the safety of air navigation.
SECTION 7. SAFEGUARDS
Article 223
Measures to facilitate proceedings
In proceedings instituted pursuant to this Part, States shall take measures
to facilitate the hearing of witnesses and the admission of evidence submitted
by authorities of another State, or by the competent international organization,
and shall facilitate the attendance at such proceedings of official
representatives of the competent international organization, the flag State and
any State affected by pollution arising out of any violation. The official
representatives attending such proceedings shall have such rights and duties
as may be provided under national laws and regulations or international law.
113
Article 224
Exercise of powers of enforcement
The powers of enforcement against foreign vessels under this Part may
only be exercised by officials or by warships, military aircraft, or other ships
or aircraft clearly marked and identifiable as being on government service and
authorized to that effect.
Article 225
Duty to avoid adverse consequences
in the exercise of the powers of enforcement
In the exercise under this Convention of their powers of enforcement
against foreign vessels, States shall not endanger the safety of navigation or
otherwise create any hazard to a vessel, or bring it to an unsafe port or
anchorage, or expose the marine environment to an unreasonable risk.
Article 226
Investigation of foreign vessels
1. (a) States shall not delay a foreign vessel longer than is essential
for purposes of the investigations provided for in articles 216,
218 and 220. Any physical inspection of a foreign vessel shall
be limited to an examination of such certificates, records or
other documents as the vessel is required to carry by generally
accepted international rules and standards or of any similar
documents which it is carrying; further physical inspection of
the vessel may be undertaken only after such an examination
and only when:
(i) there are clear grounds for believing that the condition of
the vessel or its equipment does not correspond
substantially with the particulars of those documents;
(ii) the contents of such documents are not sufficient to
confirm or verify a suspected violation; or
(iii) the vessel is not carrying valid certificates and records.
(b) If the investigation indicates a violation of applicable laws and
regulations or international rules and standards for the
protection and preservation of the marine environment, release
shall be made promptly subject to reasonable procedures such
as bonding or other appropriate financial security.
(c) Without prejudice to applicable international rules and
standards relating to the seaworthiness of vessels, the release of
a vessel may, whenever it would present an unreasonable threat
of damage to the marine environment, be refused or made
conditional upon proceeding to the nearest appropriate repair
yard. Where release has been refused or made conditional, the
flag State of the vessel must be promptly notified, and may seek
release of the vessel in accordance with Part XV.
2. States shall cooperate to develop procedures for the avoidance of
unnecessary physical inspection of vessels at sea.
114
Article 227
Non-discrimination with respect to foreign vessels
In exercising their rights and performing their duties under this Part,
States shall not discriminate in form or in fact against vessels of any other
State.
Article 228
Suspension and restrictions on institution of proceedings
1. Proceedings to impose penalties in respect of any violation of
applicable laws and regulations or international rules and standards relating
to the prevention, reduction and control of pollution from vessels committed
by a foreign vessel beyond the territorial sea of the State instituting
proceedings shall be suspended upon the taking of proceedings to impose
penalties in respect of corresponding charges by the flag State within six
months of the date on which proceedings were first instituted, unless those
proceedings relate to a case of major damage to the coastal State or the flag
State in question has repeatedly disregarded its obligation to enforce
effectively the applicable international rules and standards in respect of
violations committed by its vessels. The flag State shall in due course make
available to the State previously instituting proceedings a full dossier of the
case and the records of the proceedings, whenever the flag State has
requested the suspension of proceedings in accordance with this article.
When proceedings instituted by the flag State have been brought to a
conclusion, the suspended proceedings shall be terminated. Upon payment
of costs incurred in respect of such proceedings, any bond posted or other
financial security provided in connection with the suspended proceedings
shall be released by the coastal State.
2. Proceedings to impose penalties on foreign vessels shall not be
instituted after the expiry of three years from the date on which the violation
was committed, and shall not be taken by any State in the event of
proceedings having been instituted by another State subject to the provisions
set out in paragraph 1.
3. The provisions of this article are without prejudice to the right of the
flag State to take any measures, including proceedings to impose penalties,
according to its laws irrespective of prior proceedings by another State.
Article 229
Institution of civil proceedings
Nothing in this Convention affects the institution of civil proceedings in
respect of any claim for loss or damage resulting from pollution of the marine
environment.
Article 230
Monetary penalties and the observance of recognized rights of the accused
1. Monetary penalties only may be imposed with respect to violations
of national laws and regulations or applicable international rules and
standards for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution of the marine
environment, committed by foreign vessels beyond the territorial sea.
115
2. Monetary penalties only may be imposed with respect to violations
of national laws and regulations or applicable international rules and
standards for the prevention, reduction and control of pollution of the marine
environment, committed by foreign vessels in the territorial sea, except in the
case of a wilful and serious act of pollution in the territorial sea.
3. In the conduct of proceedings in respect of such violations
committed by a foreign vessel which may result in the imposition of penalties,
recognized rights of the accused shall be observed.
Article 231
Notification to the flag State and other States concerned
States shall promptly notify the flag State and any other State concerned
of any measures taken pursuant to section 6 against foreign vessels, and shall
submit to the flag State all official reports concerning such measures.
However, with respect to violations committed in the territorial sea, the
foregoing obligations of the coastal State apply only to such measures as are
taken in proceedings. The diplomatic agents or consular officers and where
possible the maritime authority of the flag State, shall be immediately
informed of any such measures taken pursuant to section 6 against foreign
vessels.
Article 232
Liability of States arising from enforcement measures
States shall be liable for damage or loss attributable to them arising from
measures taken pursuant to section 6 when such measures are unlawful or
exceed those reasonably required in the light of available information. States
shall provide for recourse in their courts for actions in respect of such damage
or loss.
Article 233
Safeguards with respect to straits used for international navigation
Nothing in sections 5, 6 and 7 affects the legal regime of straits used for
international navigation. However, if a foreign ship other than those referred
to in section 10 has committed a violation of the laws and regulations referred
to in article 42, paragraph 1(a) and (b), causing or threatening major damage
to the marine environment of the straits, the States bordering the straits may
take appropriate enforcement measures and if so shall respect
mutatis mutandis the provisions of this section.
SECTION 8. ICE-COVERED AREAS
Article 234
Ice-covered areas
Coastal States have the right to adopt and enforce non-discriminatory
laws and regulations for the prevention, reduction and control of marine
pollution from vessels in ice-covered areas within the limits of the exclusive
economic zone, where particularly severe climatic conditions and the
presence of ice covering such areas for most of the year create obstructions
or exceptional hazards to navigation, and pollution of the marine environment
116
could cause major harm to or irreversible disturbance of the ecological
balance. Such laws and regulations shall have due regard to navigation and
the protection and preservation of the marine environment based on the best
available scientific evidence.
SECTION 9. RESPONSIBILITY AND LIABILITY
Article 235
Responsibility and liability
1. States are responsible for the fulfilment of their international
obligations concerning the protection and preservation of the marine
environment. They shall be liable in accordance with international law.
2. States shall ensure that recourse is available in accordance with their
legal systems for prompt and adequate compensation or other relief in respect
of damage caused by pollution of the marine environment by natural or
juridical persons under their jurisdiction.
3. With the objective of assuring prompt and adequate compensation
in respect of all damage caused by pollution of the marine environment,
States shall cooperate in the implementation of existing international law and
the further development of international law relating to responsibility and
liability for the assessment of and compensation for damage and the
settlement of related disputes, as well as, where appropriate, development of
criteria and procedures for payment of adequate compensation, such as
compulsory insurance or compensation funds.
SECTION 10. SOVEREIGN IMMUNITY
Article 236
Sovereign immunity
The provisions of this Convention regarding the protection and
preservation of the marine environment do not apply to any warship, naval
auxiliary, other vessels or aircraft owned or operated by a State and used, for
the time being, only on government non-commercial service. However, each
State shall ensure, by the adoption of appropriate measures not impairing
operations or operational capabilities of such vessels or aircraft owned or
operated by it, that such vessels or aircraft act in a manner consistent, so far
as is reasonable and practicable, with this Convention.
SECTION 11. OBLIGATIONS UNDER OTHER CONVENTIONS
ON THE PROTECTION AND PRESERVATION
OF THE MARINE ENVIRONMENT
Article 237
Obligations under other conventions on the
protection and preservation of the marine environment
1. The provisions of this Part are without prejudice to the specific
obligations assumed by States under special conventions and agreements
concluded previously which relate to the protection and preservation of the
marine environment and to agreements which may be concluded in
furtherance of the general principles set forth in this Convention.
117
2. Specific obligations assumed by States under special conventions,
with respect to the protection and preservation of the marine environment,
should be carried out in a manner consistent with the general principles and
objectives of this Convention.
PART XIII
MARINE SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 238
Right to conduct marine scientific research
All States, irrespective of their geographical location, and competent
international organizations have the right to conduct marine scientific
research subject to the rights and duties of other States as provided for in this
Convention.
Article 239
Promotion of marine scientific research
States and competent international organizations shall promote and
facilitate the development and conduct of marine scientific research in
accordance with this Convention.
Article 240
General principles for the conduct of marine scientific research
In the conduct of marine scientific research the following principles shall
apply:
(a) marine scientific research shall be conducted exclusively for
peaceful purposes;
(b) marine scientific research shall be conducted with appropriate
scientific methods and means compatible with this Convention;
(c) marine scientific research shall not unjustifiably interfere with other
legitimate uses of the sea compatible with this Convention and shall
be duly respected in the course of such uses;
(d) marine scientific research shall be conducted in compliance with all
relevant regulations adopted in conformity with this Convention
including those for the protection and preservation of the marine
environment.
Article 241
Non-recognition of marine scientific research activities
as the legal basis for claims
Marine scientific research activities shall not constitute the legal basis for
any claim to any part of the marine environment or its resources.
118
SECTION 2. INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION
Article 242
Promotion of international cooperation
1. States and competent international organizations shall, in accordance
with the principle of respect for sovereignty and jurisdiction and on the basis
of mutual benefit, promote international cooperation in marine scientific
research for peaceful purposes.
2. In this context, without prejudice to the rights and duties of States
under this Convention, a State, in the application of this Part, shall provide,
as appropriate, other States with a reasonable opportunity to obtain from it,
or with its cooperation, information necessary to prevent and control damage
to the health and safety of persons and to the marine environment.
Article 243
Creation of favourable conditions
States and competent international organizations shall cooperate, through
the conclusion of bilateral and multilateral agreements, to create favourable
conditions for the conduct of marine scientific research in the marine
environment and to integrate the efforts of scientists in studying the essence
of phenomena and processes occurring in the marine environment and the
interrelations between them.
Article 244
Publication and dissemination of information and knowledge
1. States and competent international organizations shall, in accordance
with this Convention, make available by publication and dissemination
through appropriate channels information on proposed major programmes and
their objectives as well as knowledge resulting from marine scientific
research.
2. For this purpose, States, both individually and in cooperation with
other States and with competent international organizations, shall actively
promote the flow of scientific data and information and the transfer of
knowledge resulting from marine scientific research, especially to developing
States, as well as the strengthening of the autonomous marine scientific
research capabilities of developing States through, inter alia, programmes to
provide adequate education and training of their technical and scientific
personnel.
SECTION 3. CONDUCT AND PROMOTION OF
MARINE SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH
Article 245
Marine scientific research in the territorial sea
Coastal States, in the exercise of their sovereignty, have the exclusive
right to regulate, authorize and conduct marine scientific research in their
territorial sea. Marine scientific research therein shall be conducted only with
the express consent of and under the conditions set forth by the coastal State.
119
Article 246
Marine scientific research in the exclusive economic zone
and on the continental shelf
1. Coastal States, in the exercise of their jurisdiction, have the right to
regulate, authorize and conduct marine scientific research in their exclusive
economic zone and on their continental shelf in accordance with the relevant
provisions of this Convention.
2. Marine scientific research in the exclusive economic zone and on the
continental shelf shall be conducted with the consent of the coastal State.
3. Coastal States shall, in normal circumstances, grant their consent for
marine scientific research projects by other States or competent international
organizations in their exclusive economic zone or on their continental shelf
to be carried out in accordance with this Convention exclusively for peaceful
purposes and in order to increase scientific knowledge of the marine
environment for the benefit of all mankind. To this end, coastal States shall
establish rules and procedures ensuring that such consent will not be delayed
or denied unreasonably.
4. For the purposes of applying paragraph 3, normal circumstances may
exist in spite of the absence of diplomatic relations between the coastal State
and the researching State.
5. Coastal States may however in their discretion withhold their
consent to the conduct of a marine scientific research project of another State
or competent international organization in the exclusive economic zone or on
the continental shelf of the coastal State if that project:
(a) is of direct significance for the exploration and exploitation of
natural resources, whether living or non-living;
(b) involves drilling into the continental shelf, the use of explosives
or the introduction of harmful substances into the marine
environment;
(c) involves the construction, operation or use of artificial islands,
installations and structures referred to in articles 60 and 80;
(d) contains information communicated pursuant to article 248
regarding the nature and objectives of the project which is
inaccurate or if the researching State or competent international
organization has outstanding obligations to the coastal State
from a prior research project.
6. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraph 5, coastal States may
not exercise their discretion to withhold consent under subparagraph (a) of
that paragraph in respect of marine scientific research projects to be
undertaken in accordance with the provisions of this Part on the continental
shelf, beyond 200 nautical miles from the baselines from which the breadth
of the territorial sea is measured, outside those specific areas which coastal
States may at any time publicly designate as areas in which exploitation or
detailed exploratory operations focused on those areas are occurring or will
occur within a reasonable period of time. Coastal States shall give reasonable
notice of the designation of such areas, as well as any modifications thereto,
but shall not be obliged to give details of the operations therein.
7. The provisions of paragraph 6 are without prejudice to the rights of
coastal States over the continental shelf as established in article 77.
8. Marine scientific research activities referred to in this article shall
not unjustifiably interfere with activities undertaken by coastal States in the
120
exercise of their sovereign rights and jurisdiction provided for in this
Convention.
Article 247
Marine scientific research projects undertaken
by or under the auspices of international organizations
A coastal State which is a member of or has a bilateral agreement with
an international organization, and in whose exclusive economic zone or on
whose continental shelf that organization wants to carry out a marine
scientific research project, directly or under its auspices, shall be deemed to
have authorized the project to be carried out in conformity with the agreed
specifications if that State approved the detailed project when the decision
was made by the organization for the undertaking of the project, or is willing
to participate in it, and has not expressed any objection within four months
of notification of the project by the organization to the coastal State.
Article 248
Duty to provide information to the coastal State
States and competent international organizations which intend to
undertake marine scientific research in the exclusive economic zone or on the
continental shelf of a coastal State shall, not less than six months in advance
of the expected starting date of the marine scientific research project, provide
that State with a full description of:
(a) the nature and objectives of the project;
(b) the method and means to be used, including name, tonnage, type and
class of vessels and a description of scientific equipment;
(c) the precise geographical areas in which the project is to be
conducted;
(d) the expected date of first appearance and final departure of the
research vessels, or deployment of the equipment and its removal,
as appropriate;
(e) the name of the sponsoring institution, its director, and the person in
charge of the project; and
(f) the extent to which it is considered that the coastal State should be
able to participate or to be represented in the project.
Article 249
Duty to comply with certain conditions
1. States and competent international organizations when undertaking
marine scientific research in the exclusive economic zone or on the
continental shelf of a coastal State shall comply with the following
conditions:
(a) ensure the right of the coastal State, if it so desires, to
participate or be represented in the marine scientific research
project, especially on board research vessels and other craft or
scientific research installations, when practicable, without
payment of any remuneration to the scientists of the coastal
State and without obligation to contribute towards the costs of
the project;
121
(b) provide the coastal State, at its request, with preliminary
reports, as soon as practicable, and with the final results and
conclusions after the completion of the research;
(c) undertake to provide access for the coastal State, at its request,
to all data and samples derived from the marine scientific
research project and likewise to furnish it with data which may
be copied and samples which may be divided without detriment
to their scientific value;
(d) if requested, provide the coastal State with an assessment of
such data, samples and research results or provide assistance in
their assessment or interpretation;
(e) ensure, subject to paragraph 2, that the research results are
made internationally available through appropriate national or
international channels, as soon as practicable;
(f) inform the coastal State immediately of any major change in the
research programme;
(g) unless otherwise agreed, remove the scientific research
installations or equipment once the research is completed.
2. This article is without prejudice to the conditions established by the
laws and regulations of the coastal State for the exercise of its discretion to
grant or withhold consent pursuant to article 246, paragraph 5, including
requiring prior agreement for making internationally available the research
results of a project of direct significance for the exploration and exploitation
of natural resources.
Article 250
Communications concerning marine scientific research projects
Communications concerning the marine scientific research projects shall
be made through appropriate official channels, unless otherwise agreed.
Article 251
General criteria and guidelines
States shall seek to promote through competent international
organizations the establishment of general criteria and guidelines to assist
States in ascertaining the nature and implications of marine scientific
research.
Article 252
Implied consent
States or competent international organizations may proceed with a
marine scientific research project six months after the date upon which the
information required pursuant to article 248 was provided to the coastal State
unless within four months of the receipt of the communication containing
such information the coastal State has informed the State or organization
conducting the research that:
(a) it has withheld its consent under the provisions of article 246; or
(b) the information given by that State or competent international
organization regarding the nature or objectives of the project does
not conform to the manifestly evident facts; or
122
(c) it requires supplementary information relevant to conditions and the
information provided for under articles 248 and 249; or
(d) outstanding obligations exist with respect to a previous marine
scientific research project carried out by that State or organization,
with regard to conditions established in article 249.
Article 253
Suspension or cessation of marine scientific research activities
1. A coastal State shall have the right to require the suspension of any
marine scientific research activities in progress within its exclusive economic
zone or on its continental shelf if:
(a) the research activities are not being conducted in accordance
with the information communicated as provided under
article 248 upon which the consent of the coastal State was
based; or
(b) the State or competent international organization conducting the
research activities fails to comply with the provisions of
article 249 concerning the rights of the coastal State with
respect to the marine scientific research project.
2. A coastal State shall have the right to require the cessation of any
marine scientific research activities in case of any non-compliance with the
provisions of article 248 which amounts to a major change in the research
project or the research activities.
3. A coastal State may also require cessation of marine scientific
research activities if any of the situations contemplated in paragraph 1 are not
rectified within a reasonable period of time.
4. Following notification by the coastal State of its decision to order
suspension or cessation, States or competent international organizations
authorized to conduct marine scientific research activities shall terminate the
research activities that are the subject of such a notification.
5. An order of suspension under paragraph 1 shall be lifted by the
coastal State and the marine scientific research activities allowed to continue
once the researching State or competent international organization has
complied with the conditions required under articles 248 and 249.
Article 254
Rights of neighbouring land-locked
and geographically disadvantaged States
1. States and competent international organizations which have
submitted to a coastal State a project to undertake marine scientific research
referred to in article 246, paragraph 3, shall give notice to the neighbouring
land-locked and geographically disadvantaged States of the proposed research
project, and shall notify the coastal State thereof.
2. After the consent has been given for the proposed marine scientific
research project by the coastal State concerned, in accordance with article 246
and other relevant provisions of this Convention, States and competent
international organizations undertaking such a project shall provide to the
neighbouring land-locked and geographically disadvantaged States, at their
request and when appropriate, relevant information as specified in article 248
and article 249, paragraph 1(f).
123
3. The neighbouring land-locked and geographically disadvantaged
States referred to above shall, at their request, be given the opportunity to
participate, whenever feasible, in the proposed marine scientific research
project through qualified experts appointed by them and not objected to by
the coastal State, in accordance with the conditions agreed for the project, in
conformity with the provisions of this Convention, between the coastal State
concerned and the State or competent international organizations conducting
the marine scientific research.
4. States and competent international organizations referred to in
paragraph 1 shall provide to the above-mentioned land-locked and
geographically disadvantaged States, at their request, the information and
assistance specified in article 249, paragraph 1(d), subject to the provisions
of article 249, paragraph 2.
Article 255
Measures to facilitate marine scientific research
and assist research vessels
States shall endeavour to adopt reasonable rules, regulations and
procedures to promote and facilitate marine scientific research conducted in
accordance with this Convention beyond their territorial sea and, as
appropriate, to facilitate, subject to the provisions of their laws and
regulations, access to their harbours and promote assistance for marine
scientific research vessels which comply with the relevant provisions of this
Part.
Article 256
Marine scientific research in the Area
All States, irrespective of their geographical location, and competent
international organizations have the right, in conformity with the provisions
of Part XI, to conduct marine scientific research in the Area.
Article 257
Marine scientific research in the water column
beyond the exclusive economic zone
All States, irrespective of their geographical location, and competent
international organizations have the right, in conformity with this Convention,
to conduct marine scientific research in the water column beyond the limits
of the exclusive economic zone.
SECTION 4. SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH INSTALLATIONS OR
EQUIPMENT IN THE MARINE ENVIRONMENT
Article 258
Deployment and use
The deployment and use of any type of scientific research installations
or equipment in any area of the marine environment shall be subject to the
same conditions as are prescribed in this Convention for the conduct of
marine scientific research in any such area.
124
Article 259
Legal status
The installations or equipment referred to in this section do not possess
the status of islands. They have no territorial sea of their own, and their
presence does not affect the delimitation of the territorial sea, the exclusive
economic zone or the continental shelf.
Article 260
Safety zones
Safety zones of a reasonable breadth not exceeding a distance of
500 metres may be created around scientific research installations in
accordance with the relevant provisions of this Convention. All States shall
ensure that such safety zones are respected by their vessels.
Article 261
Non-interference with shipping routes
The deployment and use of any type of scientific research installations
or equipment shall not constitute an obstacle to established international
shipping routes.
Article 262
Identification markings and warning signals
Installations or equipment referred to in this section shall bear
identification markings indicating the State of registry or the international
organization to which they belong and shall have adequate internationally
agreed warning signals to ensure safety at sea and the safety of air navigation,
taking into account rules and standards established by competent international
organizations.
SECTION 5. RESPONSIBILITY AND LIABILITY
Article 263
Responsibility and liability
1. States and competent international organizations shall be responsible
for ensuring that marine scientific research, whether undertaken by them or
on their behalf, is conducted in accordance with this Convention.
2. States and competent international organizations shall be responsible
and liable for the measures they take in contravention of this Convention in
respect of marine scientific research conducted by other States, their natural
or juridical persons or by competent international organizations, and shall
provide compensation for damage resulting from such measures.
3. States and competent international organizations shall be responsible
and liable pursuant to article 235 for damage caused by pollution of the
marine environment arising out of marine scientific research undertaken by
them or on their behalf.
125
SECTION 6. SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES
AND INTERIM MEASURES
Article 264
Settlement of disputes
Disputes concerning the interpretation or application of the provisions of
this Convention with regard to marine scientific research shall be settled in
accordance with Part XV, sections 2 and 3.
Article 265
Interim measures
Pending settlement of a dispute in accordance with Part XV, sections 2
and 3, the State or competent international organization authorized to conduct
a marine scientific research project shall not allow research activities to
commence or continue without the express consent of the coastal State
concerned.
PART XIV
DEVELOPMENT AND TRANSFER OF MARINE
TECHNOLOGY
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 266
Promotion of the development and transfer of marine technology
1. States, directly or through competent international organizations,
shall cooperate in accordance with their capabilities to promote actively the
development and transfer of marine science and marine technology on fair
and reasonable terms and conditions.
2. States shall promote the development of the marine scientific and
technological capacity of States which may need and request technical
assistance in this field, particularly developing States, including land-locked
and geographically disadvantaged States, with regard to the exploration,
exploitation, conservation and management of marine resources, the
protection and preservation of the marine environment, marine scientific
research and other activities in the marine environment compatible with this
Convention, with a view to accelerating the social and economic development
of the developing States.
3. States shall endeavour to foster favourable economic and legal
conditions for the transfer of marine technology for the benefit of all parties
concerned on an equitable basis.
Article 267
Protection of legitimate interests
States, in promoting cooperation pursuant to article 266, shall have due
regard for all legitimate interests including, inter alia, the rights and duties of
holders, suppliers and recipients of marine technology.
126
Article 268
Basic objectives
States, directly or through competent international organizations, shall
promote:
(a) the acquisition, evaluation and dissemination of marine
technological knowledge and facilitate access to such information
and data;
(b) the development of appropriate marine technology;
(c) the development of the necessary technological infrastructure to
facilitate the transfer of marine technology;
(d) the development of human resources through training and education
of nationals of developing States and countries and especially the
nationals of the least developed among them;
(e) international cooperation at all levels, particularly at the regional,
subregional and bilateral levels.
Article 269
Measures to achieve the basic objectives
In order to achieve the objectives referred to in article 268, States,
directly or through competent international organizations, shall endeavour,
inter alia, to:
(a) establish programmes of technical cooperation for the effective
transfer of all kinds of marine technology to States which may need
and request technical assistance in this field, particularly the
developing land-locked and geographically disadvantaged States, as
well as other developing States which have not been able either to
establish or develop their own technological capacity in marine
science and in the exploration and exploitation of marine resources
or to develop the infrastructure of such technology;
(b) promote favourable conditions for the conclusion of agreements,
contracts and other similar arrangements, under equitable and
reasonable conditions;
(c) hold conferences, seminars and symposia on scientific and
technological subjects, in particular on policies and methods for the
transfer of marine technology;
(d) promote the exchange of scientists and of technological and other
experts;
(e) undertake projects and promote joint ventures and other forms of
bilateral and multilateral cooperation.
SECTION 2. INTERNATIONAL COOPERATION
Article 270
Ways and means of international cooperation
International cooperation for the development and transfer of marine
technology shall be carried out, where feasible and appropriate, through
existing bilateral, regional or multilateral programmes, and also through
expanded and new programmes in order to facilitate marine scientific
research, the transfer of marine technology, particularly in new fields, and
appropriate international funding for ocean research and development.
127
Article 271
Guidelines, criteria and standards
States, directly or through competent international organizations, shall
promote the establishment of generally accepted guidelines, criteria and
standards for the transfer of marine technology on a bilateral basis or within
the framework of international organizations and other fora, taking into
account, in particular, the interests and needs of developing States.
Article 272
Coordination of international programmes
In the field of transfer of marine technology, States shall endeavour to
ensure that competent international organizations coordinate their activities,
including any regional or global programmes, taking into account the interests
and needs of developing States, particularly land-locked and geographically
disadvantaged States.
Article 273
Cooperation with international organizations and the Authority
States shall cooperate actively with competent international organizations
and the Authority to encourage and facilitate the transfer to developing States,
their nationals and the Enterprise of skills and marine technology with regard
to activities in the Area.
Article 274
Objectives of the Authority
Subject to all legitimate interests including, inter alia, the rights and
duties of holders, suppliers and recipients of technology, the Authority, with
regard to activities in the Area, shall ensure that:
(a) on the basis of the principle of equitable geographical distribution,
nationals of developing States, whether coastal, land-locked or
geographically disadvantaged, shall be taken on for the purposes of
training as members of the managerial, research and technical staff
constituted for its undertakings;
(b) the technical documentation on the relevant equipment, machinery,
devices and processes is made available to all States, in particular
developing States which may need and request technical assistance
in this field;
(c) adequate provision is made by the Authority to facilitate the
acquisition of technical assistance in the field of marine technology
by States which may need and request it, in particular developing
States, and the acquisition by their nationals of the necessary skills
and know-how, including professional training;
(d) States which may need and request technical assistance in this field,
in particular developing States, are assisted in the acquisition of
necessary equipment, processes, plant and other technical know-how
through any financial arrangements provided for in this Convention.
128
SECTION 3. NATIONAL AND REGIONAL MARINE
SCIENTIFIC AND TECHNOLOGICAL CENTRES
Article 275
Establishment of national centres
1. States, directly or through competent international organizations and
the Authority, shall promote the establishment, particularly in developing
coastal States, of national marine scientific and technological research centres
and the strengthening of existing national centres, in order to stimulate and
advance the conduct of marine scientific research by developing coastal
States and to enhance their national capabilities to utilize and preserve their
marine resources for their economic benefit.
2. States, through competent international organizations and the
Authority, shall give adequate support to facilitate the establishment and
strengthening of such national centres so as to provide for advanced training
facilities and necessary equipment, skills and know-how as well as technical
experts to such States which may need and request such assistance.
Article 276
Establishment of regional centres
1. States, in coordination with the competent international
organizations, the Authority and national marine scientific and technological
research institutions, shall promote the establishment of regional marine
scientific and technological research centres, particularly in developing
States, in order to stimulate and advance the conduct of marine scientific
research by developing States and foster the transfer of marine technology.
2. All States of a region shall cooperate with the regional centres
therein to ensure the more effective achievement of their objectives.
Article 277
Functions of regional centres
The functions of such regional centres shall include, inter alia:
(a) training and educational programmes at all levels on various aspects
of marine scientific and technological research, particularly marine
biology, including conservation and management of living
resources, oceanography, hydrography, engineering, geological
exploration of the seabed, mining and desalination technologies;
(b) management studies;
(c) study programmes related to the protection and preservation of the
marine environment and the prevention, reduction and control of
pollution;
(d) organization of regional conferences, seminars and symposia;
(e) acquisition and processing of marine scientific and technological
data and information;
(f) prompt dissemination of results of marine scientific and
technological research in readily available publications;
(g) publicizing national policies with regard to the transfer of marine
technology and systematic comparative study of those policies;
129
(h) compilation and systematization of information on the marketing of
technology and on contracts and other arrangements concerning
patents;
(i) technical cooperation with other States of the region.
SECTION 4. COOPERATION AMONG INTERNATIONAL
ORGANIZATIONS
Article 278
Cooperation among international organizations
The competent international organizations referred to in this Part and in
Part XIII shall take all appropriate measures to ensure, either directly or in
close cooperation among themselves, the effective discharge of their
functions and responsibilities under this Part.
PART XV
SETTLEMENT OF DISPUTES
SECTION 1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 279
Obligation to settle disputes by peaceful means
States Parties shall settle any dispute between them concerning the
interpretation or application of this Convention by peaceful means in
accordance with Article 2, paragraph 3, of the Charter of the United Nations
and, to this end, shall seek a solution by the means indicated in Article 33,
paragraph 1, of the Charter.
Article 280
Settlement of disputes by any peaceful means chosen by the parties
Nothing in this Part impairs the right of any States Parties to agree at any
time to settle a dispute between them concerning the interpretation or
application of this Convention by any peaceful means of their own choice.
Article 281
Procedure where no settlement has been reached by the parties
1. If the States Parties which are parties to a dispute concerning the
interpretation or application of this Convention have agreed to seek settlement
of the dispute by a peaceful means of their own choice, the procedures
provided for in this Part apply only where no settlement has been reached by
recourse to such means and the agreement between the parties does not
exclude any further procedure.
2. If the parties have also agreed on a time-limit, paragraph 1 applies
only upon the expiration of that time-limit.
130
Article 282
Obligations under general, regional or bilateral agreements
If the States Parties which are parties to a dispute concerning the
interpretation or application of this Convention have agreed, through a
general, regional or bilateral agreement or otherwise, that such dispute shall,
at the request of any party to the dispute, be submitted to a procedure that
entails a binding decision, that procedure shall apply in lieu of the procedures
provided for in this Part, unless the parties to the dispute otherwise agree.
Article 283
Obligation to exchange views
1. When a dispute arises between States Parties concerning the
interpretation or application of this Convention, the parties to the dispute shall
proceed expeditiously to an exchange of views regarding its settlement by
negotiation or other peaceful means.
2. The parties shall also proceed expeditiously to an exchange of views
where a procedure for the settlement of such a dispute has been terminated
without a settlement or where a settlement has been reached and the
circumstances require consultation regarding the manner of implementing the
settlement.
Article 284
Conciliation
1. A State Party which is a party to a dispute concerning the
interpretation or application of this Convention may invite the other party or
parties to submit the dispute to conciliation in accordance with the procedure
under Annex V, section 1, or another conciliation procedure.
2. If the invitation is accepted and if the parties agree upon the
conciliation procedure to be applied, any party may submit the dispute to that
procedure.
3. If the invitation is not accepted or the parties do not agree upon the
procedure, the conciliation proceedings shall be deemed to be terminated.
4. Unless the parties otherwise agree, when a dispute has been
submitted to conciliation, the proceedings may be terminated only in
accordance with the agreed conciliation procedure.
Article 285
Application of this section to disputes submitted pursuant to Part XI
This section applies to any dispute which pursuant to Part XI, section 5,
is to be settled in accordance with procedures provided for in this Part. If an
entity other than a State Party is a party to such a dispute, this section applies
mutatis mutandis.
131
SECTION 2. COMPULSORY PROCEDURES ENTAILING
BINDING DECISIONS
Article 286
Application of procedures under this section
Subject to section 3, any dispute concerning the interpretation or
application of this Convention shall, where no settlement has been reached
by recourse to section 1, be submitted at the request of any party to the
dispute to the court or tribunal having jurisdiction under this section.
Article 287
Choice of procedure
1. When signing, ratifying or acceding to this Convention or at any
time thereafter, a State shall be free to choose, by means of a written
declaration, one or more of the following means for the settlement of disputes
concerning the interpretation or application of this Convention:
(a) the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea established in
accordance with Annex VI;
(b) the International Court of Justice;
(c) an arbitral tribunal constituted in accordance with Annex VII;
(d) a special arbitral tribunal constituted in accordance with
Annex VIII for one or more of the categories of disputes
specified therein.
2. A declaration made under paragraph 1 shall not affect or be affected
by the obligation of a State Party to accept the jurisdiction of the Seabed
Disputes Chamber of the International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea to the
extent and in the manner provided for in Part XI, section 5.
3. A State Party, which is a party to a dispute not covered by a
declaration in force, shall be deemed to have accepted arbitration in
accordance with Annex VII.
4. If the parties to a dispute have accepted the same procedure for the
settlement of the dispute, it may be submitted only to that procedure, unless
the parties otherwise agree.
5. If the parties to a dispute have not accepted the same procedure for
the settlement of the dispute, it may be submitted only to arbitration in
accordance with Annex VII, unless the parties otherwise agree.
6. A declaration made under paragraph 1 shall remain in force until
three months after notice of revocation has been deposited with the
Secretary-General of the United Nations.
7. A new declaration, a notice of revocation or the expiry of a
declaration does not in any way affect proceedings pending before a court or
tribunal having jurisdiction under this article, unless the parties otherwise
agree.
8. Declarations and notices referred to in this article shall be deposited
with the Secretary-General of the United Nations, who shall transmit copies
thereof to the States Parties.
132
Article 288
Jurisdiction
1. A court or tribunal referred to in article 287 shall have jurisdiction
over any dispute concerning the interpretation or application of this
Convention which is submitted to it in accordance with this Part.
2. A court or tribunal referred to in article 287 shall also have
jurisdiction over any dispute concerning the interpretation or application of
an international agreement related to the purposes of this Convention, which
is submitted to it in accordance with the agreement.
3. The Seabed Disputes Chamber of the International Tribunal for the
Law of the Sea established in accordance with Annex VI, and any other
chamber or arbitral tribunal referred to in Part XI, section 5, shall have
jurisdiction in any matter which is submitted to it in accordance therewith.
4. In the event of a dispute as to whether a court or tribunal has
jurisdiction, the matter shall be settled by decision of that court or tribunal.
Article 289
Experts
In any dispute involving scientific or technical matters, a court or tribunal
exercising jurisdiction under this section may, at the request of a party or
proprio motu, select in consultation with the parties no fewer than two
scientific or technical experts chosen preferably from the relevant list
prepared in accordance with Annex VIII, article 2, to sit with the court or
tribunal but without the right to vote.
Article 290
Provisional measures
1. If a dispute has been duly submitted to a court or tribunal which
considers that prima facie it has jurisdiction under this Part or Part XI,
section 5, the court or tribunal may prescribe any provisional measures which
it considers appropriate under the circumstances to preserve the respective
rights of the parties to the dispute or to prevent serious harm to the marine
environment, pending the final decision.
2. Provisional measures may be modified or revoked as soon as the
circumstances justifying them have changed or ceased to exist.
3. Provisional measures may be prescribed, modified or revoked under
this article only at the request of a party to the dispute and after the parties
have been given an opportunity to be heard.
4. The court or tribunal shall forthwith give notice to the parties to the
dispute, and to such other States Parties as it considers appropriate, of the
prescription, modification or revocation of provisional measures.
5. Pending the constitution of an arbitral tribunal to which a dispute is
being submitted under this section, any court or tribunal agreed upon by the
parties or, failing such agreement within two weeks from the date of the
request for provisional measures, the International Tribunal for the Law of the
Sea or, with respect to activities in the Area, the Seabed Disputes Chamber,
may prescribe, modify or revoke provisional measures in accordance with this
article if it considers that prima facie the tribunal which is to be constituted
would have jurisdiction and that the urgency of the situation so requires.
Once constituted, the tribunal to which the dispute has been submitted may
133
modify, revoke or affirm those provisional measures, acting in conformity
with paragraphs 1 to 4.
6. The parties to the dispute shall comply promptly with any
provisional measures prescribed under this article.
Article 291
Access
1. All the dispute settlement procedures specified in this Part shall be
open to States Parties.
2. The dispute settlement procedures specified in this Part shall be open
to entities other than States Parties only as specifically provided for in this
Convention.
Article 292
Prompt release of vessels and crews
1. Where the authorities of a State Party have detained a vessel flying
the flag of another State Party and it is alleged that the detaining State has not
complied with the provisions of this Convention for the prompt release of the
vessel or its crew upon the posting of a reasonable bond or other financial
security, the question of release from detention may be submitted to any court
or tribunal agreed upon by the parties or, failing such agreement within
10 days from the time of detention, to a court or tribunal accepted by the
detaining State under article 287 or to the International Tribunal for the Law
of the Sea, unless the parties otherwise agree.
2. The application for release may be made only by or on behalf of the
flag State of the vessel.
3. The court or tribunal shall deal without delay with the application for
release and shall deal only with the question of release, without prejudice to
the merits of any case before the appropriate domestic forum against the
vessel, its owner or its crew. The authorities of the detaining State remain
competent to release the vessel or its crew at any time.
4. Upon the posting of the bond or other financial security determined
by the court or tribunal, the authorities of the detaining State shall comply
promptly with the decision of the court or tribunal concerning the release of
the vessel or its crew.
Article 293
Applicable law
1. A court or tribunal having jurisdiction under this section shall apply
this Convention and other rules of international law not incompatible with
this Convention.
2. Paragraph l does not prejudice the power of the court or tribunal
having jurisdiction under this section to decide a case ex aequo et bono, if the
parties so agree.
Article 294
Preliminary proceedings
1. A court or tribunal provided for in article 287 to which an
application is made in respect of a dispute referred to in article 297 shall
134
determine at the request of a party, or may determine proprio motu, whether
the claim constitutes an abuse of legal process or whether prima facie it is
well founded. If the court or tribunal determines that the claim constitutes an
abuse of legal process or is prima facie unfounded, it shall take no further
action in the case.
2. Upon receipt of the application, the court or tribunal shall
immediately notify the other party or parties of the application, and shall fix
a reasonable time-limit within which they may request it to make a
determination in accordance with paragraph 1.
3. Nothing in this article affects the right of any party to a dispute to
make preliminary objections in accordance with the applicable rules of
procedure.
Article 295
Exhaustion of local remedies
Any dispute between States Parties concerning the interpretation or
application of this Convention may be submitted to the procedures provided
for in this section only after local remedies have been exhausted where this
is required by international law.
Article 296
Finality and binding force of decisions
1. Any decision rendered by a court or tribunal having jurisdiction
under this section shall be final and shall be complied with by all the parties
to the dispute.
2. Any such decision shall have no binding force except between the
parties and in respect of that particular dispute.
SECTION 3. LIMITATIONS AND EXCEPTIONS
TO APPLICABILITY OF SECTION 2
Article 297
Limitations on applicability of section 2
1. Disputes concerning the interpretation or application of this
Convention with regard to the exercise by a coastal State of its sovereign
rights or jurisdiction provided for in this Convention shall be subject to the
procedures provided for in section 2 in the following cases:
(a) when it is alleged that a coastal State has acted in contravention
of the provisions of this Convention in regard to the freedoms
and rights of navigation, overflight or the laying of submarine
cables and pipelines, or in regard to other internationally lawful
uses of the sea specified in article 58;
(b) when it is alleged that a State in exercising the aforementioned
freedoms, rights or uses has acted in contravention of this
Convention or of laws or regulations adopted by the coastal
State in conformity with this Convention and other rules of
international law not incompatible with this Convention; or
(c) when it is alleged that a coastal State has acted in contravention
of specified international rules and standards for the protection
and preservation of the marine environment which are
135
applicable to the coastal State and which have been established
by this Convention or through a competent international
organization or diplomatic conference in accordance with this
Convention.
2. (a) Disputes concerning the interpretation or application of the
provisions of this Convention with regard to marine scientific
research shall be settled in accordance with section 2, except
that the coastal State shall not be obliged to accept the
submission to such settlement of any dispute arising out of:
(i) the exercise by the coastal State of a right or discretion in
accordance with article 246; or
(ii) a decision by the coastal State to order suspension or
cessation of a research project in accordance with
article 253.
(b) A dispute arising from an allegation by the researching State
that with respect to a specific project the coastal State is not
exercising its rights under articles 246 and 253 in a manner
compatible with this Convention shall be submitted, at the
request of either party, to conciliation under Annex V,
section 2, provided that the conciliation commission shall not
call in question the exercise by the coastal State of its discretion
to designate specific areas as referred to in article 246,
paragraph 6, or of its discretion to withhold consent in
accordance with article 246, paragraph 5.
3. (a) Disputes concerning the interpretation or application of the
provisions of this Convention with regard to fisheries shall be
settled in accordance with section 2, except that the coastal
State shall not be obliged to accept the submission to such
settlement of any dispute relating to its sovereign rights with
respect to the living resources in the exclusive economic zone
or their exercise, including its discretionary powers for
determining the allowable catch, its harvesting capacity, the
allocation of surpluses to other States and the terms and
conditions established in its conservation and management laws
and regulations.
(b) Where no settlement has been reached by recourse to section 1
of this Part, a dispute shall be submitted to conciliation under
Annex V, section 2, at the request of any party to the dispute,
when it is alleged that:
(i) a coastal State has manifestly failed to comply with its
obligations to ensure through proper conservation and
management measures that the maintenance of the living
resources in the exclusive economic zone is not seriously
endangered;
(ii) a coastal State has arbitrarily refused to determine, at the
request of another State, the allowable catch and its
capacity to harvest living resources with respect to stocks
which that other State is interested in fishing; or
(iii) a coastal State has arbitrarily refused to allocate to any
State, under articles 62, 69 and 70 and under the terms
and conditions established by the coastal State consistent
with this Convention, the whole or part of the surplus it
has declared to exist.
136
(c) In no case shall the conciliation commission substitute its
discretion for that of the coastal State.
(d) The report of the conciliation commission shall be
communicated to the appropriate international organizations.
(e) In negotiating agreements pursuant to articles 69 and 70, States
Parties, unless they otherwise agree, shall include a clause on
measures which they shall take in order to minimize the
possibility of a disagreement concerning the interpretation or
application of the agreement, and on how they should proceed
if a disagreement nevertheless arises.
Article 298
Optional exceptions to applicability of section 2
1. When signing, ratifying or acceding to this Convention or at any
time thereafter, a State may, without prejudice to the obligations arising under
section 1, declare in writing that it does not accept any one or more of the
procedures provided for in section 2 with respect to one or more of the
following categories of disputes:
(a) (i) disputes concerning the interpretation or application of
articles 15, 74 and 83 relating to sea boundary
delimitations, or those involving historic bays or titles,
provided that a State having made such a declaration
shall, when such a dispute arises subsequent to the entry
into force of this Convention and where no agreement
within a reasonable period of time is reached in
negotiations between the parties, at the request of any
party to the dispute, accept submission of the matter to
conciliation under Annex V, section 2; and provided
further that any dispute that necessarily involves the
concurrent consideration of any unsettled dispute
concerning sovereignty or other rights over continental or
insular land territory shall be excluded from such
submission;
(ii) after the conciliation commission has presented its report,
which shall state the reasons on which it is based, the
parties shall negotiate an agreement on the basis of that
report; if these negotiations do not result in an agreement,
the parties shall, by mutual consent, submit the question
to one of the procedures provided for in section 2, unless
the parties otherwise agree;
(iii) this subparagraph does not apply to any sea boundary
dispute finally settled by an arrangement between the
parties, or to any such dispute which is to be settled in
accordance with a bilateral or multilateral agreement
binding upon those parties;
(b) disputes concerning military activities, including military
activities by government vessels and aircraft engaged in
non-commercial service, and disputes concerning law
enforcement activities in regard to the exercise of sovereign
rights or jurisdiction excluded from the jurisdiction of a court
or tribunal under article 297, paragraph 2 or 3;
137
(c) disputes in respect of which the Security Council of the United
Nations is exercising the functions assigned to it by the Charter
of the United Nations, unless the Security Council decides to
remove the matter from its agenda or calls upon the parties to
settle it by the means provided for in this Convention.
2. A State Party which has made a declaration under paragraph 1 may
at any time withdraw it, or agree to submit a dispute excluded by such
declaration to any procedure specified in this Convention.
3. A State Party which has made a declaration under paragraph 1 shall
not be entitled to submit any dispute falling within the excepted category of
disputes to any procedure in this Convention as against another State Party,
without the consent of that party.
4. If one of the States Parties has made a declaration under
paragraph 1(a), any other State Party may submit any dispute falling within
an excepted category against the declarant party to the procedure specified in
such declaration.
5. A new declaration, or the withdrawal of a declaration, does not in
any way affect proceedings pending before a court or tribunal in accordance
with this article, unless the parties otherwise agree.
6. Declarations and notices of withdrawal of declarations under this
article shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the United Nations,
who shall transmit copies thereof to the States Parties.
Article 299
Right of the parties to agree upon a procedure
1. A dispute excluded under article 297 or excepted by a declaration
made under article 298 from the dispute settlement procedures provided for
in section 2 may be submitted to such procedures only by agreement of the
parties to the dispute.
2. Nothing in this section impairs the right of the parties to the dispute
to agree to some other procedure for the settlement of such dispute or to reach
an amicable settlement.
PART XVI
GENERAL PROVISIONS
Article 300
Good faith and abuse of rights
States Parties shall fulfil in good faith the obligations assumed under this
Convention and shall exercise the rights, jurisdiction and freedoms
recognized in this Convention in a manner which would not constitute an
abuse of right.
138
Article 301
Peaceful uses of the seas
In exercising their rights and performing their duties under this
Convention, States Parties shall refrain from any threat or use of force against
the territorial integrity or political independence of any State, or in any other
manner inconsistent with the principles of international law embodied in the
Charter of the United Nations.
Article 302
Disclosure of information
Without prejudice to the right of a State Party to resort to the procedures
for the settlement of disputes provided for in this Convention, nothing in this
Convention shall be deemed to require a State Party, in the fulfilment of its
obligations under this Convention, to supply information the disclosure of
which is contrary to the essential interests of its security.
Article 303
Archaeological and historical objects found at sea
1. States have the duty to protect objects of an archaeological and
historical nature found at sea and shall cooperate for this purpose.
2. In order to control traffic in such objects, the coastal State may, in
applying article 33, presume that their removal from the seabed in the zone
referred to in that article without its approval would result in an infringement
within its territory or territorial sea of the laws and regulations referred to in
that article.
3. Nothing in this article affects the rights of identifiable owners, the
law of salvage or other rules of admiralty, or laws and practices with respect
to cultural exchanges.
4. This article is without prejudice to other international agreements
and rules of international law regarding the protection of objects of an
archaeological and historical nature.
Article 304
Responsibility and liability for damage
The provisions of this Convention regarding responsibility and liability
for damage are without prejudice to the application of existing rules and the
development of further rules regarding responsibility and liability under
international law.
139
PART XVII
FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 305
Signature
1. This Convention shall be open for signature by:
(a) all States;
(b) Namibia, represented by the United Nations Council for
Namibia;
(c) all self-governing associated States which have chosen that
status in an act of self-determination supervised and approved
by the United Nations in accordance with General Assembly
resolution 1514 (XV) and which have competence over the
matters governed by this Convention, including the competence
to enter into treaties in respect of those matters;
(d) all self-governing associated States which, in accordance with
their respective instruments of association, have competence
over the matters governed by this Convention, including the
competence to enter into treaties in respect of those matters;
(e) all territories which enjoy full internal self-government,
recognized as such by the United Nations, but have not attained
full independence in accordance with General Assembly
resolution 1514 (XV) and which have competence over the
matters governed by this Convention, including the competence
to enter into treaties in respect of those matters;
(f) international organizations, in accordance with Annex IX.
2. This Convention shall remain open for signature until
9 December 1984 at the Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Jamaica and also,
from 1 July 1983 until 9 December 1984, at United Nations Headquarters in
New York.
Article 306
Ratification and formal confirmation
This Convention is subject to ratification by States and the other entities
referred to in article 305, paragraph l(b), (c), (d) and (e), and to formal
confirmation, in accordance with Annex IX, by the entities referred to in
article 305, paragraph l(f). The instruments of ratification and of formal
confirmation shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the United
Nations.
Article 307
Accession
This Convention shall remain open for accession by States and the other
entities referred to in article 305. Accession by the entities referred to in
article 305, paragraph l(f), shall be in accordance with Annex IX. The
instruments of accession shall be deposited with the Secretary-General of the
United Nations.
140
Article 308
Entry into force
1. This Convention shall enter into force 12 months after the date of
deposit of the sixtieth instrument of ratification or accession.
2. For each State ratifying or acceding to this Convention after the
deposit of the sixtieth instrument of ratification or accession, the Convention
shall enter into force on the thirtieth day following the deposit of its
instrument of ratification or accession, subject to paragraph 1.
3. The Assembly of the Authority shall meet on the date of entry into
force of this Convention and shall elect the Council of the Authority. The
first Council shall be constituted in a manner consistent with the purpose of
article 161 if the provisions of that article cannot be strictly applied.
4. The rules, regulations and procedures drafted by the Preparatory
Commission shall apply provisionally pending their formal adoption by the
Authority in accordance with Part XI.
5. The Authority and its organs shall act in accordance with
resolution II of the Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea
relating to preparatory investment and with decisions of the Preparatory
Commission taken pursuant to that resolution.
Article 309
Reservations and exceptions
No reservations or exceptions may be made to this Convention unless
expressly permitted by other articles of this Convention.
Article 310
Declarations and statements
Article 309 does not preclude a State, when signing, ratifying or acceding
to this Convention, from making declarations or statements, however phrased
or named, with a view, inter alia, to the harmonization of its laws and
regulations with the provisions of this Convention, provided that such
declarations or statements do not purport to exclude or to modify the legal
effect of the provisions of this Convention in their application to that State.
Article 311
Relation to other conventions and international agreements
1. This Convention shall prevail, as between States Parties, over the
Geneva Conventions on the Law of the Sea of 29 April 1958.
2. This Convention shall not alter the rights and obligations of States
Parties which arise from other agreements compatible with this Convention
and which do not affect the enjoyment by other States Parties of their rights
or the performance of their obligations under this Convention.
3. Two or more States Parties may conclude agreements modifying or
suspending the operation of provisions of this Convention, applicable solely
to the relations between them, provided that such agreements do not relate to
a provision derogation from which is incompatible with the effective
execution of the object and purpose of this Convention, and provided further
that such agreements shall not affect the application of the basic principles
embodied herein, and that the provisions of such agreements do not affect the
141
enjoyment by other States Parties of their rights or the performance of their
obligations under this Convention.
4. States Parties intending to conclude an agreement referred to in
paragraph 3 shall notify the other States Parties through the depositary of this
Convention of their intention to conclude the agreement and of the
modification or suspension for which it provides.
5. This article does not affect international agreements expressly
permitted or preserved by other articles of this Convention.
6. States Parties agree that there shall be no amendments to the basic
principle relating to the common heritage of mankind set forth in article 136
and that they shall not be party to any agreement in derogation thereof.
Article 312
Amendment
1. After the expiry of a period of 10 years from the date of entry into
force of this Convention, a State Party may, by written communication
addressed to the Secretary-General of the United Nations, propose specific
amendments to this Convention, other than those relating to activities in the
Area, and request the convening of a conference to consider such proposed
amendments. The Secretary-General shall circulate such communication to
all States Parties. If, within 12 months from the date of the circulation of the
communication, not less than one half of the States Parties reply favourably
to the request, the Secretary-General shall convene the conference.
2. The decision-making procedure applicable at the amendment
conference shall be the same as that applicable at the Third United Nations
Conference on the Law of the Sea unless otherwise decided by the
conference. The conference should make every effort to reach agreement on
any amendments by way of consensus and there should be no voting on them
until all efforts at consensus have been exhausted.
Article 313
Amendment by simplified procedure
1. A State Party may, by written communication addressed to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations, propose an amendment to this
Convention, other than an amendment relating to activities in the Area, to be
adopted by the simplified procedure set forth in this article without convening
a conference. The Secretary-General shall circulate the communication to all
States Parties.
2. If, within a period of 12 months from the date of the circulation of
the communication, a State Party objects to the proposed amendment or to the
proposal for its adoption by the simplified procedure, the amendment shall be
considered rejected. The Secretary-General shall immediately notify all
States Parties accordingly.
3. If, 12 months from the date of the circulation of the communication,
no State Party has objected to the proposed amendment or to the proposal for
its adoption by the simplified procedure, the proposed amendment shall be
considered adopted. The Secretary-General shall notify all States Parties that
the proposed amendment has been adopted.
142
Article 314
Amendments to the provisions of this Convention
relating exclusively to activities in the Area
1. A State Party may, by written communication addressed to the
Secretary-General of the Authority, propose an amendment to the provisions
of this Convention relating exclusively to activities in the Area, including
Annex VI, section 4. The Secretary-General shall circulate such
communication to all States Parties. The proposed amendment shall be
subject to approval by the Assembly following its approval by the Council.
Representatives of States Parties in those organs shall have full powers to
consider and approve the proposed amendment. The proposed amendment
as approved by the Council and the Assembly shall be considered adopted.
2. Before approving any amendment under paragraph 1, the Council
and the Assembly shall ensure that it does not prejudice the system of
exploration for and exploitation of the resources of the Area, pending the
Review Conference in accordance with article 155.
Article 315
Signature, ratification of, accession to
and authentic texts of amendments
1. Once adopted, amendments to this Convention shall be open for
signature by States Parties for 12 months from the date of adoption, at United
Nations Headquarters in New York, unless otherwise provided in the
amendment itself.
2. Articles 306, 307 and 320 apply to all amendments to this
Convention.
Article 316
Entry into force of amendments
1. Amendments to this Convention, other than those referred to in
paragraph 5, shall enter into force for the States Parties ratifying or acceding
to them on the thirtieth day following the deposit of instruments of ratification
or accession by two thirds of the States Parties or by 60 States Parties,
whichever is greater. Such amendments shall not affect the enjoyment by
other States Parties of their rights or the performance of their obligations
under this Convention.
2. An amendment may provide that a larger number of ratifications or
accessions shall be required for its entry into force than are required by this
article.
3. For each State Party ratifying or acceding to an amendment referred
to in paragraph 1 after the deposit of the required number of instruments of
ratification or accession, the amendment shall enter into force on the thirtieth
day following the deposit of its instrument of ratification or accession.
4. A State which becomes a Party to this Convention after the entry
into force of an amendment in accordance with paragraph 1 shall, failing an
expression of a different intention by that State:
(a) be considered as a Party to this Convention as so amended; and
(b) be considered as a Party to the unamended Convention in
relation to any State Party not bound by the amendment.
143
5. Any amendment relating exclusively to activities in the Area and any
amendment to Annex VI shall enter into force for all States Parties one year
following the deposit of instruments of ratification or accession by
three fourths of the States Parties.
6. A State which becomes a Party to this Convention after the entry
into force of amendments in accordance with paragraph 5 shall be considered
as a Party to this Convention as so amended.
Article 317
Denunciation
1. A State Party may, by written notification addressed to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations, denounce this Convention and may
indicate its reasons. Failure to indicate reasons shall not affect the validity of
the denunciation. The denunciation shall take effect one year after the date
of receipt of the notification, unless the notification specifies a later date.
2. A State shall not be discharged by reason of the denunciation from
the financial and contractual obligations which accrued while it was a Party
to this Convention, nor shall the denunciation affect any right, obligation or
legal situation of that State created through the execution of this Convention
prior to its termination for that State.
3. The denunciation shall not in any way affect the duty of any State
Party to fulfil any obligation embodied in this Convention to which it would
be subject under international law independently of this Convention.
Article 318
Status of Annexes
The Annexes form an integral part of this Convention and, unless
expressly provided otherwise, a reference to this Convention or to one of its
Parts includes a reference to the Annexes relating thereto.
Article 319
Depositary
1. The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall be the depositary
of this Convention and amendments thereto.
2. In addition to his functions as depositary, the Secretary-General
shall:
(a) report to all States Parties, the Authority and competent
international organizations on issues of a general nature that
have arisen with respect to this Convention;
(b) notify the Authority of ratifications and formal confirmations
of and accessions to this Convention and amendments thereto,
as well as of denunciations of this Convention;
(c) notify States Parties of agreements in accordance with
article 311, paragraph 4;
(d) circulate amendments adopted in accordance with this
Convention to States Parties for ratification or accession;
(e) convene necessary meetings of States Parties in accordance
with this Convention.
3. (a) The Secretary-General shall also transmit to the observers
referred to in article 156:
144
(i) reports referred to in paragraph 2(a);
(ii) notifications referred to in paragraph 2(b) and (c); and
(iii) texts of amendments referred to in paragraph 2(d), for
their information.
(b) The Secretary-General shall also invite those observers to
participate as observers at meetings of States Parties referred to
in paragraph 2(e).
Article 320
Authentic texts
The original of this Convention, of which the Arabic, Chinese, English,
French, Russian and Spanish texts are equally authentic, shall, subject to
article 305, paragraph 2, be deposited with the Secretary-General of the
United Nations.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Plenipotentiaries, being duly
authorized thereto, have signed this Convention.
DONE AT MONTEGO BAY, this tenth day of December, one thousand
nine hundred and eighty-two.
145
ANNEX I. HIGHLY MIGRATORY SPECIES
1. Albacore tuna: Thunnus alalunga.
2. Bluefin tuna: Thunnus thynnus.
3. Bigeye tuna: Thunnus obesus.
4. Skipjack tuna: Katsuwonus pelamis.
5. Yellowfin tuna: Thunnus albacares.
6. Blackfin tuna: Thunnus atlanticus.
7. Little tuna: Euthynnus alletteratus; Euthynnus affinis.
8. Southern bluefin tuna: Thunnus maccoyii.
9. Frigate mackerel: Auxis thazard; Auxis rochei.
10. Pomfrets: Family Bramidae.
11. Marlins: Tetrapturus angustirostris; Tetrapturus belone;
Tetrapturus pfluegeri; Tetrapturus albidus; Tetrapturus audax;
Tetrapturus georgei; Makaira mazara; Makaira indica; Makaira
nigricans.
12. Sail-fishes: Istiophorus platypterus; Istiophorus albicans.
13. Swordfish: Xiphias gladius.
14. Sauries: Scomberesox saurus; Cololabis saira; Cololabis adocetus;
Scomberesox saurus scombroides.
15. Dolphin: Coryphaena hippurus; Coryphaena equiselis.
16. Oceanic sharks: Hexanchus griseus; Cetorhinus maximus; Family
Alopiidae; Rhincodon typus; Family Carcharhinidae; Family
Sphyrnidae; Family Isurida.
17. Cetaceans: Family Physeteridae; Family Balaenopteridae; Family
Balaenidae; Family Eschrichtiidae; Family Monodontidae; Family
Ziphiidae; Family Delphinidae.
ANNEX II. COMMISSION ON THE LIMITS
OF THE CONTINENTAL SHELF
Article 1
In accordance with the provisions of article 76, a Commission on the
Limits of the Continental Shelf beyond 200 nautical miles shall be established
in conformity with the following articles.
Article 2
1. The Commission shall consist of 21 members who shall be experts
in the field of geology, geophysics or hydrography, elected by States Parties
to this Convention from among their nationals, having due regard to the need
to ensure equitable geographical representation, who shall serve in their
personal capacities.
2. The initial election shall be held as soon as possible but in any case
within 18 months after the date of entry into force of this Convention. At
least three months before the date of each election, the Secretary-General of
the United Nations shall address a letter to the States Parties, inviting the
submission of nominations, after appropriate regional consultations, within
three months. The Secretary-General shall prepare a list in alphabetical order
of all persons thus nominated and shall submit it to all the States Parties.
3. Elections of the members of the Commission shall be held at a
meeting of States Parties convened by the Secretary-General at United
146
Nations Headquarters. At that meeting, for which two thirds of the States
Parties shall constitute a quorum, the persons elected to the Commission shall
be those nominees who obtain a two-thirds majority of the votes of the
representatives of States Parties present and voting. Not less than three
members shall be elected from each geographical region.
4. The members of the Commission shall be elected for a term of five
years. They shall be eligible for re-election.
5. The State Party which submitted the nomination of a member of the
Commission shall defray the expenses of that member while in performance
of Commission duties. The coastal State concerned shall defray the expenses
incurred in respect of the advice referred to in article 3, paragraph 1(b), of
this Annex. The secretariat of the Commission shall be provided by the
Secretary-General of the United Nations.
Article 3
1. The functions of the Commission shall be:
(a) to consider the data and other material submitted by coastal
States concerning the outer limits of the continental shelf in
areas where those limits extend beyond 200 nautical miles, and
to make recommendations in accordance with article 76 and the
Statement of Understanding adopted on 29 August 1980 by the
Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea;
(b) to provide scientific and technical advice, if requested by the
coastal State concerned during the preparation of the data
referred to in subparagraph (a).
2. The Commission may cooperate, to the extent considered necessary
and useful, with the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission of
UNESCO, the International Hydrographic Organization and other competent
international organizations with a view to exchanging scientific and technical
information which might be of assistance in discharging the Commission's
responsibilities.
Article 4
Where a coastal State intends to establish, in accordance with article 76,
the outer limits of its continental shelf beyond 200 nautical miles, it shall
submit particulars of such limits to the Commission along with supporting
scientific and technical data as soon as possible but in any case within
10 years of the entry into force of this Convention for that State. The coastal
State shall at the same time give the names of any Commission members who
have provided it with scientific and technical advice.
Article 5
Unless the Commission decides otherwise, the Commission shall
function by way of sub-commissions composed of seven members, appointed
in a balanced manner taking into account the specific elements of each
submission by a coastal State. Nationals of the coastal State making the
submission who are members of the Commission and any Commission
member who has assisted a coastal State by providing scientific and technical
advice with respect to the delineation shall not be a member of the
sub-commission dealing with that submission but has the right to participate
147
as a member in the proceedings of the Commission concerning the said
submission. The coastal State which has made a submission to the
Commission may send its representatives to participate in the relevant
proceedings without the right to vote.
Article 6
1. The sub-commission shall submit its recommendations to the
Commission.
2. Approval by the Commission of the recommendations of the
sub-commission shall be by a majority of two thirds of Commission members
present and voting.
3. The recommendations of the Commission shall be submitted in
writing to the coastal State which made the submission and to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations.
Article 7
Coastal States shall establish the outer limits of the continental shelf in
conformity with the provisions of article 76, paragraph 8, and in accordance
with the appropriate national procedures.
Article 8
In the case of disagreement by the coastal State with the
recommendations of the Commission, the coastal State shall, within a
reasonable time, make a revised or new submission to the Commission.
Article 9
The actions of the Commission shall not prejudice matters relating to
delimitation of boundaries between States with opposite or adjacent coasts.
ANNEX III. BASIC CONDITIONS OF PROSPECTING,
EXPLORATION AND EXPLOITATION
Article 1
Title to minerals
Title to minerals shall pass upon recovery in accordance with this
Convention.
Article 2
Prospecting
1. (a) The Authority shall encourage prospecting in the Area.
(b) Prospecting shall be conducted only after the Authority has
received a satisfactory written undertaking that the proposed
prospector will comply with this Convention and the relevant
rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority concerning
cooperation in the training programmes referred to in
articles 143 and 144 and the protection of the marine
environment, and will accept verification by the Authority of
148
compliance therewith. The proposed prospector shall, at the
same time, notify the Authority of the approximate area or areas
in which prospecting is to be conducted.
(c) Prospecting may be conducted simultaneously by more than one
prospector in the same area or areas.
2. Prospecting shall not confer on the prospector any rights with
respect to resources. A prospector may, however, recover a reasonable
quantity of minerals to be used for testing.
Article 3
Exploration and exploitation
1. The Enterprise, States Parties, and the other entities referred to in
article 153, paragraph 2(b), may apply to the Authority for approval of plans
of work for activities in the Area.
2. The Enterprise may apply with respect to any part of the Area, but
applications by others with respect to reserved areas are subject to the
additional requirements of article 9 of this Annex.
3. Exploration and exploitation shall be carried out only in areas
specified in plans of work referred to in article 153, paragraph 3, and
approved by the Authority in accordance with this Convention and the
relevant rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority.
4. Every approved plan of work shall:
(a) be in conformity with this Convention and the rules, regulations
and procedures of the Authority;
(b) provide for control by the Authority of activities in the Area in
accordance with article 153, paragraph 4;
(c) confer on the operator, in accordance with the rules, regulations
and procedures of the Authority, the exclusive right to explore
for and exploit the specified categories of resources in the area
covered by the plan of work. If, however, the applicant
presents for approval a plan of work covering only the stage of
exploration or the stage of exploitation, the approved plan of
work shall confer such exclusive right with respect to that stage
only.
5. Upon its approval by the Authority, every plan of work, except those
presented by the Enterprise, shall be in the form of a contract concluded
between the Authority and the applicant or applicants.
Article 4
Qualifications of applicants
1. Applicants, other than the Enterprise, shall be qualified if they have
the nationality or control and sponsorship required by article 153,
paragraph 2(b), and if they follow the procedures and meet the qualification
standards set forth in the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority.
2. Except as provided in paragraph 6, such qualification standards shall
relate to the financial and technical capabilities of the applicant and his
performance under any previous contracts with the Authority.
3. Each applicant shall be sponsored by the State Party of which it is
a national unless the applicant has more than one nationality, as in the case
of a partnership or consortium of entities from several States, in which event
all States Parties involved shall sponsor the application, or unless the
149
applicant is effectively controlled by another State Party or its nationals, in
which event both States Parties shall sponsor the application. The criteria and
procedures for implementation of the sponsorship requirements shall be set
forth in the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority.
4. The sponsoring State or States shall, pursuant to article 139, have the
responsibility to ensure, within their legal systems, that a contractor so
sponsored shall carry out activities in the Area in conformity with the terms
of its contract and its obligations under this Convention. A sponsoring State
shall not, however, be liable for damage caused by any failure of a contractor
sponsored by it to comply with its obligations if that State Party has adopted
laws and regulations and taken administrative measures which are, within the
framework of its legal system, reasonably appropriate for securing
compliance by persons under its jurisdiction.
5. The procedures for assessing the qualifications of States Parties
which are applicants shall take into account their character as States.
6. The qualification standards shall require that every applicant,
without exception, shall as part of his application undertake:
(a) to accept as enforceable and comply with the applicable
obligations created by the provisions of Part XI, the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority, the decisions of
the organs of the Authority and terms of his contracts with the
Authority;
(b) to accept control by the Authority of activities in the Area, as
authorized by this Convention;
(c) to provide the Authority with a written assurance that his
obligations under the contract will be fulfilled in good faith;
(d) to comply with the provisions on the transfer of technology set
forth in article 5 of this Annex.
Article 5
Transfer of technology
1. When submitting a plan of work, every applicant shall make
available to the Authority a general description of the equipment and methods
to be used in carrying out activities in the Area, and other relevant
non-proprietary information about the characteristics of such technology and
information as to where such technology is available.
2. Every operator shall inform the Authority of revisions in the
description and information made available pursuant to paragraph 1 whenever
a substantial technological change or innovation is introduced.
3. Every contract for carrying out activities in the Area shall contain the
following undertakings by the contractor:
(a) to make available to the Enterprise on fair and reasonable
commercial terms and conditions, whenever the Authority so
requests, the technology which he uses in carrying out activities
in the Area under the contract, which the contractor is legally
entitled to transfer. This shall be done by means of licences or
other appropriate arrangements which the contractor shall
negotiate with the Enterprise and which shall be set forth in a
specific agreement supplementary to the contract. This
undertaking may be invoked only if the Enterprise finds that it
is unable to obtain the same or equally efficient and useful
150
technology on the open market on fair and reasonable
commercial terms and conditions;
(b) to obtain a written assurance from the owner of any technology
used in carrying out activities in the Area under the contract,
which is not generally available on the open market and which
is not covered by subparagraph (a), that the owner will,
whenever the Authority so requests, make that technology
available to the Enterprise under licence or other appropriate
arrangements and on fair and reasonable commercial terms and
conditions, to the same extent as made available to the
contractor. If this assurance is not obtained, the technology in
question shall not be used by the contractor in carrying out
activities in the Area;
(c) to acquire from the owner by means of an enforceable contract,
upon the request of the Enterprise and if it is possible to do so
without substantial cost to the contractor, the legal right to
transfer to the Enterprise any technology used by the contractor,
in carrying out activities in the Area under the contract, which
the contractor is otherwise not legally entitled to transfer and
which is not generally available on the open market. In cases
where there is a substantial corporate relationship between the
contractor and the owner of the technology, the closeness of
this relationship and the degree of control or influence shall be
relevant to the determination whether all feasible measures have
been taken to acquire such a right. In cases where the
contractor exercises effective control over the owner, failure to
acquire from the owner the legal right shall be considered
relevant to the contractor's qualification for any subsequent
application for approval of a plan of work;
(d) to facilitate, upon the request of the Enterprise, the acquisition
by the Enterprise of any technology covered by
subparagraph (b), under licence or other appropriate
arrangements and on fair and reasonable commercial terms and
conditions, if the Enterprise decides to negotiate directly with
the owner of the technology;
(e) to take the same measures as are prescribed in
subparagraphs (a), (b), (c) and (d) for the benefit of a
developing State or group of developing States which has
applied for a contract under article 9 of this Annex, provided
that these measures shall be limited to the exploitation of the
part of the area proposed by the contractor which has been
reserved pursuant to article 8 of this Annex and provided that
activities under the contract sought by the developing State or
group of developing States would not involve transfer of
technology to a third State or the nationals of a third State. The
obligation under this provision shall only apply with respect to
any given contractor where technology has not been requested
by the Enterprise or transferred by that contractor to the
Enterprise.
4. Disputes concerning undertakings required by paragraph 3, like other
provisions of the contracts, shall be subject to compulsory settlement in
accordance with Part XI and, in cases of violation of these undertakings,
suspension or termination of the contract or monetary penalties may be
151
ordered in accordance with article 18 of this Annex. Disputes as to whether
offers made by the contractor are within the range of fair and reasonable
commercial terms and conditions may be submitted by either party to binding
commercial arbitration in accordance with the UNCITRAL Arbitration Rules
or such other arbitration rules as may be prescribed in the rules, regulations
and procedures of the Authority. If the finding is that the offer made by the
contractor is not within the range of fair and reasonable commercial terms and
conditions, the contractor shall be given 45 days to revise his offer to bring
it within that range before the Authority takes any action in accordance with
article 18 of this Annex.
5. If the Enterprise is unable to obtain on fair and reasonable
commercial terms and conditions appropriate technology to enable it to
commence in a timely manner the recovery and processing of minerals from
the Area, either the Council or the Assembly may convene a group of States
Parties composed of those which are engaged in activities in the Area, those
which have sponsored entities which are engaged in activities in the Area and
other States Parties having access to such technology. This group shall
consult together and shall take effective measures to ensure that such
technology is made available to the Enterprise on fair and reasonable
commercial terms and conditions. Each such State Party shall take all
feasible measures to this end within its own legal system.
6. In the case of joint ventures with the Enterprise, transfer of
technology will be in accordance with the terms of the joint venture
agreement.
7. The undertakings required by paragraph 3 shall be included in each
contract for the carrying out of activities in the Area until 10 years after the
commencement of commercial production by the Enterprise, and may be
invoked during that period.
8. For the purposes of this article, "technology" means the specialized
equipment and technical know-how, including manuals, designs, operating
instructions, training and technical advice and assistance, necessary to
assemble, maintain and operate a viable system and the legal right to use these
items for that purpose on a non-exclusive basis.
Article 6
Approval of plans of work
1. Six months after the entry into force of this Convention, and
thereafter each fourth month, the Authority shall take up for consideration
proposed plans of work.
2. When considering an application for approval of a plan of work in
the form of a contract, the Authority shall first ascertain whether:
(a) the applicant has complied with the procedures established for
applications in accordance with article 4 of this Annex and has
given the Authority the undertakings and assurances required
by that article. In cases of non-compliance with these
procedures or in the absence of any of these undertakings and
assurances, the applicant shall be given 45 days to remedy these
defects;
(b) the applicant possesses the requisite qualifications provided for
in article 4 of this Annex.
3. All proposed plans of work shall be taken up in the order in which
they are received. The proposed plans of work shall comply with and be
152
governed by the relevant provisions of this Convention and the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority, including those on operational
requirements, financial contributions and the undertakings concerning the
transfer of technology. If the proposed plans of work conform to these
requirements, the Authority shall approve them provided that they are in
accordance with the uniform and non-discriminatory requirements set forth
in the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority, unless:
(a) part or all of the area covered by the proposed plan of work is
included in an approved plan of work or a previously submitted
proposed plan of work which has not yet been finally acted on
by the Authority;
(b) part or all of the area covered by the proposed plan of work is
disapproved by the Authority pursuant to article 162,
paragraph 2(x); or
(c) the proposed plan of work has been submitted or sponsored by
a State Party which already holds:
(i) plans of work for exploration and exploitation of
polymetallic nodules in non-reserved areas that, together
with either part of the area covered by the application for
a plan of work, exceed in size 30 per cent of a circular
area of 400,000 square kilometres surrounding the centre
of either part of the area covered by the proposed plan of
work;
(ii) plans of work for the exploration and exploitation of
polymetallic nodules in non-reserved areas which, taken
together, constitute 2 per cent of the total seabed area
which is not reserved or disapproved for exploitation
pursuant to article 162, paragraph (2)(x).
4. For the purpose of the standard set forth in paragraph 3(c), a plan of
work submitted by a partnership or consortium shall be counted on a pro rata
basis among the sponsoring States Parties involved in accordance with
article 4, paragraph 3, of this Annex. The Authority may approve plans of
work covered by paragraph 3(c) if it determines that such approval would not
permit a State Party or entities sponsored by it to monopolize the conduct of
activities in the Area or to preclude other States Parties from activities in the
Area.
5. Notwithstanding paragraph 3(a), after the end of the interim period
specified in article 151, paragraph 3, the Authority may adopt by means of
rules, regulations and procedures other procedures and criteria consistent with
this Convention for deciding which applicants shall have plans of work
approved in cases of selection among applicants for a proposed area. These
procedures and criteria shall ensure approval of plans of work on an equitable
and non-discriminatory basis.
Article 7
Selection among applicants for production authorizations
1. Six months after the entry into force of this Convention, and
thereafter each fourth month, the Authority shall take up for consideration
applications for production authorizations submitted during the immediately
preceding period. The Authority shall issue the authorizations applied for if
all such applications can be approved without exceeding the production
limitation or contravening the obligations of the Authority under a commodity
153
agreement or arrangement to which it has become a party, as provided in
article 151.
2. When a selection must be made among applicants for production
authorizations because of the production limitation set forth in article 151,
paragraphs 2 to 7, or because of the obligations of the Authority under a
commodity agreement or arrangement to which it has become a party, as
provided for in article 151, paragraph 1, the Authority shall make the
selection on the basis of objective and non-discriminatory standards set forth
in its rules, regulations and procedures.
3. In the application of paragraph 2, the Authority shall give priority to
those applicants which:
(a) give better assurance of performance, taking into account their
financial and technical qualifications and their performance, if
any, under previously approved plans of work;
(b) provide earlier prospective financial benefits to the Authority,
taking into account when commercial production is scheduled
to begin;
(c) have already invested the most resources and effort in
prospecting or exploration.
4. Applicants which are not selected in any period shall have priority
in subsequent periods until they receive a production authorization.
5. Selection shall be made taking into account the need to enhance
opportunities for all States Parties, irrespective of their social and economic
systems or geographical locations so as to avoid discrimination against any
State or system, to participate in activities in the Area and to prevent
monopolization of those activities.
6. Whenever fewer reserved areas than non-reserved areas are under
exploitation, applications for production authorizations with respect to
reserved areas shall have priority.
7. The decisions referred to in this article shall be taken as soon as
possible after the close of each period.
Article 8
Reservation of areas
Each application, other than those submitted by the Enterprise or by any
other entities for reserved areas, shall cover a total area, which need not be a
single continuous area, sufficiently large and of sufficient estimated
commercial value to allow two mining operations. The applicant shall
indicate the coordinates dividing the area into two parts of equal estimated
commercial value and submit all the data obtained by him with respect to both
parts. Without prejudice to the powers of the Authority pursuant to article 17
of this Annex, the data to be submitted concerning polymetallic nodules shall
relate to mapping, sampling, the abundance of nodules, and their metal
content. Within 45 days of receiving such data, the Authority shall designate
which part is to be reserved solely for the conduct of activities by the
Authority through the Enterprise or in association with developing States.
This designation may be deferred for a further period of 45 days if the
Authority requests an independent expert to assess whether all data required
by this article has been submitted. The area designated shall become a
reserved area as soon as the plan of work for the non-reserved area is
approved and the contract is signed.
154
Article 9
Activities in reserved areas
1. The Enterprise shall be given an opportunity to decide whether it
intends to carry out activities in each reserved area. This decision may be
taken at any time, unless a notification pursuant to paragraph 4 is received by
the Authority, in which event the Enterprise shall take its decision within a
reasonable time. The Enterprise may decide to exploit such areas in joint
ventures with the interested State or entity.
2. The Enterprise may conclude contracts for the execution of part of
its activities in accordance with Annex IV, article 12. It may also enter into
joint ventures for the conduct of such activities with any entities which are
eligible to carry out activities in the Area pursuant to article 153,
paragraph 2(b). When considering such joint ventures, the Enterprise shall
offer to States Parties which are developing States and their nationals the
opportunity of effective participation.
3. The Authority may prescribe, in its rules, regulations and
procedures, substantive and procedural requirements and conditions with
respect to such contracts and joint ventures.
4. Any State Party which is a developing State or any natural or
juridical person sponsored by it and effectively controlled by it or by other
developing State which is a qualified applicant, or any group of the foregoing,
may notify the Authority that it wishes to submit a plan of work pursuant to
article 6 of this Annex with respect to a reserved area. The plan of work shall
be considered if the Enterprise decides, pursuant to paragraph 1, that it does
not intend to carry out activities in that area.
Article 10
Preference and priority among applicants
An operator who has an approved plan of work for exploration only, as
provided in article 3, paragraph 4(c), of this Annex shall have a preference
and a priority among applicants for a plan of work covering exploitation of
the same area and resources. However, such preference or priority may be
withdrawn if the operator's performance has not been satisfactory.
Article 11
Joint arrangements
1. Contracts may provide for joint arrangements between the contractor
and the Authority through the Enterprise, in the form of joint ventures or
production sharing, as well as any other form of joint arrangement, which
shall have the same protection against revision, suspension or termination as
contracts with the Authority.
2. Contractors entering into such joint arrangements with the Enterprise
may receive financial incentives as provided for in article 13 of this Annex.
3. Partners in joint ventures with the Enterprise shall be liable for the
payments required by article 13 of this Annex to the extent of their share in
the joint ventures, subject to financial incentives as provided for in that
article.
155
Article 12
Activities carried out by the Enterprise
1. Activities in the Area carried out by the Enterprise pursuant to
article 153, paragraph 2(a), shall be governed by Part XI, the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority and its relevant decisions.
2. Any plan of work submitted by the Enterprise shall be accompanied
by evidence supporting its financial and technical capabilities.
Article 13
Financial terms of contracts
1. In adopting rules, regulations and procedures concerning the
financial terms of a contract between the Authority and the entities referred
to in article 153, paragraph 2(b), and in negotiating those financial terms in
accordance with Part XI and those rules, regulations and procedures, the
Authority shall be guided by the following objectives:
(a) to ensure optimum revenues for the Authority from the
proceeds of commercial production;
(b) to attract investments and technology to the exploration and
exploitation of the Area;
(c) to ensure equality of financial treatment and comparable
financial obligations for contractors;
(d) to provide incentives on a uniform and non-discriminatory basis
for contractors to undertake joint arrangements with the
Enterprise and developing States or their nationals, to stimulate
the transfer of technology thereto, and to train the personnel of
the Authority and of developing States;
(e) to enable the Enterprise to engage in seabed mining effectively
at the same time as the entities referred to in article 153,
paragraph 2(b); and
(f) to ensure that, as a result of the financial incentives provided to
contractors under paragraph 14, under the terms of contracts
reviewed in accordance with article 19 of this Annex or under
the provisions of article 11 of this Annex with respect to joint
ventures, contractors are not subsidized so as to be given an
artificial competitive advantage with respect to land-based
miners.
2. A fee shall be levied for the administrative cost of processing an
application for approval of a plan of work in the form of a contract and shall
be fixed at an amount of $US 500,000 per application. The amount of the fee
shall be reviewed from time to time by the Council in order to ensure that it
covers the administrative cost incurred. If such administrative cost incurred
by the Authority in processing an application is less than the fixed amount,
the Authority shall refund the difference to the applicant.
3. A contractor shall pay an annual fixed fee of $US 1 million from the
date of entry into force of the contract. If the approved date of
commencement of commercial production is postponed because of a delay in
issuing the production authorization, in accordance with article 151, the
annual fixed fee shall be waived for the period of postponement. From the
date of commencement of commercial production, the contractor shall pay
either the production charge or the annual fixed fee, whichever is greater.
156
4. Within a year of the date of commencement of commercial
production, in conformity with paragraph 3, a contractor shall choose to make
his financial contribution to the Authority by either:
(a) paying a production charge only; or
(b) paying a combination of a production charge and a share of net
proceeds.
5. (a) If a contractor chooses to make his financial contribution to the
Authority by paying a production charge only, it shall be fixed
at a percentage of the market value of the processed metals
produced from the polymetallic nodules recovered from the area
covered by the contract. This percentage shall be fixed as
follows:
(i) years 1-10 of commercial production 5 per cent
(ii) years 11 to the end of commercial production 12 per cent
(b) The said market value shall be the product of the quantity of the
processed metals produced from the polymetallic nodules
extracted from the area covered by the contract and the average
price for those metals during the relevant accounting year, as
defined in paragraphs 7 and 8.
6. If a contractor chooses to make his financial contribution to the
Authority by paying a combination of a production charge and a share of net
proceeds, such payments shall be determined as follows:
(a) The production charge shall be fixed at a percentage of the
market value, determined in accordance with subpara-graph (b),
of the processed metals produced from the polymetallic nodules
recovered from the area covered by the contract. This
percentage shall be fixed as follows:
(i) first period of commercial production 2 per cent
(ii) second period of commercial production 4 per cent
If, in the second period of commercial production, as defined in
subparagraph (d), the return on investment in any accounting
year as defined in subparagraph (m) falls below 15 per cent as
a result of the payment of the production charge at 4 per cent,
the production charge shall be 2 per cent instead of 4 per cent
in that accounting year.
(b) The said market value shall be the product of the quantity of the
processed metals produced from the polymetallic nodules
recovered from the area covered by the contract and the average
price for those metals during the relevant accounting year as
defined in paragraphs 7 and 8.
(c) (i) The Authority's share of net proceeds shall be taken out
of that portion of the contractor's net proceeds which is
attributable to the mining of the resources of the area
covered by the contract, referred to hereinafter as
attributable net proceeds.
(ii) The Authority's share of attributable net proceeds shall be
determined in accordance with the following incremental
schedule:
157
Portion of attributable
net proceeds
Share of the Authority
That portion representing a
return on investment which
is greater than 0 per cent,
but less than 10 per cent
That portion representing a
return on investment which
is 10 per cent or greater, but
less than 20 per cent
That portion representing a
return on investment which
is 20 per cent or greater
First period of
commercial
production
35 per cent
42.5 per cent
50 per cent
Second period of
commercial
production
40 per cent
50 per cent
70 per cent
(d) (i) The first period of commercial production referred to in
subparagraphs (a) and (c) shall commence in the first
accounting year of commercial production and terminate
in the accounting year in which the contractor's
development costs with interest on the unrecovered
portion thereof are fully recovered by his cash surplus, as
follows:
In the first accounting year during which development
costs are incurred, unrecovered development costs shall
equal the development costs less cash surplus in that year.
In each subsequent accounting year, unrecovered
development costs shall equal the unrecovered
development costs at the end of the preceding accounting
year, plus interest thereon at the rate of 10 per cent per
annum, plus development costs incurred in the current
accounting year and less contractor's cash surplus in the
current accounting year. The accounting year in which
unrecovered development costs become zero for the first
time shall be the accounting year in which the contractor's
development costs with interest on the unrecovered
portion thereof are fully recovered by his cash surplus.
The contractor's cash surplus in any accounting year shall
be his gross proceeds less his operating costs and less his
payments to the Authority under subparagraph (c).
(ii) The second period of commercial production shall
commence in the accounting year following the
termination of the first period of commercial production
and shall continue until the end of the contract.
(e) "Attributable net proceeds" means the product of the
contractor's net proceeds and the ratio of the development costs
in the mining sector to the contractor's development costs. If
the contractor engages in mining, transporting polymetallic
nodules and production primarily of three processed metals,
158
namely, cobalt, copper and nickel, the amount of attributable
net proceeds shall not be less than 25 per cent of the
contractor's net proceeds. Subject to subparagraph (n), in all
other cases, including those where the contractor engages in
mining, transporting polymetallic nodules, and production
primarily of four processed metals, namely, cobalt, copper,
manganese and nickel, the Authority may, in its rules,
regulations and procedures, prescribe appropriate floors which
shall bear the same relationship to each case as the 25 per cent
floor does to the three-metal case.
(f) "Contractor's net proceeds" means the contractor's gross
proceeds less his operating costs and less the recovery of his
development costs as set out in subparagraph (j).
(g) (i) If the contractor engages in mining, transporting
polymetallic nodules and production of processed metals,
"contractor's gross proceeds" means the gross revenues
from the sale of the processed metals and any other
monies deemed reasonably attributable to operations
under the contract in accordance with the financial rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority.
(ii) In all cases other than those specified in
subparagraphs (g)(i) and (n)(iii), "contractor's gross
proceeds" means the gross revenues from the sale of the
semi-processed metals from the polymetallic nodules
recovered from the area covered by the contract, and any
other monies deemed reasonably attributable to operations
under the contract in accordance with the financial rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority.
(h) "Contractor's development costs" means:
(i) all expenditures incurred prior to the commencement of
commercial production which are directly related to the
development of the productive capacity of the area
covered by the contract and the activities related thereto
for operations under the contract in all cases other than
that specified in subparagraph (n), in conformity with
generally recognized accounting principles, including,
inter alia, costs of machinery, equipment, ships,
processing plant, construction, buildings, land, roads,
prospecting and exploration of the area covered by the
contract, research and development, interest, required
leases, licences and fees; and
(ii) expenditures similar to those set forth in (i) above
incurred subsequent to the commencement of commercial
production and necessary to carry out the plan of work,
except those chargeable to operating costs.
(i) The proceeds from the disposal of capital assets and the market
value of those capital assets which are no longer required for
operations under the contract and which are not sold shall be
deducted from the contractor's development costs during the
relevant accounting year. When these deductions exceed the
contractor's development costs the excess shall be added to the
contractor's gross proceeds.
159
(j) The contractor's development costs incurred prior to the
commencement of commercial production referred to in
subparagraphs (h)(i) and (n)(iv) shall be recovered in 10 equal
annual instalments from the date of commencement of
commercial production. The contractor's development costs
incurred subsequent to the commencement of commercial
production referred to in subparagraphs (h)(ii) and (n)(iv) shall
be recovered in 10 or fewer equal annual instalments so as to
ensure their complete recovery by the end of the contract.
(k) "Contractor's operating costs" means all expenditures incurred
after the commencement of commercial production in the
operation of the productive capacity of the area covered by the
contract and the activities related thereto for operations under
the contract, in conformity with generally recognized
accounting principles, including, inter alia, the annual fixed fee
or the production charge, whichever is greater, expenditures for
wages, salaries, employee benefits, materials, services,
transporting, processing and marketing costs, interest, utilities,
preservation of the marine environment, overhead and
administrative costs specifically related to operations under the
contract, and any net operating losses carried forward or
backward as specified herein. Net operating losses may be
carried forward for two consecutive years except in the last two
years of the contract in which case they may be carried
backward to the two preceding years.
(l) If the contractor engages in mining, transporting of polymetallic
nodules, and production of processed and semi-processed
metals, "development costs of the mining sector" means the
portion of the contractor's development costs which is directly
related to the mining of the resources of the area covered by the
contract, in conformity with generally recognized accounting
principles, and the financial rules, regulations and procedures
of the Authority, including, inter alia, application fee, annual
fixed fee and, where applicable, costs of prospecting and
exploration of the area covered by the contract, and a portion of
research and development costs.
(m) "Return on investment" in any accounting year means the ratio
of attributable net proceeds in that year to the development
costs of the mining sector. For the purpose of computing this
ratio the development costs of the mining sector shall include
expenditures on new or replacement equipment in the mining
sector less the original cost of the equipment replaced.
(n) If the contractor engages in mining only:
(i) "attributable net proceeds" means the whole of the
contractor's net proceeds;
(ii) "contractor's net proceeds" shall be as defined in
subparagraph (f);
(iii) "contractor's gross proceeds" means the gross revenues
from the sale of the polymetallic nodules, and any other
monies deemed reasonably attributable to operations
under the contract in accordance with the financial rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority;
160
(iv) "contractor's development costs" means all expenditures
incurred prior to the commencement of commercial
production as set forth in subparagraph (h)(i), and all
expenditures incurred subsequent to the commencement
of commercial production as set forth in
subparagraph (h)(ii), which are directly related to the
mining of the resources of the area covered by the
contract, in conformity with generally recognized
accounting principles;
(v) "contractor's operating costs" means the contractor's
operating costs as in subparagraph (k) which are directly
related to the mining of the resources of the area covered
by the contract in conformity with generally recognized
accounting principles;
(vi) "return on investment" in any accounting year means the
ratio of the contractor's net proceeds in that year to the
contractor's development costs. For the purpose of
computing this ratio, the contractor's development costs
shall include expenditures on new or replacement
equipment less the original cost of the equipment
replaced.
(o) The costs referred to in subparagraphs (h), (k), (l) and (n) in
respect of interest paid by the contractor shall be allowed to the
extent that, in all the circumstances, the Authority approves,
pursuant to article 4, paragraph 1, of this Annex, the debt-equity
ratio and the rates of interest as reasonable, having regard to
existing commercial practice.
(p) The costs referred to in this paragraph shall not be interpreted
as including payments of corporate income taxes or similar
charges levied by States in respect of the operations of the
contractor.
7. (a) "Processed metals", referred to in paragraphs 5 and 6, means
the metals in the most basic form in which they are customarily
traded on international terminal markets. For this purpose, the
Authority shall specify, in its financial rules, regulations and
procedures, the relevant international terminal market. For the
metals which are not traded on such markets, "processed
metals" means the metals in the most basic form in which they
are customarily traded in representative arm's length
transactions.
(b) If the Authority cannot otherwise determine the quantity of the
processed metals produced from the polymetallic nodules
recovered from the area covered by the contract referred to in
paragraphs 5(b) and 6(b), the quantity shall be determined on
the basis of the metal content of the nodules, processing
recovery efficiency and other relevant factors, in accordance
with the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority and
in conformity with generally recognized accounting principles.
8. If an international terminal market provides a representative pricing
mechanism for processed metals, polymetallic nodules and semi-processed
metals from the nodules, the average price on that market shall be used. In
all other cases, the Authority shall, after consulting the contractor, determine
a fair price for the said products in accordance with paragraph 9.
161
9. (a) All costs, expenditures, proceeds and revenues and all
determinations of price and value referred to in this article shall
be the result of free market or arm's length transactions. In the
absence thereof, they shall be determined by the Authority, after
consulting the contractor, as though they were the result of free
market or arm's length transactions, taking into account relevant
transactions in other markets.
(b) In order to ensure compliance with and enforcement of the
provisions of this paragraph, the Authority shall be guided by
the principles adopted for, and the interpretation given to, arm's
length transactions by the Commission on Transnational
Corporations of the United Nations, the Group of Experts on
Tax Treaties between Developing and Developed Countries and
other international organizations, and shall, in its rules,
regulations and procedures, specify uniform and internationally
acceptable accounting rules and procedures, and the means of
selection by the contractor of certified independent accountants
acceptable to the Authority for the purpose of carrying out
auditing in compliance with those rules, regulations and
procedures.
10. The contractor shall make available to the accountants, in accordance
with the financial rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority, such
financial data as are required to determine compliance with this article.
11. All costs, expenditures, proceeds and revenues, and all prices and
values referred to in this article, shall be determined in accordance with
generally recognized accounting principles and the financial rules, regulations
and procedures of the Authority.
12. Payments to the Authority under paragraphs 5 and 6 shall be made
in freely usable currencies or currencies which are freely available and
effectively usable on the major foreign exchange markets or, at the
contractor's option, in the equivalents of processed metals at market value.
The market value shall be determined in accordance with paragraph 5(b). The
freely usable currencies and currencies which are freely available and
effectively usable on the major foreign exchange markets shall be defined in
the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority in accordance with
prevailing international monetary practice.
13. All financial obligations of the contractor to the Authority, as well
as all his fees, costs, expenditures, proceeds and revenues referred to in this
article, shall be adjusted by expressing them in constant terms relative to a
base year.
14. The Authority may, taking into account any recommendations of the
Economic Planning Commission and the Legal and Technical Commission,
adopt rules, regulations and procedures that provide for incentives, on a
uniform and non-discriminatory basis, to contractors to further the objectives
set out in paragraph 1.
15. In the event of a dispute between the Authority and a contractor over
the interpretation or application of the financial terms of a contract, either
party may submit the dispute to binding commercial arbitration, unless both
parties agree to settle the dispute by other means, in accordance with
article 188, paragraph 2.
162
Article 14
Transfer of data
1. The operator shall transfer to the Authority, in accordance with its
rules, regulations and procedures and the terms and conditions of the plan of
work, at time intervals determined by the Authority all data which are both
necessary for and relevant to the effective exercise of the powers and
functions of the principal organs of the Authority in respect of the area
covered by the plan of work.
2. Transferred data in respect of the area covered by the plan of work,
deemed proprietary, may only be used for the purposes set forth in this article.
Data necessary for the formulation by the Authority of rules, regulations and
procedures concerning protection of the marine environment and safety, other
than equipment design data, shall not be deemed proprietary.
3. Data transferred to the Authority by prospectors, applicants for
contracts or contractors, deemed proprietary, shall not be disclosed by the
Authority to the Enterprise or to anyone external to the Authority, but data on
the reserved areas may be disclosed to the Enterprise. Such data transferred
by such persons to the Enterprise shall not be disclosed by the Enterprise to
the Authority or to anyone external to the Authority.
Article 15
Training programmes
The contractor shall draw up practical programmes for the training of
personnel of the Authority and developing States, including the participation
of such personnel in all activities in the Area which are covered by the
contract, in accordance with article 144, paragraph 2.
Article 16
Exclusive right to explore and exploit
The Authority shall, pursuant to Part XI and its rules, regulations and
procedures, accord the operator the exclusive right to explore and exploit the
area covered by the plan of work in respect of a specified category of
resources and shall ensure that no other entity operates in the same area for
a different category of resources in a manner which might interfere with the
operations of the operator. The operator shall have security of tenure in
accordance with article 153, paragraph 6.
Article 17
Rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority
1. The Authority shall adopt and uniformly apply rules, regulations and
procedures in accordance with article 160, paragraph 2(f)(ii), and article 162,
paragraph 2(o)(ii), for the exercise of its functions as set forth in Part XI on,
inter alia, the following matters:
(a) administrative procedures relating to prospecting, exploration
and exploitation in the Area;
(b) operations:
(i) size of area;
(ii) duration of operations;
163
(iii) performance requirements including assurances pursuant
to article 4, paragraph 6(c), of this Annex;
(iv) categories of resources;
(v) renunciation of areas;
(vi) progress reports;
(vii) submission of data;
(viii) inspection and supervision of operations;
(ix) prevention of interference with other activities in the
marine environment;
(x) transfer of rights and obligations by a contractor;
(xi) procedures for transfer of technology to developing States
in accordance with article 144 and for their direct
participation;
(xii) mining standards and practices, including those relating
to operational safety, conservation of the resources and
the protection of the marine environment;
(xiii) definition of commercial production;
(xiv) qualification standards for applicants;
(c) financial matters:
(i) establishment of uniform and non-discriminatory costing
and accounting rules and the method of selection of
auditors;
(ii) apportionment of proceeds of operations;
(iii) the incentives referred to in article 13 of this Annex;
(d) implementation of decisions taken pursuant to article 151,
paragraph 10, and article 164, paragraph 2(d).
2. Rules, regulations and procedures on the following items shall fully
reflect the objective criteria set out below:
(a) Size of areas:
The Authority shall determine the appropriate size of
areas for exploration which may be up to twice as large as those
for exploitation in order to permit intensive exploration
operations. The size of area shall be calculated to satisfy the
requirements of article 8 of this Annex on reservation of areas
as well as stated production requirements consistent with
article 151 in accordance with the terms of the contract taking
into account the state of the art of technology then available for
seabed mining and the relevant physical characteristics of the
areas. Areas shall be neither smaller nor larger than are
necessary to satisfy this objective.
(b) Duration of operations:
(i) Prospecting shall be without time-limit;
(ii) Exploration should be of sufficient duration to permit a
thorough survey of the specific area, the design and
construction of mining equipment for the area and the
design and construction of small and medium-size
processing plants for the purpose of testing mining and
processing systems;
(iii) The duration of exploitation should be related to the
economic life of the mining project, taking into
consideration such factors as the depletion of the ore, the
useful life of mining equipment and processing facilities
and commercial viability. Exploitation should be of
164
sufficient duration to permit commercial extraction of
minerals of the area and should include a reasonable time
period for construction of commercial-scale mining and
processing systems, during which period commercial
production should not be required. The total duration of
exploitation, however, should also be short enough to give
the Authority an opportunity to amend the terms and
conditions of the plan of work at the time it considers
renewal in accordance with rules, regulations and
procedures which it has adopted subsequent to approving
the plan of work.
(c) Performance requirements:
The Authority shall require that during the exploration
stage periodic expenditures be made by the operator which are
reasonably related to the size of the area covered by the plan of
work and the expenditures which would be expected of a
bona fide operator who intended to bring the area into
commercial production within the time-limits established by the
Authority. The required expenditures should not be established
at a level which would discourage prospective operators with
less costly technology than is prevalently in use. The Authority
shall establish a maximum time interval, after the exploration
stage is completed and the exploitation stage begins, to achieve
commercial production. To determine this interval, the
Authority should take into consideration that construction of
large-scale mining and processing systems cannot be initiated
until after the termination of the exploration stage and the
commencement of the exploitation stage. Accordingly, the
interval to bring an area into commercial production should take
into account the time necessary for this construction after the
completion of the exploration stage and reasonable allowance
should be made for unavoidable delays in the construction
schedule. Once commercial production is achieved, the
Authority shall within reasonable limits and taking into
consideration all relevant factors require the operator to
maintain commercial production throughout the period of the
plan of work.
(d) Categories of resources:
In determining the category of resources in respect of
which a plan of work may be approved, the Authority shall give
emphasis inter alia to the following characteristics:
(i) that certain resources require the use of similar mining
methods; and
(ii) that some resources can be developed simultaneously
without undue interference between operators developing
different resources in the same area.
Nothing in this subparagraph shall preclude the Authority from
approving a plan of work with respect to more than one
category of resources in the same area to the same applicant.
(e) Renunciation of areas:
The operator shall have the right at any time to renounce
without penalty the whole or part of his rights in the area
covered by a plan of work.
165
(f) Protection of the marine environment:
Rules, regulations and procedures shall be drawn up in
order to secure effective protection of the marine environment
from harmful effects directly resulting from activities in the
Area or from shipboard processing immediately above a mine
site of minerals derived from that mine site, taking into account
the extent to which such harmful effects may directly result
from drilling, dredging, coring and excavation and from
disposal, dumping and discharge into the marine environment
of sediment, wastes or other effluents.
(g) Commercial production:
Commercial production shall be deemed to have begun if
an operator engages in sustained large-scale recovery operations
which yield a quantity of materials sufficient to indicate clearly
that the principal purpose is large-scale production rather than
production intended for information gathering, analysis or the
testing of equipment or plant.
Article 18
Penalties
1. A contractor's rights under the contract may be suspended or
terminated only in the following cases:
(a) if, in spite of warnings by the Authority, the contractor has
conducted his activities in such a way as to result in serious,
persistent and wilful violations of the fundamental terms of the
contract, Part XI and the rules, regulations and procedures of
the Authority; or
(b) if the contractor has failed to comply with a final binding
decision of the dispute settlement body applicable to him.
2. In the case of any violation of the contract not covered by
paragraph 1(a), or in lieu of suspension or termination under paragraph 1(a),
the Authority may impose upon the contractor monetary penalties
proportionate to the seriousness of the violation.
3. Except for emergency orders under article 162, paragraph 2(w), the
Authority may not execute a decision involving monetary penalties,
suspension or termination until the contractor has been accorded a reasonable
opportunity to exhaust the judicial remedies available to him pursuant to
Part XI, section 5.
Article 19
Revision of contract
1. When circumstances have arisen or are likely to arise which, in the
opinion of either party, would render the contract inequitable or make it
impracticable or impossible to achieve the objectives set out in the contract
or in Part XI, the parties shall enter into negotiations to revise it accordingly.
2. Any contract entered into in accordance with article 153,
paragraph 3, may be revised only with the consent of the parties.
166
Article 20
Transfer of rights and obligations
The rights and obligations arising under a contract may be transferred
only with the consent of the Authority, and in accordance with its rules,
regulations and procedures. The Authority shall not unreasonably withhold
consent to the transfer if the proposed transferee is in all respects a qualified
applicant and assumes all of the obligations of the transferor and if the
transfer does not confer to the transferee a plan of work, the approval of
which would be forbidden by article 6, paragraph 3(c), of this Annex.
Article 21
Applicable law
1. The contract shall be governed by the terms of the contract, the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority, Part XI and other rules of
international law not incompatible with this Convention.
2. Any final decision rendered by a court or tribunal having jurisdiction
under this Convention relating to the rights and obligations of the Authority
and of the contractor shall be enforceable in the territory of each State Party.
3. No State Party may impose conditions on a contractor that are
inconsistent with Part XI. However, the application by a State Party to
contractors sponsored by it, or to ships flying its flag, of environmental or
other laws and regulations more stringent than those in the rules, regulations
and procedures of the Authority adopted pursuant to article 17,
paragraph 2(f), of this Annex shall not be deemed inconsistent with Part XI.
Article 22
Responsibility
The contractor shall have responsibility or liability for any damage
arising out of wrongful acts in the conduct of its operations, account being
taken of contributory acts or omissions by the Authority. Similarly, the
Authority shall have responsibility or liability for any damage arising out of
wrongful acts in the exercise of its powers and functions, including violations
under article 168, paragraph 2, account being taken of contributory acts or
omissions by the contractor. Liability in every case shall be for the actual
amount of damage.
ANNEX IV. STATUTE OF THE ENTERPRISE
Article 1
Purposes
1. The Enterprise is the organ of the Authority which shall carry out
activities in the Area directly, pursuant to article 153, paragraph 2 (a), as well
as the transporting, processing and marketing of minerals recovered from the
Area.
2. In carrying out its purposes and in the exercise of its functions, the
Enterprise shall act in accordance with this Convention and the rules,
regulations and procedures of the Authority.
167
3. In developing the resources of the Area pursuant to paragraph 1, the
Enterprise shall, subject to this Convention, operate in accordance with sound
commercial principles.
Article 2
Relationship to the Authority
1. Pursuant to article 170, the Enterprise shall act in accordance with
the general policies of the Assembly and the directives of the Council.
2. Subject to paragraph l, the Enterprise shall enjoy autonomy in the
conduct of its operations.
3. Nothing in this Convention shall make the Enterprise liable for the
acts or obligations of the Authority, or make the Authority liable for the acts
or obligations of the Enterprise.
Article 3
Limitation of liability
Without prejudice to article 11, paragraph 3, of this Annex, no member
of the Authority shall be liable by reason only of its membership for the acts
or obligations of the Enterprise.
Article 4
Structure
The Enterprise shall have a Governing Board, a Director-General and the
staff necessary for the exercise of its functions.
Article 5
Governing Board
1. The Governing Board shall be composed of 15 members elected by
the Assembly in accordance with article 160, paragraph 2(c). In the election
of the members of the Board, due regard shall be paid to the principle of
equitable geographical distribution. In submitting nominations of candidates
for election to the Board, members of the Authority shall bear in mind the
need to nominate candidates of the highest standard of competence, with
qualifications in relevant fields, so as to ensure the viability and success of
the Enterprise.
2. Members of the Board shall be elected for four years and may be
re-elected; and due regard shall be paid to the principle of rotation of
membership.
3. Members of the Board shall continue in office until their successors
are elected. If the office of a member of the Board becomes vacant, the
Assembly shall, in accordance with article 160, paragraph 2(c), elect a new
member for the remainder of his predecessor's term.
4. Members of the Board shall act in their personal capacity. In the
performance of their duties they shall not seek or receive instructions from
any government or from any other source. Each member of the Authority
shall respect the independent character of the members of the Board and shall
refrain from all attempts to influence any of them in the discharge of their
duties.
168
5. Each member of the Board shall receive remuneration to be paid out
of the funds of the Enterprise. The amount of remuneration shall be fixed by
the Assembly, upon the recommendation of the Council.
6. The Board shall normally function at the principal office of the
Enterprise and shall meet as often as the business of the Enterprise may
require.
7. Two thirds of the members of the Board shall constitute a quorum.
8. Each member of the Board shall have one vote. All matters before
the Board shall be decided by a majority of its members. If a member has a
conflict of interest on a matter before the Board he shall refrain from voting
on that matter.
9. Any member of the Authority may ask the Board for information in
respect of its operations which particularly affect that member. The Board
shall endeavour to provide such information.
Article 6
Powers and functions of the Governing Board
The Governing Board shall direct the operations of the Enterprise.
Subject to this Convention, the Governing Board shall exercise the powers
necessary to fulfil the purposes of the Enterprise, including powers:
(a) to elect a Chairman from among its members;
(b) to adopt its rules of procedure;
(c) to draw up and submit formal written plans of work to the Council
in accordance with article 153, paragraph 3, and article 162,
paragraph 2(j);
(d) to develop plans of work and programmes for carrying out the
activities specified in article 170;
(e) to prepare and submit to the Council applications for production
authorizations in accordance with article 151, paragraphs 2 to 7;
(f) to authorize negotiations concerning the acquisition of technology,
including those provided for in Annex III, article 5,
paragraph 3(a), (c) and (d), and to approve the results of those
negotiations;
(g) to establish terms and conditions, and to authorize negotiations,
concerning joint ventures and other forms of joint arrangements
referred to in Annex III, articles 9 and 11, and to approve the results
of such negotiations;
(h) to recommend to the Assembly what portion of the net income of the
Enterprise should be retained as its reserves in accordance with
article 160, paragraph 2(f), and article 10 of this Annex;
(i) to approve the annual budget of the Enterprise;
(j) to authorize the procurement of goods and services in accordance
with article 12, paragraph 3, of this Annex;
(k) to submit an annual report to the Council in accordance with
article 9 of this Annex;
(l) to submit to the Council for the approval of the Assembly draft rules
in respect of the organization, management, appointment and
dismissal of the staff of the Enterprise and to adopt regulations to
give effect to such rules;
(m) to borrow funds and to furnish such collateral or other security as it
may determine in accordance with article 11, paragraph 2, of this
Annex;
169
(n) to enter into any legal proceedings, agreements and transactions and
to take any other actions in accordance with article 13 of this Annex;
(o) to delegate, subject to the approval of the Council, any
non-discretionary powers to the Director-General and to its
committees.
Article 7
Director-General and staff of the Enterprise
1. The Assembly shall, upon the recommendation of the Council and
the nomination of the Governing Board, elect the Director-General of the
Enterprise who shall not be a member of the Board. The Director-General
shall hold office for a fixed term, not exceeding five years, and may be
re-elected for further terms.
2. The Director-General shall be the legal representative and chief
executive of the Enterprise and shall be directly responsible to the Board for
the conduct of the operations of the Enterprise. He shall be responsible for
the organization, management, appointment and dismissal of the staff of the
Enterprise in accordance with the rules and regulations referred to in article 6,
subparagraph (l), of this Annex. He shall participate, without the right to
vote, in the meetings of the Board and may participate, without the right to
vote, in the meetings of the Assembly and the Council when these organs are
dealing with matters concerning the Enterprise.
3. The paramount consideration in the recruitment and employment of
the staff and in the determination of their conditions of service shall be the
necessity of securing the highest standards of efficiency and of technical
competence. Subject to this consideration, due regard shall be paid to the
importance of recruiting the staff on an equitable geographical basis.
4. In the performance of their duties the Director-General and the staff
shall not seek or receive instructions from any government or from any other
source external to the Enterprise. They shall refrain from any action which
might reflect on their position as international officials of the Enterprise
responsible only to the Enterprise. Each State Party undertakes to respect the
exclusively international character of the responsibilities of the
Director-General and the staff and not to seek to influence them in the
discharge of their responsibilities.
5. The responsibilities set forth in article 168, paragraph 2, are equally
applicable to the staff of the Enterprise.
Article 8
Location
The Enterprise shall have its principal office at the seat of the Authority.
The Enterprise may establish other offices and facilities in the territory of any
State Party with the consent of that State Party.
Article 9
Reports and financial statements
1. The Enterprise shall, not later than three months after the end of each
financial year, submit to the Council for its consideration an annual report
containing an audited statement of its accounts and shall transmit to the
170
Council at appropriate intervals a summary statement of its financial position
and a profit and loss statement showing the results of its operations.
2. The Enterprise shall publish its annual report and such other reports
as it finds appropriate.
3. All reports and financial statements referred to in this article shall be
distributed to the members of the Authority.
Article 10
Allocation of net income
1. Subject to paragraph 3, the Enterprise shall make payments to the
Authority under Annex III, article 13, or their equivalent.
2. The Assembly shall, upon the recommendation of the Governing
Board, determine what portion of the net income of the Enterprise shall be
retained as reserves of the Enterprise. The remainder shall be transferred to
the Authority.
3. During an initial period required for the Enterprise to become
self-supporting, which shall not exceed 10 years from the commencement of
commercial production by it, the Assembly shall exempt the Enterprise from
the payments referred to in paragraph 1, and shall leave all of the net income
of the Enterprise in its reserves.
Article 11
Finances
1. The funds of the Enterprise shall include:
(a) amounts received from the Authority in accordance with
article 173, paragraph 2(b);
(b) voluntary contributions made by States Parties for the purpose
of financing activities of the Enterprise;
(c) amounts borrowed by the Enterprise in accordance with
paragraphs 2 and 3;
(d) income of the Enterprise from its operations;
(e) other funds made available to the Enterprise to enable it to
commence operations as soon as possible and to carry out its
functions.
2. (a) The Enterprise shall have the power to borrow funds and to
furnish such collateral or other security as it may determine.
Before making a public sale of its obligations in the financial
markets or currency of a State Party, the Enterprise shall obtain
the approval of that State Party. The total amount of
borrowings shall be approved by the Council upon the
recommendation of the Governing Board.
(b) States Parties shall make every reasonable effort to support
applications by the Enterprise for loans on capital markets and
from international financial institutions.
3. (a) The Enterprise shall be provided with the funds necessary to
explore and exploit one mine site, and to transport, process and
market the minerals recovered therefrom and the nickel, copper,
cobalt and manganese obtained, and to meet its initial
administrative expenses. The amount of the said funds, and the
criteria and factors for its adjustment, shall be included by the
171
Preparatory Commission in the draft rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority.
(b) All States Parties shall make available to the Enterprise an
amount equivalent to one half of the funds referred to in
subparagraph (a) by way of long-term interest-free loans in
accordance with the scale of assessments for the United Nations
regular budget in force at the time when the assessments are
made, adjusted to take into account the States which are not
members of the United Nations. Debts incurred by the
Enterprise in raising the other half of the funds shall be
guaranteed by all States Parties in accordance with the same
scale.
(c) If the sum of the financial contributions of States Parties is less
than the funds to be provided to the Enterprise under
subparagraph (a), the Assembly shall, at its first session,
consider the extent of the shortfall and adopt by consensus
measures for dealing with this shortfall, taking into account the
obligation of States Parties under subparagraphs (a) and (b) and
any recommendations of the Preparatory Commission.
(d) (i) Each State Party shall, within 60 days after the entry into
force of this Convention, or within 30 days after the
deposit of its instrument of ratification or accession,
whichever is later, deposit with the Enterprise irrevocable,
non-negotiable, non-interest-bearing promissory notes in
the amount of the share of such State Party of interest-free
loans pursuant to subparagraph (b).
(ii) The Board shall prepare, at the earliest practicable date
after this Convention enters into force, and thereafter at
annual or other appropriate intervals, a schedule of the
magnitude and timing of its requirements for the funding
of its administrative expenses and for activities carried out
by the Enterprise in accordance with article 170 and
article 12 of this Annex.
(iii) The States Parties shall, thereupon, be notified by the
Enterprise, through the Authority, of their respective
shares of the funds in accordance with subparagraph (b),
required for such expenses. The Enterprise shall encash
such amounts of the promissory notes as may be required
to meet the expenditure referred to in the schedule with
respect to interest-free loans.
(iv) States Parties shall, upon receipt of the notification, make
available their respective shares of debt guarantees for the
Enterprise in accordance with subparagraph (b).
(e) (i) If the Enterprise so requests, State Parties may provide
debt guarantees in addition to those provided in
accordance with the scale referred to in subparagraph (b).
(ii) In lieu of debt guarantees, a State Party may make a
voluntary contribution to the Enterprise in an amount
equivalent to that portion of the debts which it would
otherwise be liable to guarantee.
(f) Repayment of the interest-bearing loans shall have priority over
the repayment of the interest-free loans. Repayment of
interest-free loans shall be in accordance with a schedule
172
adopted by the Assembly, upon the recommendation of the
Council and the advice of the Board. In the exercise of this
function the Board shall be guided by the relevant provisions of
the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority, which
shall take into account the paramount importance of ensuring
the effective functioning of the Enterprise and, in particular,
ensuring its financial independence.
(g) Funds made available to the Enterprise shall be in freely usable
currencies or currencies which are freely available and
effectively usable in the major foreign exchange markets.
These currencies shall be defined in the rules, regulations and
procedures of the Authority in accordance with prevailing
international monetary practice. Except as provided in
paragraph 2, no State Party shall maintain or impose restrictions
on the holding, use or exchange by the Enterprise of these
funds.
(h) "Debt guarantee" means a promise of a State Party to creditors
of the Enterprise to pay, pro rata in accordance with the
appropriate scale, the financial obligations of the Enterprise
covered by the guarantee following notice by the creditors to
the State Party of a default by the Enterprise. Procedures for
the payment of those obligations shall be in conformity with the
rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority.
4. The funds, assets and expenses of the Enterprise shall be kept
separate from those of the Authority. This article shall not prevent the
Enterprise from making arrangements with the Authority regarding facilities,
personnel and services and arrangements for reimbursement of administrative
expenses paid by either on behalf of the other.
5. The records, books and accounts of the Enterprise, including its
annual financial statements, shall be audited annually by an independent
auditor appointed by the Council.
Article 12
Operations
1. The Enterprise shall propose to the Council projects for carrying out
activities in accordance with article 170. Such proposals shall include a
formal written plan of work for activities in the Area in accordance with
article 153, paragraph 3, and all such other information and data as may be
required from time to time for its appraisal by the Legal and Technical
Commission and approval by the Council.
2. Upon approval by the Council, the Enterprise shall execute the
project on the basis of the formal written plan of work referred to in
paragraph 1.
3. (a) If the Enterprise does not possess the goods and services
required for its operations it may procure them. For that
purpose, it shall issue invitations to tender and award contracts
to bidders offering the best combination of quality, price and
delivery time.
(b) If there is more than one bid offering such a combination, the
contract shall be awarded in accordance with:
(i) the principle of non-discrimination on the basis of
political or other considerations not relevant to the
173
carrying out of operations with due diligence and
efficiency; and
(ii) guidelines approved by the Council with regard to the
preferences to be accorded to goods and services
originating in developing States, including the
land-locked and geographically disadvantaged among
them.
(c) The Governing Board may adopt rules determining the special
circumstances in which the requirement of invitations to bid
may, in the best interests of the Enterprise, be dispensed with.
4. The Enterprise shall have title to all minerals and processed
substances produced by it.
5. The Enterprise shall sell its products on a non-discriminatory basis.
It shall not give non-commercial discounts.
6. Without prejudice to any general or special power conferred on the
Enterprise under any other provision of this Convention, the Enterprise shall
exercise such powers incidental to its business as shall be necessary.
7. The Enterprise shall not interfere in the political affairs of any State
Party; nor shall it be influenced in its decisions by the political character of
the State Party concerned. Only commercial considerations shall be relevant
to its decisions, and these considerations shall be weighed impartially in order
to carry out the purposes specified in article 1 of this Annex.
Article 13
Legal status, privileges and immunities
1. To enable the Enterprise to exercise its functions, the status,
privileges and immunities set forth in this article shall be accorded to the
Enterprise in the territories of States Parties. To give effect to this principle
the Enterprise and States Parties may, where necessary, enter into special
agreements.
2. The Enterprise shall have such legal capacity as is necessary for the
exercise of its functions and the fulfilment of its purposes and, in particular,
the capacity:
(a) to enter into contracts, joint arrangements or other
arrangements, including agreements with States and
international organizations;
(b) to acquire, lease, hold and dispose of immovable and movable
property;
(c) to be a party to legal proceedings.
3. (a) Actions may be brought against the Enterprise only in a court
of competent jurisdiction in the territory of a State Party in
which the Enterprise:
(i) has an office or facility;
(ii) has appointed an agent for the purpose of accepting
service or notice of process;
(iii) has entered into a contract for goods or services;
(iv) has issued securities; or
(v) is otherwise engaged in commercial activity.
(b) The property and assets of the Enterprise, wherever located and
by whomsoever held, shall be immune from all forms of
seizure, attachment or execution before the delivery of final
judgment against the Enterprise.
174
4. (a) The property and assets of the Enterprise, wherever located and
by whomsoever held, shall be immune from requisition,
confiscation, expropriation or any other form of seizure by
executive or legislative action.
(b) The property and assets of the Enterprise, wherever located and
by whomsoever held, shall be free from discriminatory
restrictions, regulations, controls and moratoria of any nature.
(c) The Enterprise and its employees shall respect local laws and
regulations in any State or territory in which the Enterprise or
its employees may do business or otherwise act.
(d) States Parties shall ensure that the Enterprise enjoys all rights,
privileges and immunities accorded by them to entities
conducting commercial activities in their territories. These
rights, privileges and immunities shall be accorded to the
Enterprise on no less favourable a basis than that on which they
are accorded to entities engaged in similar commercial
activities. If special privileges are provided by States Parties
for developing States or their commercial entities, the
Enterprise shall enjoy those privileges on a similarly
preferential basis.
(e) States Parties may provide special incentives, rights, privileges
and immunities to the Enterprise without the obligation to
provide such incentives, rights, privileges and immunities to
other commercial entities.
5. The Enterprise shall negotiate with the host countries in which its
offices and facilities are located for exemption from direct and indirect
taxation.
6. Each State Party shall take such action as is necessary for giving
effect in terms of its own law to the principles set forth in this Annex and
shall inform the Enterprise of the specific action which it has taken.
7. The Enterprise may waive any of the privileges and immunities
conferred under this article or in the special agreements referred to in
paragraph 1 to such extent and upon such conditions as it may determine.
ANNEX V. CONCILIATION
SECTION 1. CONCILIATION PROCEDURE
PURSUANT TO SECTION 1 OF PART XV
Article 1
Institution of proceedings
If the parties to a dispute have agreed, in accordance with article 284, to
submit it to conciliation under this section, any such party may institute the
proceedings by written notification addressed to the other party or parties to
the dispute.
Article 2
List of conciliators
A list of conciliators shall be drawn up and maintained by the
Secretary-General of the United Nations. Every State Party shall be entitled
to nominate four conciliators, each of whom shall be a person enjoying the
175
highest reputation for fairness, competence and integrity. The names of the
persons so nominated shall constitute the list. If at any time the conciliators
nominated by a State Party in the list so constituted shall be fewer than four,
that State Party shall be entitled to make further nominations as necessary.
The name of a conciliator shall remain on the list until withdrawn by the State
Party which made the nomination, provided that such conciliator shall
continue to serve on any conciliation commission to which that conciliator
has been appointed until the completion of the proceedings before that
commission.
Article 3
Constitution of conciliation commission
The conciliation commission shall, unless the parties otherwise agree, be
constituted as follows:
(a) Subject to subparagraph (g), the conciliation commission shall
consist of five members.
(b) The party instituting the proceedings shall appoint two conciliators
to be chosen preferably from the list referred to in article 2 of this
Annex, one of whom may be its national, unless the parties
otherwise agree. Such appointments shall be included in the
notification referred to in article 1 of this Annex.
(c) The other party to the dispute shall appoint two conciliators in the
manner set forth in subparagraph (b) within 21 days of receipt of the
notification referred to in article 1 of this Annex. If the
appointments are not made within that period, the party instituting
the proceedings may, within one week of the expiration of that
period, either terminate the proceedings by notification addressed to
the other party or request the Secretary-General of the United
Nations to make the appointments in accordance with
subparagraph (e).
(d) Within 30 days after all four conciliators have been appointed, they
shall appoint a fifth conciliator chosen from the list referred to in
article 2 of this Annex, who shall be chairman. If the appointment
is not made within that period, either party may, within one week of
the expiration of that period, request the Secretary-General of the
United Nations to make the appointment in accordance with
subparagraph (e).
(e) Within 30 days of the receipt of a request under subparagraph (c)
or (d), the Secretary-General of the United Nations shall make the
necessary appointments from the list referred to in article 2 of this
Annex in consultation with the parties to the dispute.
(f) Any vacancy shall be filled in the manner prescribed for the initial
appointment.
(g) Two or more parties which determine by agreement that they are in
the same interest shall appoint two conciliators jointly. Where two
or more parties have separate interests or there is a disagreement as
to whether they are of the same interest, they shall appoint
conciliators separately.
(h) In disputes involving more than two parties having separate
interests, or where there is disagreement as to whether they are of
the same interest, the parties shall apply subparagraphs (a) to (f) in
so far as possible.
176
Article 4
Procedure
The conciliation commission shall, unless the parties otherwise agree,
determine its own procedure. The commission may, with the consent of the
parties to the dispute, invite any State Party to submit to it its views orally or
in writing. Decisions of the commission regarding procedural matters, the
report and recommendations shall be made by a majority vote of its members.
Article 5
Amicable settlement
The commission may draw the attention of the parties to any measures
which might facilitate an amicable settlement of the dispute.
Article 6
Functions of the commission
The commission shall hear the parties, examine their claims and
objections, and make proposals to the parties with a view to reaching an
amicable settlement.
Article 7
Report
1. The commission shall report within 12 months of its constitution.
Its report shall record any agreements reached and, failing agreement, its
conclusions on all questions of fact or law relevant to the matter in dispute
and such recommendations as the commission may deem appropriate for an
amicable settlement. The report shall be deposited with the Secretary-General
of the United Nations and shall immediately be transmitted by him to the
parties to the dispute.
2. The report of the commission, including its conclusions or
recommendations, shall not be binding upon the parties.
Article 8
Termination
The conciliation proceedings are terminated when a settlement has been
reached, when the parties have accepted or one party has rejected the
recommendations of the report by written notification addressed to the
Secretary-General of the United Nations, or when a period of three months
has expired from the date of transmission of the report to the parties.
Article 9
Fees and expenses
The fees and expenses of the commission shall be borne by the parties
to the dispute.
177
Article 10
Right of parties to modify procedure
The parties to the dispute may by agreement applicable solely to that
dispute modify any provision of this Annex.
SECTION 2. COMPULSORY SUBMISSION
TO CONCILIATION PROCEDURE
PURSUANT TO SECTION 3 OF PART XV
Article 11
Institution of proceedings
1. Any party to a dispute which, in accordance with Part XV, section 3,
may be submitted to conciliation under this section, may institute the
proceedings by written notification addressed to the other party or parties to
the dispute.
2. Any party to the dispute, notified under paragraph 1, shall be obliged
to submit to such proceedings.
Article 12
Failure to reply or to submit to conciliation
The failure of a party or parties to the dispute to reply to notification of
institution of proceedings or to submit to such proceedings shall not
constitute a bar to the proceedings.
Article 13
Competence
A disagreement as to whether a conciliation commission acting under this
section has competence shall be decided by the commission.
Article 14
Application of section 1
Articles 2 to 10 of section l of this Annex apply subject to this section.
ANNEX VI. STATUTE OF THE INTERNATIONAL
TRIBUNAL
FOR THE LAW OF THE SEA
Article 1
General provisions
1. The International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea is constituted and
shall function in accordance with the provisions of this Convention and this
Statute.
2. The seat of the Tribunal shall be in the Free and Hanseatic City of
Hamburg in the Federal Republic of Germany.
3. The Tribunal may sit and exercise its functions elsewhere whenever
it considers this desirable.
178
4. A reference of a dispute to the Tribunal shall be governed by the
provisions of Parts XI and XV.
SECTION 1. ORGANIZATION OF THE TRIBUNAL
Article 2
Composition
1. The Tribunal shall be composed of a body of 21 independent
members, elected from among persons enjoying the highest reputation for
fairness and integrity and of recognized competence in the field of the law of
the sea.
2. In the Tribunal as a whole the representation of the principal legal
systems of the world and equitable geographical distribution shall be assured.
Article 3
Membership
1. No two members of the Tribunal may be nationals of the same State.
A person who for the purposes of membership in the Tribunal could be
regarded as a national of more than one State shall be deemed to be a national
of the one in which he ordinarily exercises civil and political rights.
2. There shall be no fewer than three members from each geographical
group as established by the General Assembly of the United Nations.
Article 4
Nominations and elections
1. Each State Party may nominate not more than two persons having
the qualifications prescribed in article 2 of this Annex. The members of the
Tribunal shall be elected from the list of persons thus nominated.
2. At least three months before the date of the election, the
Secretary-General of the United Nations in the case of the first election and
the Registrar of the Tribunal in the case of subsequent elections shall address
a written invitation to the States Parties to submit their nominations for
members of the Tribunal within two months. He shall prepare a list in
alphabetical order of all the persons thus nominated, with an indication of the
States Parties which have nominated them, and shall submit it to the States
Parties before the seventh day of the last month before the date of each
election.
3. The first election shall be held within six months of the date of entry
into force of this Convention.
4. The members of the Tribunal shall be elected by secret ballot.
Elections shall be held at a meeting of the States Parties convened by the
Secretary-General of the United Nations in the case of the first election and
by a procedure agreed to by the States Parties in the case of subsequent
elections. Two thirds of the States Parties shall constitute a quorum at that
meeting. The persons elected to the Tribunal shall be those nominees who
obtain the largest number of votes and a two-thirds majority of the States
Parties present and voting, provided that such majority includes a majority of
the States Parties.
179
Article 5
Term of office
1. The members of the Tribunal shall be elected for nine years and may
be re-elected; provided, however, that of the members elected at the first
election, the terms of seven members shall expire at the end of three years and
the terms of seven more members shall expire at the end of six years.
2. The members of the Tribunal whose terms are to expire at the end
of the above-mentioned initial periods of three and six years shall be chosen
by lot to be drawn by the Secretary-General of the United Nations
immediately after the first election.
3. The members of the Tribunal shall continue to discharge their duties
until their places have been filled. Though replaced, they shall finish any
proceedings which they may have begun before the date of their replacement.
4. In the case of the resignation of a member of the Tribunal, the letter
of resignation shall be addressed to the President of the Tribunal. The place
becomes vacant on the receipt of that letter.
Article 6
Vacancies
1. Vacancies shall be filled by the same method as that laid down for
the first election, subject to the following provision: the Registrar shall,
within one month of the occurrence of the vacancy, proceed to issue the
invitations provided for in article 4 of this Annex, and the date of the election
shall be fixed by the President of the Tribunal after consultation with the
States Parties.
2. A member of the Tribunal elected to replace a member whose term
of office has not expired shall hold office for the remainder of his
predecessor's term.
Article 7
Incompatible activities
1. No member of the Tribunal may exercise any political or
administrative function, or associate actively with or be financially interested
in any of the operations of any enterprise concerned with the exploration for
or exploitation of the resources of the sea or the seabed or other commercial
use of the sea or the seabed.
2. No member of the Tribunal may act as agent, counsel or advocate in
any case.
3. Any doubt on these points shall be resolved by decision of the
majority of the other members of the Tribunal present.
Article 8
Conditions relating to participation of members in a particular case
1. No member of the Tribunal may participate in the decision of any
case in which he has previously taken part as agent, counsel or advocate for
one of the parties, or as a member of a national or international court or
tribunal, or in any other capacity.
180
2. If, for some special reason, a member of the Tribunal considers that
he should not take part in the decision of a particular case, he shall so inform
the President of the Tribunal.
3. If the President considers that for some special reason one of the
members of the Tribunal should not sit in a particular case, he shall give him
notice accordingly.
4. Any doubt on these points shall be resolved by decision of the
majority of the other members of the Tribunal present.
Article 9
Consequence of ceasing to fulfil required conditions
If, in the unanimous opinion of the other members of the Tribunal, a
member has ceased to fulfil the required conditions, the President of the
Tribunal shall declare the seat vacant.
Article 10
Privileges and immunities
The members of the Tribunal, when engaged on the business of the
Tribunal, shall enjoy diplomatic privileges and immunities.
Article 11
Solemn declaration by members
Every member of the Tribunal shall, before taking up his duties, make a
solemn declaration in open session that he will exercise his powers
impartially and conscientiously.
Article 12
President, Vice-President and Registrar
1. The Tribunal shall elect its President and Vice-President for three
years; they may be re-elected.
2. The Tribunal shall appoint its Registrar and may provide for the
appointment of such other officers as may be necessary.
3. The President and the Registrar shall reside at the seat of the
Tribunal.
Article 13
Quorum
1. All available members of the Tribunal shall sit; a quorum of
11 elected members shall be required to constitute the Tribunal.
2. Subject to article 17 of this Annex, the Tribunal shall determine
which members are available to constitute the Tribunal for the consideration
of a particular dispute, having regard to the effective functioning of the
chambers as provided for in articles 14 and 15 of this Annex.
3. All disputes and applications submitted to the Tribunal shall be
heard and determined by the Tribunal, unless article 14 of this Annex applies,
or the parties request that it shall be dealt with in accordance with article 15
of this Annex.
181
Article 14
Seabed Disputes Chamber
A Seabed Disputes Chamber shall be established in accordance with the
provisions of section 4 of this Annex. Its jurisdiction, powers and functions
shall be as provided for in Part XI, section 5.
Article 15
Special chambers
1. The Tribunal may form such chambers, composed of three or more
of its elected members, as it considers necessary for dealing with particular
categories of disputes.
2. The Tribunal shall form a chamber for dealing with a particular
dispute submitted to it if the parties so request. The composition of such a
chamber shall be determined by the Tribunal with the approval of the parties.
3. With a view to the speedy dispatch of business, the Tribunal shall
form annually a chamber composed of five of its elected members which may
hear and determine disputes by summary procedure. Two alternative
members shall be selected for the purpose of replacing members who are
unable to participate in a particular proceeding.
4. Disputes shall be heard and determined by the chambers provided
for in this article if the parties so request.
5. A judgment given by any of the chambers provided for in this article
and in article 14 of this Annex shall be considered as rendered by the
Tribunal.
Article 16
Rules of the Tribunal
The Tribunal shall frame rules for carrying out its functions. In
particular it shall lay down rules of procedure.
Article 17
Nationality of members
1. Members of the Tribunal of the nationality of any of the parties to
a dispute shall retain their right to participate as members of the Tribunal.
2. If the Tribunal, when hearing a dispute, includes upon the bench a
member of the nationality of one of the parties, any other party may choose
a person to participate as a member of the Tribunal.
3. If the Tribunal, when hearing a dispute, does not include upon the
bench a member of the nationality of the parties, each of those parties may
choose a person to participate as a member of the Tribunal.
4. This article applies to the chambers referred to in articles 14 and 15
of this Annex. In such cases, the President, in consultation with the parties,
shall request specified members of the Tribunal forming the chamber, as
many as necessary, to give place to the members of the Tribunal of the
nationality of the parties concerned, and, failing such, or if they are unable to
be present, to the members specially chosen by the parties.
5. Should there be several parties in the same interest, they shall, for
the purpose of the preceding provisions, be considered as one party only.
Any doubt on this point shall be settled by the decision of the Tribunal.
182
6. Members chosen in accordance with paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 shall
fulfil the conditions required by articles 2, 8 and 11 of this Annex. They shall
participate in the decision on terms of complete equality with their colleagues.
Article 18
Remuneration of members
1. Each elected member of the Tribunal shall receive an annual
allowance and, for each day on which he exercises his functions, a special
allowance, provided that in any year the total sum payable to any member as
special allowance shall not exceed the amount of the annual allowance.
2. The President shall receive a special annual allowance.
3. The Vice-President shall receive a special allowance for each day on
which he acts as President.
4. The members chosen under article 17 of this Annex, other than
elected members of the Tribunal, shall receive compensation for each day on
which they exercise their functions.
5. The salaries, allowances and compensation shall be determined from
time to time at meetings of the States Parties, taking into account the
workload of the Tribunal. They may not be decreased during the term of
office.
6. The salary of the Registrar shall be determined at meetings of the
States Parties, on the proposal of the Tribunal.
7. Regulations adopted at meetings of the States Parties shall determine
the conditions under which retirement pensions may be given to members of
the Tribunal and to the Registrar, and the conditions under which members
of the Tribunal and Registrar shall have their travelling expenses refunded.
8. The salaries, allowances, and compensation shall be free of all
taxation.
Article 19
Expenses of the Tribunal
1. The expenses of the Tribunal shall be borne by the States Parties and
by the Authority on such terms and in such a manner as shall be decided at
meetings of the States Parties.
2. When an entity other than a State Party or the Authority is a party to
a case submitted to it, the Tribunal shall fix the amount which that party is to
contribute towards the expenses of the Tribunal.
SECTION 2. COMPETENCE
Article 20
Access to the Tribunal
1. The Tribunal shall be open to States Parties.
2. The Tribunal shall be open to entities other than States Parties in any
case expressly provided for in Part XI or in any case submitted pursuant to
any other agreement conferring jurisdiction on the Tribunal which is accepted
by all the parties to that case.
183
Article 21
Jurisdiction
The jurisdiction of the Tribunal comprises all disputes and all
applications submitted to it in accordance with this Convention and all
matters specifically provided for in any other agreement which confers
jurisdiction on the Tribunal.
Article 22
Reference of disputes subject to other agreements
If all the parties to a treaty or convention already in force and concerning
the subject-matter covered by this Convention so agree, any disputes
concerning the interpretation or application of such treaty or convention may,
in accordance with such agreement, be submitted to the Tribunal.
Article 23
Applicable law
The Tribunal shall decide all disputes and applications in accordance
with article 293.
SECTION 3. PROCEDURE
Article 24
Institution of proceedings
1. Disputes are submitted to the Tribunal, as the case may be, either by
notification of a special agreement or by written application, addressed to the
Registrar. In either case, the subject of the dispute and the parties shall be
indicated.
2. The Registrar shall forthwith notify the special agreement or the
application to all concerned.
3. The Registrar shall also notify all States Parties.
Article 25
Provisional measures
1. In accordance with article 290, the Tribunal and its Seabed Disputes
Chamber shall have the power to prescribe provisional measures.
2. If the Tribunal is not in session or a sufficient number of members
is not available to constitute a quorum, the provisional measures shall be
prescribed by the chamber of summary procedure formed under article 15,
paragraph 3, of this Annex. Notwithstanding article 15, paragraph 4, of this
Annex, such provisional measures may be adopted at the request of any party
to the dispute. They shall be subject to review and revision by the Tribunal.
Article 26
Hearing
1. The hearing shall be under the control of the President or, if he is
unable to preside, of the Vice-President. If neither is able to preside, the
senior judge present of the Tribunal shall preside.
184
2. The hearing shall be public, unless the Tribunal decides otherwise
or unless the parties demand that the public be not admitted.
Article 27
Conduct of case
The Tribunal shall make orders for the conduct of the case, decide the
form and time in which each party must conclude its arguments, and make all
arrangements connected with the taking of evidence.
Article 28
Default
When one of the parties does not appear before the Tribunal or fails to
defend its case, the other party may request the Tribunal to continue the
proceedings and make its decision. Absence of a party or failure of a party
to defend its case shall not constitute a bar to the proceedings. Before making
its decision, the Tribunal must satisfy itself not only that it has jurisdiction
over the dispute, but also that the claim is well founded in fact and law.
Article 29
Majority for decision
1. All questions shall be decided by a majority of the members of the
Tribunal who are present.
2. In the event of an equality of votes, the President or the member of
the Tribunal who acts in his place shall have a casting vote.
Article 30
Judgment
1. The judgment shall state the reasons on which it is based.
2. It shall contain the names of the members of the Tribunal who have
taken part in the decision.
3. If the judgment does not represent in whole or in part the unanimous
opinion of the members of the Tribunal, any member shall be entitled to
deliver a separate opinion.
4. The judgment shall be signed by the President and by the Registrar.
It shall be read in open court, due notice having been given to the parties to
the dispute.
Article 3l
Request to intervene
1. Should a State Party consider that it has an interest of a legal nature
which may be affected by the decision in any dispute, it may submit a request
to the Tribunal to be permitted to intervene.
2. It shall be for the Tribunal to decide upon this request.
3. If a request to intervene is granted, the decision of the Tribunal in
respect of the dispute shall be binding upon the intervening State Party in so
far as it relates to matters in respect of which that State Party intervened.
185
Article 32
Right to intervene in cases of interpretation or application
1. Whenever the interpretation or application of this Convention is in
question, the Registrar shall notify all States Parties forthwith.
2. Whenever pursuant to article 21 or 22 of this Annex the
interpretation or application of an international agreement is in question, the
Registrar shall notify all the parties to the agreement.
3. Every party referred to in paragraphs 1 and 2 has the right to
intervene in the proceedings; if it uses this right, the interpretation given by
the judgment will be equally binding upon it.
Article 33
Finality and binding force of decisions
1. The decision of the Tribunal is final and shall be complied with by
all the parties to the dispute.
2. The decision shall have no binding force except between the parties
in respect of that particular dispute.
3. In the event of dispute as to the meaning or scope of the decision, the
Tribunal shall construe it upon the request of any party.
Article 34
Costs
Unless otherwise decided by the Tribunal, each party shall bear its own
costs.
SECTION 4. SEABED DISPUTES CHAMBER
Article 35
Composition
1. The Seabed Disputes Chamber referred to in article 14 of this Annex
shall be composed of 11 members, selected by a majority of the elected
members of the Tribunal from among them.
2. In the selection of the members of the Chamber, the representation
of the principal legal systems of the world and equitable geographical
distribution shall be assured. The Assembly of the Authority may adopt
recommendations of a general nature relating to such representation and
distribution.
3. The members of the Chamber shall be selected every three years and
may be selected for a second term.
4. The Chamber shall elect its President from among its members, who
shall serve for the term for which the Chamber has been selected.
5. If any proceedings are still pending at the end of any three-year
period for which the Chamber has been selected, the Chamber shall complete
the proceedings in its original composition.
6. If a vacancy occurs in the Chamber, the Tribunal shall select a
successor from among its elected members, who shall hold office for the
remainder of his predecessor's term.
7. A quorum of seven of the members selected by the Tribunal shall be
required to constitute the Chamber.
186
Article 36
Ad hoc chambers
1. The Seabed Disputes Chamber shall form an ad hoc chamber,
composed of three of its members, for dealing with a particular dispute
submitted to it in accordance with article 188, paragraph 1(b). The
composition of such a chamber shall be determined by the Seabed Disputes
Chamber with the approval of the parties.
2. If the parties do not agree on the composition of an ad hoc chamber,
each party to the dispute shall appoint one member, and the third member
shall be appointed by them in agreement. If they disagree, or if any party fails
to make an appointment, the President of the Seabed Disputes Chamber shall
promptly make the appointment or appointments from among its members,
after consultation with the parties.
3. Members of the ad hoc chamber must not be in the service of, or
nationals of, any of the parties to the dispute.
Article 37
Access
The Chamber shall be open to the States Parties, the Authority and the
other entities referred to in Part XI, section 5.
Article 38
Applicable law
In addition to the provisions of article 293, the Chamber shall apply:
(a) the rules, regulations and procedures of the Authority adopted in
accordance with this Convention; and
(b) the terms of contracts concerning activities in the Area in matters
relating to those contracts.
Article 39
Enforcement of decisions of the Chamber
The decisions of the Chamber shall be enforceable in the territories of the
States Parties in the same manner as judgments or orders of the highest court
of the State Party in whose territory the enforcement is sought.
Article 40
Applicability of other sections of this Annex
1. The other sections of this Annex which are not incompatible with
this section apply to the Chamber.
2. In the exercise of its functions relating to advisory opinions, the
Chamber shall be guided by the provisions of this Annex relating to
procedure before the Tribunal to the extent to which it recognizes them to be
applicable.
187
SECTION 5. AMENDMENTS
Article 4l
Amendments
1. Amendments to this Annex, other than amendments to section 4,
may be adopted only in accordance with article 313 or by consensus at a
conference convened in accordance with this Convention.
2. Amendments to section 4 may be adopted only in accordance with
article 314.
3. The Tribunal may propose such amendments to this Statute as it may
consider necessary, by written communications to the States Parties for their
consideration in conformity with paragraphs 1 and 2.
ANNEX VII. ARBITRATION
Article 1
Institution of proceedings
Subject to the provisions of Part XV, any party to a dispute may submit
the dispute to the arbitral procedure provided for in this Annex by written
notification addressed to the other party or parties to the dispute. The
notification shall be accompanied by a statement of the claim and the grounds
on which it is based.
Article 2
List of arbitrators
l. A list of arbitrators shall be drawn up and maintained by the
Secretary-General of the United Nations. Every State Party shall be entitled
to nominate four arbitrators, each of whom shall be a person experienced in
maritime affairs and enjoying the highest reputation for fairness, competence
and integrity. The names of the persons so nominated shall constitute the list.
2. If at any time the arbitrators nominated by a State Party in the list so
constituted shall be fewer than four, that State Party shall be entitled to make
further nominations as necessary.
3. The name of an arbitrator shall remain on the list until withdrawn by
the State Party which made the nomination, provided that such arbitrator shall
continue to serve on any arbitral tribunal to which that arbitrator has been
appointed until the completion of the proceedings before that arbitral tribunal.
Article 3
Constitution of arbitral tribunal
For the purpose of proceedings under this Annex, the arbitral tribunal
shall, unless the parties otherwise agree, be constituted as follows:
(a) Subject to subparagraph (g), the arbitral tribunal shall consist of five
members.
(b) The party instituting the proceedings shall appoint one member to be
chosen preferably from the list referred to in article 2 of this Annex,
who may be its national. The appointment shall be included in the
notification referred to in article l of this Annex.
188
(c) The other party to the dispute shall, within 30 days of receipt of the
notification referred to in article l of this Annex, appoint one
member to be chosen preferably from the list, who may be its
national. If the appointment is not made within that period, the party
instituting the proceedings may, within two weeks of the expiration
of that period, request that the appointment be made in accordance
with subparagraph (e).
(d) The other three members shall be appointed by agreement between
the parties. They shall be chosen preferably from the list and shall
be nationals of third States unless the parties otherwise agree. The
parties to the dispute shall appoint the President of the arbitral
tribunal from among those three members. If, within 60 days of
receipt of the notification referred to in article l of this Annex, the
parties are unable to reach agreement on the appointment of one or
more of the members of the tribunal to be appointed by agreement,
or on the appointment of the President, the remaining appointment
or appointments shall be made in accordance with subparagraph (e),
at the request of a party to the dispute. Such request shall be made
within two weeks of the expiration of the aforementioned 60-day
period.
(e) Unless the parties agree that any appointment under
subparagraphs (c) and (d) be made by a person or a third State
chosen by the parties, the President of the International Tribunal for
the Law of the Sea shall make the necessary appointments. If the
President is unable to act under this subparagraph or is a national of
one of the parties to the dispute, the appointment shall be made by
the next senior member of the International Tribunal for the Law of
the Sea who is available and is not a national of one of the parties.
The appointments referred to in this subparagraph shall be made
from the list referred to in article 2 of this Annex within a period of
30 days of the receipt of the request and in consultation with the
parties. The members so appointed shall be of different nationalities
and may not be in the service of, ordinarily resident in the territory
of, or nationals of, any of the parties to the dispute.
(f) Any vacancy shall be filled in the manner prescribed for the initial
appointment.
(g) Parties in the same interest shall appoint one member of the tribunal
jointly by agreement. Where there are several parties having
separate interests or where there is disagreement as to whether they
are of the same interest, each of them shall appoint one member of
the tribunal. The number of members of the tribunal appointed
separately by the parties shall always be smaller by one than the
number of members of the tribunal to be appointed jointly by the
parties.
(h) In disputes involving more than two parties, the provisions of
subparagraphs (a) to (f) shall apply to the maximum extent possible.
Article 4
Functions of arbitral tribunal
An arbitral tribunal constituted under article 3 of this Annex shall
function in accordance with this Annex and the other provisions of this
Convention.
189
Article 5
Procedure
Unless the parties to the dispute otherwise agree, the arbitral tribunal
shall determine its own procedure, assuring to each party a full opportunity
to be heard and to present its case.
Article 6
Duties of parties to a dispute
The parties to the dispute shall facilitate the work of the arbitral tribunal
and, in particular, in accordance with their law and using all means at their
disposal, shall:
(a) provide it with all relevant documents, facilities and information;
and
(b) enable it when necessary to call witnesses or experts and receive
their evidence and to visit the localities to which the case relates.
Article 7
Expenses
Unless the arbitral tribunal decides otherwise because of the particular
circumstances of the case, the expenses of the tribunal, including the
remuneration of its members, shall be borne by the parties to the dispute in
equal shares.
Article 8
Required majority for decisions
Decisions of the arbitral tribunal shall be taken by a majority vote of its
members. The absence or abstention of less than half of the members shall
not constitute a bar to the tribunal reaching a decision. In the event of an
equality of votes, the President shall have a casting vote.
Article 9
Default of appearance
If one of the parties to the dispute does not appear before the arbitral
tribunal or fails to defend its case, the other party may request the tribunal to
continue the proceedings and to make its award. Absence of a party or failure
of a party to defend its case shall not constitute a bar to the proceedings.
Before making its award, the arbitral tribunal must satisfy itself not only that
it has jurisdiction over the dispute but also that the claim is well founded in
fact and law.
Article 10
Award
The award of the arbitral tribunal shall be confined to the subject-matter
of the dispute and state the reasons on which it is based. It shall contain the
names of the members who have participated and the date of the award. Any
member of the tribunal may attach a separate or dissenting opinion to the
award.
190
Article 11
Finality of award
The award shall be final and without appeal, unless the parties to the
dispute have agreed in advance to an appellate procedure. It shall be
complied with by the parties to the dispute.
Article 12
Interpretation or implementation of award
1. Any controversy which may arise between the parties to the dispute
as regards the interpretation or manner of implementation of the award may
be submitted by either party for decision to the arbitral tribunal which made
the award. For this purpose, any vacancy in the tribunal shall be filled in the
manner provided for in the original appointments of the members of the
tribunal.
2. Any such controversy may be submitted to another court or tribunal
under article 287 by agreement of all the parties to the dispute.
Article 13
Application to entities other than States Parties
The provisions of this Annex shall apply mutatis mutandis to any dispute
involving entities other than States Parties.
ANNEX VIII. SPECIAL ARBITRATION
Article 1
Institution of proceedings
Subject to Part XV, any party to a dispute concerning the interpretation
or application of the articles of this Convention relating to (1) fisheries,
(2) protection and preservation of the marine environment, (3) marine
scientific research, or (4) navigation, including pollution from vessels and by
dumping, may submit the dispute to the special arbitral procedure provided
for in this Annex by written notification addressed to the other party or
parties to the dispute. The notification shall be accompanied by a statement
of the claim and the grounds on which it is based.
Article 2
Lists of experts
1. A list of experts shall be established and maintained in respect of
each of the fields of (1) fisheries, (2) protection and preservation of the
marine environment, (3) marine scientific research, and (4) navigation,
including pollution from vessels and by dumping.
2. The lists of experts shall be drawn up and maintained, in the field of
fisheries by the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations, in
the field of protection and preservation of the marine environment by the
United Nations Environment Programme, in the field of marine scientific
research by the Intergovernmental Oceanographic Commission, in the field
of navigation, including pollution from vessels and by dumping, by the
International Maritime Organization, or in each case by the appropriate
191
subsidiary body concerned to which such organization, programme or
commission has delegated this function.
3. Every State Party shall be entitled to nominate two experts in each
field whose competence in the legal, scientific or technical aspects of such
field is established and generally recognized and who enjoy the highest
reputation for fairness and integrity. The names of the persons so nominated
in each field shall constitute the appropriate list.
4. If at any time the experts nominated by a State Party in the list so
constituted shall be fewer than two, that State Party shall be entitled to make
further nominations as necessary.
5. The name of an expert shall remain on the list until withdrawn by the
State Party which made the nomination, provided that such expert shall
continue to serve on any special arbitral tribunal to which that expert has been
appointed until the completion of the proceedings before that special arbitral
tribunal.
Article 3
Constitution of special arbitral tribunal
For the purpose of proceedings under this Annex, the special arbitral
tribunal shall, unless the parties otherwise agree, be constituted as follows:
(a) Subject to subparagraph (g), the special arbitral tribunal shall consist
of five members.
(b) The party instituting the proceedings shall appoint two members to
be chosen preferably from the appropriate list or lists referred to in
article 2 of this Annex relating to the matters in dispute, one of
whom may be its national. The appointments shall be included in
the notification referred to in article 1 of this Annex.
(c) The other party to the dispute shall, within 30 days of receipt of the
notification referred to in article 1 of this Annex, appoint two
members to be chosen preferably from the appropriate list or lists
relating to the matters in dispute, one of whom may be its national.
If the appointments are not made within that period, the party
instituting the proceedings may, within two weeks of the expiration
of that period, request that the appointments be made in accordance
with subparagraph (e).
(d) The parties to the dispute shall by agreement appoint the President
of the special arbitral tribunal, chosen preferably from the
appropriate list, who shall be a national of a third State, unless the
parties otherwise agree. If, within 30 days of receipt of the
notification referred to in article l of this Annex, the parties are
unable to reach agreement on the appointment of the President, the
appointment shall be made in accordance with subparagraph (e), at
the request of a party to the dispute. Such request shall be made
within two weeks of the expiration of the aforementioned 30-day
period.
(e) Unless the parties agree that the appointment be made by a person
or a third State chosen by the parties, the Secretary-General of the
United Nations shall make the necessary appointments within
30 days of receipt of a request under subparagraphs (c) and (d). The
appointments referred to in this subparagraph shall be made from
the appropriate list or lists of experts referred to in article 2 of this
Annex and in consultation with the parties to the dispute and the
192
appropriate international organization. The members so appointed
shall be of different nationalities and may not be in the service of,
ordinarily resident in the territory of, or nationals of, any of the
parties to the dispute.
(f) Any vacancy shall be filled in the manner prescribed for the initial
appointment.
(g) Parties in the same interest shall appoint two members of the
tribunal jointly by agreement. Where there are several parties
having separate interests or where there is disagreement as to
whether they are of the same interest, each of them shall appoint one
member of the tribunal.
(h) In disputes involving more than two parties, the provisions of
subparagraphs (a) to (f) shall apply to the maximum extent possible.
Article 4
General provisions
Annex VII, articles 4 to 13, apply mutatis mutandis to the special
arbitration proceedings in accordance with this Annex.
Article 5
Fact finding
1. The parties to a dispute concerning the interpretation or application
of the provisions of this Convention relating to (l) fisheries, (2) protection and
preservation of the marine environment, (3) marine scientific research, or
(4) navigation, including pollution from vessels and by dumping, may at any
time agree to request a special arbitral tribunal constituted in accordance with
article 3 of this Annex to carry out an inquiry and establish the facts giving
rise to the dispute.
2. Unless the parties otherwise agree, the findings of fact of the special
arbitral tribunal acting in accordance with paragraph 1, shall be considered
as conclusive as between the parties.
3. If all the parties to the dispute so request, the special arbitral tribunal
may formulate recommendations which, without having the force of a
decision, shall only constitute the basis for a review by the parties of the
questions giving rise to the dispute.
4. Subject to paragraph 2, the special arbitral tribunal shall act in
accordance with the provisions of this Annex, unless the parties otherwise
agree.
ANNEX IX. PARTICIPATION BY
INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS
Article 1
Use of terms
For the purposes of article 305 and of this Annex, "international
organization" means an intergovernmental organization constituted by States
to which its member States have transferred competence over matters
governed by this Convention, including the competence to enter into treaties
in respect of those matters.
193
Article 2
Signature
An international organization may sign this Convention if a majority of
its member States are signatories of this Convention. At the time of signature
an international organization shall make a declaration specifying the matters
governed by this Convention in respect of which competence has been
transferred to that organization by its member States which are signatories,
and the nature and extent of that competence.
Article 3
Formal confirmation and accession
1. An international organization may deposit its instrument of formal
confirmation or of accession if a majority of its member States deposit or
have deposited their instruments of ratification or accession.
2. The instruments deposited by the international organization shall
contain the undertakings and declarations required by articles 4 and 5 of this
Annex.
Article 4
Extent of participation and rights and obligations
l. The instrument of formal confirmation or of accession of an
international organization shall contain an undertaking to accept the rights
and obligations of States under this Convention in respect of matters relating
to which competence has been transferred to it by its member States which
are Parties to this Convention.
2. An international organization shall be a Party to this Convention to
the extent that it has competence in accordance with the declarations,
communications of information or notifications referred to in article 5 of this
Annex.
3. Such an international organization shall exercise the rights and
perform the obligations which its member States which are Parties would
otherwise have under this Convention, on matters relating to which
competence has been transferred to it by those member States. The member
States of that international organization shall not exercise competence which
they have transferred to it.
4. Participation of such an international organization shall in no case
entail an increase of the representation to which its member States which are
States Parties would otherwise be entitled, including rights in
decision-making.
5. Participation of such an international organization shall in no case
confer any rights under this Convention on member States of the organization
which are not States Parties to this Convention.
6. In the event of a conflict between the obligations of an international
organization under this Convention and its obligations under the agreement
establishing the organization or any acts relating to it, the obligations under
this Convention shall prevail.
194
Article 5
Declarations, notifications and communications
l. The instrument of formal confirmation or of accession of an
international organization shall contain a declaration specifying the matters
governed by this Convention in respect of which competence has been
transferred to the organization by its member States which are Parties to this
Convention.
2. A member State of an international organization shall, at the time it
ratifies or accedes to this Convention or at the time when the organization
deposits its instrument of formal confirmation or of accession, whichever is
later, make a declaration specifying the matters governed by this Convention
in respect of which it has transferred competence to the organization.
3. States Parties which are member States of an international
organization which is a Party to this Convention shall be presumed to have
competence over all matters governed by this Convention in respect of which
transfers of competence to the organization have not been specifically
declared, notified or communicated by those States under this article.
4. The international organization and its member States which are
States Parties shall promptly notify the depositary of this Convention of any
changes to the distribution of competence, including new transfers of
competence, specified in the declarations under paragraphs 1 and 2.
5. Any State Party may request an international organization and its
member States which are States Parties to provide information as to which,
as between the organization and its member States, has competence in respect
of any specific question which has arisen. The organization and the member
States concerned shall provide this information within a reasonable time. The
international organization and the member States may also, on their own
initiative, provide this information.
6. Declarations, notifications and communications of information under
this article shall specify the nature and extent of the competence transferred.
Article 6
Responsibility and liability
l. Parties which have competence under article 5 of this Annex shall
have responsibility for failure to comply with obligations or for any other
violation of this Convention.
2. Any State Party may request an international organization or its
member States which are States Parties for information as to who has
responsibility in respect of any specific matter. The organization and the
member States concerned shall provide this information. Failure to provide
this information within a reasonable time or the provision of contradictory
information shall result in joint and several liability.
Article 7
Settlement of disputes
l. At the time of deposit of its instrument of formal confirmation or of
accession, or at any time thereafter, an international organization shall be free
to choose, by means of a written declaration, one or more of the means for the
settlement of disputes concerning the interpretation or application of this
Convention, referred to in article 287, paragraph 1(a), (c) or (d).
195
2. Part XV applies mutatis mutandis to any dispute between Parties to
this Convention, one or more of which are international organizations.
3. When an international organization and one or more of its member
States are joint parties to a dispute, or parties in the same interest, the
organization shall be deemed to have accepted the same procedures for the
settlement of disputes as the member States; when, however, a member State
has chosen only the International Court of Justice under article 287, the
organization and the member State concerned shall be deemed to have
accepted arbitration in accordance with Annex VII, unless the parties to the
dispute otherwise agree.
Article 8
Applicability of Part XVII
Part XVII applies mutatis mutandis to an international organization,
except in respect of the following:
(a) the instrument of formal confirmation or of accession of an
international organization shall not be taken into account in the
application of article 308, paragraph l;
(b) (i) an international organization shall have exclusive capacity with
respect to the application of articles 312 to 315, to the extent
that it has competence under article 5 of this Annex over the
entire subject-matter of the amendment;
(ii) the instrument of formal confirmation or of accession of an
international organization to an amendment, the entire
subject-matter over which the international organization has
competence under article 5 of this Annex, shall be considered
to be the instrument of ratification or accession of each of the
member States which are States Parties, for the purposes of
applying article 316, paragraphs 1, 2 and 3;
(iii) the instrument of formal confirmation or of accession of the
international organization shall not be taken into account in the
application of article 316, paragraphs 1 and 2, with regard to all
other amendments;
(c) (i) an international organization may not denounce this Convention
in accordance with article 317 if any of its member States is a
State Party and if it continues to fulfil the qualifications
specified in article 1 of this Annex;
(ii) an international organization shall denounce this Convention
when none of its member States is a State Party or if the
international organization no longer fulfils the qualifications
specified in article 1 of this Annex. Such denunciation shall
take effect immediately.
196
Final Act of the Third United Nations Conference on
the Law of the Sea (excerpts)
Page
Annex I ........................................................ 195
Resolution I ................................................ 195
Resolution II................................................ 197
Resolution III ............................................... 204
Resolution IV ............................................... 205
Annex II
Statement of understanding concerning a specific method to be
used in establishing the outer edge of the continental margin .......... 205
Annex VI
Resolution on development of national marine science, technology
and ocean service infrastructures ................................ 206
ANNEX I
RESOLUTION I
ESTABLISHMENT OF THE PREPARATORY COMMISSION FOR
THE INTERNATIONAL SEA-BED AUTHORITY AND FOR
THE INTERNATIONAL TRIBUNAL FOR THE LAW OF THE
SEA
The Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
Having adopted the Convention on the Law of the Sea which provides
for the establishment of the International Seabed Authority and the
International Tribunal for the Law of the Sea,
Having decided to take all possible measures to ensure the entry into
effective operation without undue delay of the Authority and the Tribunal and
to make the necessary arrangements for the commencement of their functions,
Having decided that a Preparatory Commission should be established for
the fulfilment of these purposes,
Decides as follows:
l. There is hereby established the Preparatory Commission for the
International Seabed Authority and for the International Tribunal for the Law
of the Sea. Upon signature of or accession to the Convention by 50 States,
the Secretary-General of the United Nations shall convene the Commission,
and it shall meet no sooner than 60 days and no later than 90 days thereafter.
2. The Commission shall consist of the representatives of States and of
Namibia, represented by the United Nations Council for Namibia, which have
signed the Convention or acceded to it. The representatives of signatories of
the Final Act may participate fully in the deliberations of the Commission as
observers but shall not be entitled to participate in the taking of decisions.
3. The Commission shall elect its Chairman and other officers.
4. The Rules of Procedure of the Third United Nations Conference on
the Law of the Sea shall apply mutatis mutandis to the adoption of the rules
of procedure of the Commission.
5. The Commission shall:
197
(a) prepare the provisional agenda for the first session of the
Assembly and of the Council and, as appropriate, make
recommendations relating to items thereon;
(b) prepare draft rules of procedure of the Assembly and of the
Council;
(c) make recommendations concerning the budget for the first
financial period of the Authority;
(d) make recommendations concerning the relationship between the
Authority and the United Nations and other international
organizations;
(e) make recommendations concerning the Secretariat of the
Authority in accordance with the relevant provisions of the
Convention;
(f) undertake studies, as necessary, concerning the establishment
of the headquarters of the Authority, and make
recommendations relating thereto;
(g) prepare draft rules, regulations and procedures, as necessary, to
enable the Authority to commence its functions, including draft
regulations concerning the financial management and the
internal administration of the Authority;
(h) exercise the powers and functions assigned to it by resolution II
of the Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea
relating to preparatory investment;
(i) undertake studies on the problems which would be encountered
by developing land-based producer States likely to be most
seriously affected by the production of minerals derived from
the Area with a view to minimizing their difficulties and
helping them to make the necessary economic adjustment,
including studies on the establishment of a compensation fund,
and submit recommendations to the Authority thereon.
6. The Commission shall have such legal capacity as may be necessary
for the exercise of its functions and the fulfilment of its purposes as set forth
in this resolution.
7. The Commission may establish such subsidiary bodies as are
necessary for the exercise of its functions and shall determine their functions
and rules of procedure. It may also make use, as appropriate, of outside
sources of expertise in accordance with United Nations practice to facilitate
the work of bodies so established.
8. The Commission shall establish a special commission for the
Enterprise and entrust to it the functions referred to in paragraph 12 of
resolution II of the Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea
relating to preparatory investment. The special commission shall take all
measures necessary for the early entry into effective operation of the
Enterprise.
9. The Commission shall establish a special commission on the
problems which would be encountered by developing land-based producer
States likely to be most seriously affected by the production of minerals
derived from the Area and entrust to it the functions referred to in
paragraph 5(i).
10. The Commission shall prepare a report containing recommendations
for submission to the meeting of the States Parties to be convened in
accordance with Annex VI, article 4, of the Convention regarding practical
198
arrangements for the establishment of the International Tribunal for the Law
of the Sea.
11. The Commission shall prepare a final report on all matters within its
mandate, except as provided in paragraph 10, for the presentation to the
Assembly at its first session. Any action which may be taken on the basis of
the report must be in conformity with the provisions of the Convention
concerning the powers and functions entrusted to the respective organs of the
Authority.
12. The Commission shall meet at the seat of the Authority if facilities
are available; it shall meet as often as necessary for the expeditious exercise
of its functions.
13. The Commission shall remain in existence until the conclusion of the
first session of the Assembly, at which time its property and records shall be
transferred to the Authority.
14. The expenses of the Commission shall be met from the regular
budget of the United Nations, subject to the approval of the General
Assembly of the United Nations.
15. The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall make available
to the Commission such secretariat services as may be required.
16. The Secretary-General of the United Nations shall bring this
resolution, in particular paragraphs 14 and 15, to the attention of the General
Assembly for necessary action.
RESOLUTION II
GOVERNING PREPARATORY INVESTMENT IN
PIONEER ACTIVITIES RELATING TO POLYMETALLIC
NODULES
The Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
Having adopted the Convention on the Law of the Sea (the
"Convention"),
Having established by resolution I the Preparatory Commission for the
International Seabed Authority and for the International Tribunal for the Law
of the Sea (the "Commission") and directed it to prepare draft rules,
regulations and procedures, as necessary to enable the Authority to commence
its functions, as well as to make recommendations for the early entry into
effective operation of the Enterprise,
Desirous of making provision for investments by States and other entities
made in a manner compatible with the international regime set forth in
Part XI of the Convention and the Annexes relating thereto, before the entry
into force of the Convention,
Recognizing the need to ensure that the Enterprise will be provided with
the funds, technology and expertise necessary to enable it to keep pace with
the States and other entities referred to in the preceding paragraph with
respect to activities in the Area,
Decides as follows:
1. For the purposes of this resolution:
(a) "pioneer investor" refers to:
(i) France, India, Japan and the Union of Soviet Socialist
Republics, or a state enterprise of each of those States or
one natural or juridical person which possesses the
nationality of or is effectively controlled by each of those
199
1
For their identity and composition see "Seabed mineral resource
development: recent activities of the international Consortia" and addendum, published by
the Department of International Economic and Social Affairs of the United Nations
(ST/ESA/107 and Add.1).
States, or their nationals, provided that the State
concerned signs the Convention and the State or state
enterprise or natural or juridical person has expended,
before 1 January 1983, an amount equivalent to at least
$US 30 million (United States dollars calculated in
constant dollars relative to 1982) in pioneer activities and
has expended no less than 10 per cent of that amount in
the location, survey and evaluation of the area referred to
in paragraph 3(a);
(ii) four entities, whose components being natural or juridical
persons
1
possess the nationality of one or more of the
following States, or are effectively controlled by one or
more of them or their nationals: Belgium, Canada, the
Federal Republic of Germany, Italy, Japan, the
Netherlands, the United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland, and the United States of America,
provided that the certifying State or States sign the
Convention and the entity concerned has expended,
before 1 January 1983, the levels of expenditure for the
purpose stated in subparagraph (i);
(iii) any developing State which signs the Convention or any
state enterprise or natural or juridical person which
possesses the nationality of such State or is effectively
controlled by it or its nationals, or any group of the
foregoing, which, before 1 January 1985, has expended
the levels of expenditure for the purpose stated in
subparagraph (i);
The rights of the pioneer investor may devolve upon its successor in interest.
(b) "pioneer activities" means undertakings, commitments of
financial and other assets, investigations, findings, research,
engineering development and other activities relevant to the
identification, discovery, and systematic analysis and evaluation
of polymetallic nodules and to the determination of the
technical and economic feasibility of exploitation. Pioneer
activities include:
(i) any at-sea observation and evaluation activity which has
as its objective the establishment and documentation of
the nature, shape, concentration, location and grade of
polymetallic nodules and of the environmental, technical
and other appropriate factors which must be taken into
account before exploitation;
(ii) the recovery from the Area of polymetallic nodules with
a view to the designing, fabricating and testing of
equipment which is intended to be used in the exploitation
of polymetallic nodules;
(c) "certifying State" means a State which signs the Convention,
standing in the same relation to a pioneer investor as would a
200
sponsoring State pursuant to Annex III, article 4, of the
Convention and which certifies the levels of expenditure
specified in subparagraph (a);
(d) "polymetallic nodules" means one of the resources of the Area
consisting of any deposit or accretion of nodules, on or just
below the surface of the deep seabed, which contain
manganese, nickel, cobalt and copper;
(e) "pioneer area" means an area allocated by the Commission to a
pioneer investor for pioneer activities pursuant to this
resolution. A pioneer area shall not exceed 150,000 square
kilometres. The pioneer investor shall relinquish portions of
the pioneer area to revert to the Area, in accordance with the
following schedule:
(i) 20 per cent of the area allocated by the end of the third
year from the date of the allocation;
(ii) an additional 10 per cent of the area allocated by the end
of the fifth year from the date of the allocation;
(iii) an additional 20 per cent of the area allocated or such
larger amount as would exceed the exploitation area
decided upon by the Authority in its rules, regulations and
procedures, after eight years from the date of the
allocation of the area or the date of the award of a
production authorization, whichever is earlier;
(f) "Area", "Authority", "activities in the Area" and "resources"
have the meanings assigned to those terms in the Convention.
2. As soon as the Commission begins to function, any State which has
signed the Convention may apply to the Commission on its behalf or on
behalf of any state enterprise or entity or natural or juridical person specified
in paragraph 1(a) for registration as a pioneer investor. The Commission
shall register the applicant as a pioneer investor if the application:
(a) is accompanied, in the case of a State which has signed the
Convention, by a statement certifying the level of expenditure
made in accordance with paragraph 1(a), and, in all other cases,
a certificate concerning such level of expenditure issued by a
certifying State or States; and
(b) is in conformity with the other provisions of this resolution,
including paragraph 5.
3. (a) Every application shall cover a total area which need not be a
single continuous area, sufficiently large and of sufficient
estimated commercial value to allow two mining operations.
The application shall indicate the coordinates of the area
defining the total area and dividing it into two parts of equal
estimated commercial value and shall contain all the data
available to the applicant with respect to both parts of the area.
Such data shall include, inter alia, information relating to
mapping, testing, the density of polymetallic nodules and their
metal content. In dealing with such data, the Commission and
its staff shall act in accordance with the relevant provisions of
the Convention and its Annexes concerning the confidentiality
of data.
(b) Within 45 days of receiving the data required by
subparagraph (a), the Commission shall designate the part of
the area which is to be reserved in accordance with the
201
Convention for the conduct of activities in the Area by the
Authority through the Enterprise or in association with
developing States. The other part of the area shall be allocated
to the pioneer investor as a pioneer area.
4. No pioneer investor may be registered in respect of more than one
pioneer area. In the case of a pioneer investor which is made up of two or
more components, none of such components may apply to be registered as a
pioneer investor in its own right or under paragraph 1(a)(iii).
5. (a) Any State which has signed the Convention and which is a
prospective certifying State shall ensure, before making
applications to the Commission under paragraph 2, that areas in
respect of which applications are made do not overlap one
another or areas previously allocated as pioneer areas. The
States concerned shall keep the Commission currently and fully
informed of any efforts to resolve conflicts with respect to
overlapping claims and of the results thereof.
(b) Certifying States shall ensure, before the entry into force of the
Convention, that pioneer activities are conducted in a manner
compatible with it.
(c) The prospective certifying States, including all potential
claimants, shall resolve their conflicts as required under
subparagraph (a) by negotiations within a reasonable period. If
such conflicts have not been resolved by 1 March 1983, the
prospective certifying States shall arrange for the submission of
all such claims to binding arbitration in accordance with
UNCITRAL Arbitration Rules to commence not later than
1 May 1983 and to be completed by 1 December 1984. If one
of the States concerned does not wish to participate in the
arbitration, it shall arrange for a juridical person of its
nationality to represent it in the arbitration. The arbitral tribunal
may, for good cause, extend the deadline for the making of the
award for one or more 30-day periods.
(d) In determining the issue as to which applicant involved in a
conflict shall be awarded all or part of each area in conflict, the
arbitral tribunal shall find a solution which is fair and equitable,
having regard, with respect to each applicant involved in the
conflict, to the following factors:
(i) the deposit of the list of relevant coordinates with the
prospective certifying State or States not later than the
date of adoption of the Final Act or 1 January 1983,
whichever is earlier;
(ii) the continuity and extent of past activities relevant to each
area in conflict and to the application area of which it is
a part;
(iii) the date on which each pioneer investor concerned or
predecessor in interest or component organization thereof
commenced activities at sea in the application area;
(iv) the financial cost of activities measured in constant
United States dollars relevant to each area in conflict and
to the application area of which it is a part; and
(v) the time when those activities were carried out and the
quality of activities.
202
6. A pioneer investor registered pursuant to this resolution shall, from
the date of registration, have the exclusive right to carry out pioneer activities
in the pioneer area allocated to it.
7. (a) Every applicant for registration as a pioneer investor shall pay
to the Commission a fee of $US 250,000. When the pioneer
investor applies to the Authority for a plan of work for
exploration and exploitation the fee referred to in Annex III,
article 13, paragraph 2, of the Convention shall be
$US 250,000.
(b) Every registered pioneer investor shall pay an annual fixed fee
of $US 1 million commencing from the date of the allocation of
the pioneer area. The payments shall be made by the pioneer
investor to the Authority upon the approval of its plan of work
for exploration and exploitation. The financial arrangements
undertaken pursuant to such plan of work shall be adjusted to
take account of the payments made pursuant to this paragraph.
(c) Every registered pioneer investor shall agree to incur periodic
expenditures, with respect to the pioneer area allocated to it,
until approval of its plan of work pursuant to paragraph 8, of an
amount to be determined by the Commission. The amount
should be reasonably related to the size of the pioneer area and
the expenditures which would be expected of a bona fide
operator who intends to bring that area into commercial
production within a reasonable time.
8. (a) Within six months of the entry into force of the Convention and
certification by the Commission in accordance with
paragraph 11, of compliance with this resolution, the pioneer
investor so registered shall apply to the Authority for approval
of a plan of work for exploration and exploitation, in
accordance with the Convention. The plan of work in respect
of such application shall comply with and be governed by the
relevant provisions of the Convention and the rules, regulations
and procedures of the Authority, including those on the
operational requirements, the financial requirements and the
undertakings concerning the transfer of technology.
Accordingly, the Authority shall approve such application.
(b) When an application for approval of a plan of work is submitted
by an entity other than a State, pursuant to subparagraph (a), the
certifying State or States shall be deemed to be the sponsoring
State for the purposes of Annex III, article 4, of the
Convention, and shall thereupon assume such obligations.
(c) No plan of work for exploration and exploitation shall be
approved unless the certifying State is a Party to the
Convention. In the case of the entities referred to in
paragraph 1(a)(ii), the plan of work for exploration and
exploitation shall not be approved unless all the States whose
natural or juridical persons comprise those entities are Parties
to the Convention. If any such State fails to ratify the
Convention within six months after it has received a
notification from the Authority that an application by it, or
sponsored by it, is pending, its status as a pioneer investor or
certifying State, as the case may be, shall terminate, unless the
Council, by a majority of three fourths of its members present
203
and voting, decides to postpone the terminal date for a period
not exceeding six months.
9. (a) In the allocation of production authorizations, in accordance
with article 151 and Annex III, article 7, of the Convention, the
pioneer investors who have obtained approval of plans of work
for exploration and exploitation shall have priority over all
applicants other than the Enterprise which shall be entitled to
production authorizations for two mine sites including that
referred to in article 151, paragraph 5, of the Convention. After
each of the pioneer investors has obtained production
authorization for its first mine site, the priority for the
Enterprise contained in Annex III, article 7, paragraph 6, of the
Convention shall apply.
(b) Production authorizations shall be issued to each pioneer
investor within 30 days of the date on which that pioneer
investor notifies the Authority that it will commence
commercial production within five years. If a pioneer investor
is unable to begin production within the period of five years for
reasons beyond its control, it shall apply to the Legal and
Technical Commission for an extension of time. That
Commission shall grant the extension of time, for a period not
exceeding five years and not subject to further extension, if it
is satisfied that the pioneer investor cannot begin on an
economically viable basis at the time originally planned.
Nothing in this subparagraph shall prevent the Enterprise or any
other pioneer applicant, who has notified the Authority that it
will commence commercial production within five years, from
being given a priority over any applicant who has obtained an
extension of time under this subparagraph.
(c) If the Authority, upon being given notice, pursuant to
subparagraph (b), determines that the commencement of
commercial production within five years would exceed the
production ceiling in article 151, paragraphs 2 to 7, of the
Convention, the applicant shall hold a priority over any other
applicant for the award of the next production authorization
allowed by the production ceiling.
(d) If two or more pioneer investors apply for production
authorizations to begin commercial production at the same time
and article 151, paragraphs 2 to 7, of the Convention, would not
permit all such production to commence simultaneously, the
Authority shall notify the pioneer investors concerned. Within
three months of such notification, they shall decide whether
and, if so, to what extent they wish to apportion the allowable
tonnage among themselves.
(e) If, pursuant to subparagraph (d), the pioneer investors
concerned decide not to apportion the available production
among themselves they shall agree on an order of priority for
production authorizations and all subsequent applications for
production authorizations will be granted after those referred to
in this subparagraph have been approved.
(f) If, pursuant to subparagraph (d), the pioneer investors
concerned decide to apportion the available production among
themselves, the Authority shall award each of them a
204
production authorization for such lesser quantity as they have
agreed. In each case the stated production requirements of the
applicant will be approved and their full production will be
allowed as soon as the production ceiling admits of additional
capacity sufficient for the applicants involved in the
competition. All subsequent applications for production
authorizations will only be granted after the requirements of
this subparagraph have been met and the applicant is no longer
subject to the reduction of production provided for in this
subparagraph.
(g) If the parties fail to reach agreement within the stated time
period, the matter shall be decided immediately by the means
provided for in paragraph 5(c) in accordance with the criteria
set forth in Annex III, article 7, paragraphs 3 and 5, of the
Convention.
10. (a) Any rights acquired by entities or natural or juridical persons
which possess the nationality of or are effectively controlled by
a State or States whose status as certifying State has been
terminated, shall lapse unless the pioneer investor changes its
nationality and sponsorship within six months of the date of
such termination, as provided for in subparagraph (b).
(b) A pioneer investor may change its nationality and sponsorship
from that existing at the time of its registration as a pioneer
investor to that of any State Party to the Convention which has
effective control over the pioneer investor in terms of
paragraph l(a).
(c) Changes of nationality and sponsorship pursuant to this
paragraph shall not affect any right or priority conferred on a
pioneer investor pursuant to paragraphs 6 and 8.
11. The Commission shall:
(a) provide each pioneer investor with the certificate of compliance
with the provisions of this resolution referred to in paragraph 8;
and
(b) include in its final report required by paragraph 11 of
resolution I of the Conference details of all registrations of
pioneer investors and allocations of pioneer areas pursuant to
this resolution.
12. In order to ensure that the Enterprise is able to carry out activities in
the Area in such a manner as to keep pace with States and other entities:
(a) every registered pioneer investor shall:
(i) carry out exploration, at the request of the Commission,
in the area reserved, pursuant to paragraph 3 in
connection with its application, for activities in the Area
by the Authority through the Enterprise or in association
with developing States, on the basis that the costs so
incurred plus interest thereon at the rate of 10 per cent per
annum shall be reimbursed;
(ii) provide training at all levels for personnel designated by
the Commission;
(iii) undertake before the entry into force of the Convention,
to perform the obligations prescribed in the Convention
relating to transfer of technology;
(b) every certifying State shall:
205
(i) ensure that the necessary funds are made available to the
Enterprise in a timely manner in accordance with the
Convention, upon its entry into force; and
(ii) report periodically to the Commission on the activities
carried out by it, by its entities or natural or juridical
persons.
13. The Authority and its organs shall recognize and honour the rights
and obligations arising from this resolution and the decisions of the
Commission taken pursuant to it.
14. Without prejudice to paragraph 13, this resolution shall have effect
until the entry into force of the Convention.
15. Nothing in this resolution shall derogate from Annex III, article 6,
paragraph 3(c), of the Convention.
RESOLUTION III
The Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
Having regard to the Convention on the Law of the Sea,
Bearing in mind the Charter of the United Nations, in particular
Article 73,
1. Declares that:
(a) In the case of a territory whose people have not attained full
independence or other self-governing status recognized by the
United Nations, or a territory under colonial domination,
provisions concerning rights and interests under the Convention
shall be implemented for the benefit of the people of the
territory with a view to promoting their well-being and
development.
(b) Where a dispute exists between States over the sovereignty of
a territory to which this resolution applies, in respect of which
the United Nations has recommended specific means of
settlement, there shall be consultations between the parties to
that dispute regarding the exercise of the rights referred to in
subparagraph (a). In such consultations the interests of the
people of the territory concerned shall be a fundamental
consideration. Any exercise of those rights shall take into
account the relevant resolutions of the United Nations and shall
be without prejudice to the position of any party to the dispute.
The States concerned shall make every effort to enter into
provisional arrangements of a practical nature and shall not
jeopardize or hamper the reaching of a final settlement of the
dispute.
2. Requests the Secretary-General of the United Nations to bring this
resolution to the attention of all Members of the United Nations and the other
participants in the Conference, as well as the principal organs of the United
Nations, and to request their compliance with it.
RESOLUTION IV
The Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
Bearing in mind that national liberation movements have been invited to
participate in the Conference as observers in accordance with rule 62 of its
rules of procedure,
206
Decides that the national liberation movements, which have been
participating in the Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
shall be entitled to sign the Final Act of the Conference, in their capacity as
observers.
ANNEX II
STATEMENT OF UNDERSTANDING
CONCERNING A SPECIFIC METHOD
TO BE USED IN ESTABLISHING
THE OUTER EDGE OF THE CONTINENTAL MARGIN
The Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
Considering the special characteristics of a State’s continental margin
where: (1) the average distance at which the 200 metre isobath occurs is not
more than 20 nautical miles; (2) the greater proportion of the sedimentary
rock of the continental margin lies beneath the rise; and
Taking into account the inequity that would result to that State from the
application to its continental margin of article 76 of the Convention, in that,
the mathematical average of the thickness of sedimentary rock along a line
established at the maximum distance permissible in accordance with the
provisions of paragraph 4(a)(i) and (ii) of that article as representing the
entire outer edge of the continental margin would not be less than
3.5 kilometres; and that more than half of the margin would be excluded
thereby;
Recognizes that such State may, notwithstanding the provisions of
article 76, establish the outer edge of its continental margin by straight lines
not exceeding 60 nautical miles in length connecting fixed points, defined by
latitude and longitude, at each of which the thickness of sedimentary rock is
not less than 1 kilometre,
Where a State establishes the outer edge of its continental margin by
applying the method set forth in the preceding paragraph of this statement,
this method may also be utilized by a neighbouring State for delineating the
outer edge of its continental margin on a common geological feature, where
its outer edge would lie on such feature on a line established at the maximum
distance permissible in accordance with article 76, paragraph 4(a)(i) and (ii),
along which the mathematical average of the thickness of sedimentary rock
is not less than 3.5 kilometres,
The Conference requests the Commission on the Limits of the
Continental Shelf set up pursuant to Annex II of the Convention, to be
governed by the terms of this Statement when making its recommendations
on matters related to the establishment of the outer edge of the continental
margins of these States in the southern part of the Bay of Bengal.
207
ANNEX VI
RESOLUTION ON DEVELOPMENT OF
NATIONAL MARINE SCIENCE, TECHNOLOGY
AND OCEAN SERVICE INFRASTRUCTURES
The Third United Nations Conference on the Law of the Sea,
Recognizing that the Convention on the Law of the Sea is intended to
establish a new regime for the seas and oceans which will contribute to the
realization of a just and equitable international economic order through
making provision for the peaceful use of ocean space, the equitable and
efficient management and utilization of its resources, and the study,
protection and preservation of the marine environment,
Bearing in mind that the new regime must take into account, in particular,
the special needs and interests of the developing countries, whether coastal,
land-locked, or geographically disadvantaged,
Aware of the rapid advances being made in the field of marine science
and technology, and the need for the developing countries, whether coastal,
land-locked, or geographically disadvantaged, to share in these achievements
if the aforementioned goals are to be met,
Convinced that, unless urgent measures are taken, the marine scientific
and technological gap between the developed and the developing countries
will widen further and thus endanger the very foundations of the new regime,
Believing that optimum utilization of the new opportunities for social and
economic development offered by the new regime will be facilitated through
action at the national and international level aimed at strengthening national
capabilities in marine science, technology and ocean services, particularly in
the developing countries, with a view to ensuring the rapid absorption and
efficient application of technology and scientific knowledge available to
them,
Considering that national and regional marine scientific and
technological centres would be the principal institutions through which States
and, in particular, the developing countries, foster and conduct marine
scientific research, and receive and disseminate marine technology,
Recognizing the special role of the competent international organizations
envisaged by the Convention on the Law of the Sea, especially in relation to
the establishment and development of national and regional marine scientific
and technological centres,
Noting that present efforts undertaken within the United Nations system
in training, education and assistance in the field of marine science and
technology and ocean services are far below current requirements and would
be particularly inadequate to meet the demands generated through operation
of the Convention on the Law of the Sea,
Welcoming recent initiatives within international organizations to
promote and coordinate their major international assistance programmes
aimed at strengthening marine science infrastructures in developing countries,
1. Calls upon all Member States to determine appropriate priorities in
their development plans for the strengthening of their marine science,
technology and ocean services;
2. Calls upon the developing countries to establish programmes for the
promotion of technical cooperation among themselves in the field of marine
science, technology and ocean service development;
208
3. Urges the industrialized countries to assist the developing countries
in the preparation and implementation of their marine science, technology and
ocean service development programmes;
4. Recommends that the World Bank, the regional banks, the United
Nations Development Programme, the United Nations Financing System for
Science and Technology and other multilateral funding agencies augment and
coordinate their operations for the provision of funds to developing countries
for the preparation and implementation of major programmes of assistance in
strengthening their marine science, technology and ocean services;
5. Recommends that all competent international organizations within
the United Nations system expand programmes within their respective fields
of competence for assistance to developing countries in the field of marine
science, technology and ocean services and coordinate their efforts on a
system-wide basis in the implementation of such programmes, paying
particular attention to the special needs of the developing countries, whether
coastal, land-locked or geographically disadvantaged;
6. Requests the Secretary-General of the United Nations to transmit this
resolution to the General Assembly at its thirty-seventh session.